diff options
Diffstat (limited to '42874-0.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 42874-0.txt | 10363 |
1 files changed, 10363 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/42874-0.txt b/42874-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8b45530 --- /dev/null +++ b/42874-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,10363 @@ +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 42874 *** + + IN THE GRIP OF THE MULLAH + + _A TALE OF ADVENTURE IN SOMALILAND_ + + BY CAPTAIN F. S. BRERETON + + Author of "One of the Fighting Scouts" "The Dragon of Pekin" "With + Rifle and Bayonet" etc. + + + _ILLUSTRATED BY CHARLES M. SHELDON_ + + + NEW YORK + CHARLES SCRIBNER'S SONS + 1903 + + Copyright, 1903, by + CHARLES SCRIBNER'S SONS + + _Published September, 1903_ + + + THE CAXTON PRESS + New York City, U. S. A. + + + + +[Illustration: THE LEADING MAN FELL TO THE DECK.] + + + + +CONTENTS + + + CHAPTER PAGE + + I. THE CASTAWAY 1 + + II. OFF TO ADEN 16 + + III. THE GUN-RUNNERS 31 + + IV. IN DISGUISE 49 + + V. A DESPERATE ENCOUNTER 66 + + VI. ON AFRICAN SHORES 84 + + VII. THE "MAD" MULLAH 101 + + VIII. PREPARING TO ADVANCE 120 + + IX. AGAINST HEAVY ODDS 137 + + X. FIGHTING THE TRIBESMEN 155 + + XI. A MARCH INTO THE DESERT 172 + + XII. IN TOUCH WITH THE MULLAH 190 + + XIII. THE WHITE PRISONER 207 + + XIV. HEMMED IN BY THE ENEMY 223 + + XV. A CLEVER RUSE 239 + + XVI. THE LAST DARING ATTEMPT 255 + + XVII. A DASH FOR LIBERTY 271 + + XVIII. IN THE GOLD MINE 287 + + XIX. A STRATEGIC RETREAT 305 + + XX. BACK TO THE COAST 323 + + + + +ILLUSTRATIONS + + + PAGE + + THE LEADING MAN FELL TO THE DECK _Frontispiece_ + + THE NATIVES CROWDED ABOUT THEM WITH THREATENING + GESTURES 50 + + MAP OF SOMALILAND 108 + + "FIRE!" SHOUTED JIM. "EMPTY YOUR RIFLES INTO THEM!" 148 + + JIM KEPT HIS REVOLVER STEADILY LEVELLED 218 + + JIM SPRANG UPON THE MAN 266 + + THE WARRIORS HAD HALTED UPON THE PATH WITHIN A + FEW PACES OF THE FUGITIVES 292 + + + + +IN THE GRIP OF THE MULLAH + + + + +CHAPTER I + +THE CASTAWAY + + +"Perim!" shouted Colonel Hubbard, placing his hand to his mouth, and his +lips close to the ear of his friend Major Bellamy. "The island of Perim, +or I am much mistaken. It lies in the Strait of Bab-el-Mandeb, and has +proved the destruction of more than one fine vessel. I can tell you +that, on this dark night and with this fierce gale blowing, we are lucky +to have caught even a glimpse of the light, and still more fortunate to +have slipped by in safety. Now we leave the Red Sea, and run into the +Gulf of Aden, where we shall feel the full force of the wind and waves. +However, what does that matter? Better plenty of water all round, even +though it is lashed into frenzy, than a lee shore close at hand, a dark +night, and no bearings to steer by. Halloa, there's the flash of the +light again!" + +Clinging with one hand to the rail which ran round the saloon, the +speaker pointed eagerly into the darkness. Aided by the faint gleam of +the electric lamp which was suspended from the spar deck above their +heads, his comrade, Major Bellamy, followed the direction of his +finger, and having watched for a few seconds, suddenly exclaimed: + +"Yes, colonel, you're right! I could have sworn that there was nothing +but inky blackness over in that direction. But there's no doubt about +the matter. The light is flashing in that quarter, I'll stake my word +upon it. Won't our skipper be joyful! I heard him saying, an hour or +more ago, that our safety depended upon his sighting the island; and +there it is, sure enough. Well it's a great relief, and now I can turn +in with some degree of assurance. I'm not nervous, you know, colonel, +but, by Jove, a storm like this, and a pitch dark night such as we are +experiencing, make one a little anxious in spite of one's self. Now, if +it were on land, and we were in an enemy's country, I should feel far +more at my ease. I'd double the pickets, of course, so as to give the +boys a little more courage, don't you know; for even a soldier feels +queer when posted a couple of hundred yards away from his fellows, +especially if he knows that a score or more of niggers are probably +crawling round like ghosts, ready to fall upon him at any moment. Yes, +I've had experience of that, and I well remember how fidgety I was, for +we were fighting on the West Coast, and knew well that the natives of +Ashantee were as cruel and as cunning as they make 'em. So I'd double +the pickets, colonel, and I'd make a point of going round to inspect +them, and at the same time to encourage them, every quarter of an hour. +Depend upon it, nothing like letting Thomas Atkins know that his officer +is at hand, taking an interest in him, and ready to help him at any +moment." + +"Just so," responded the colonel, clinging the while with all his +strength to the rail, for the steamer was rolling and plunging heavily. +"Quite right, Bellamy; I'd do the same. But what can our poor skipper +do? He can't send out sentries, and if he could they would be useless on +a night like this. He must just trust to his eyes, and to his skill as a +navigator. But, thank Heaven, we are out of the Red Sea and well on our +way for India. Heigho! I'm sleepy, and, like you, want to turn in. +Good-night! Let's hope the sea will have gone down by morning." + +With a nod, they separated, and, still taking advantage of the rail, +went along the slippery and deserted deck to their quarters. This was no +easy matter, for every now and again their progress was impeded by the +plunging of the vessel, which caused them to halt and cling frantically +to their support till they saw a favourable opportunity to proceed. + +"Good-night!" shouted the major, who reached the companion first, +turning to wave his arm to his friend; but his words were caught by the +wind and whisked into space. Then he dived below. The colonel never saw +him again. + +Colonel Hubbard and his friend Major Bellamy were on their way to India +to rejoin their regiments, both having for the past two years been +engaged in special work in South Africa. At another time the ship would +have been full to overflowing with troops, going to the East to replace +those who had completed their term of service there, but, owing to the +fact that all Indian reliefs had practically been suspended during the +South African war, there were only a few other officers on board. + +The steamer had sailed from Liverpool ten days before, and had made a +fine passage to the Suez Canal. But now a change had come over the +weather, the glass had fallen with surprising swiftness, and a fierce +gale had sprung up. Navigating his vessel with all possible care, the +captain had at length the satisfaction of piloting her past the island +of Perim, and had breathed more freely as he steered a course into the +Gulf of Aden, _en route_ for the Indian Ocean. + +"We're safer here, at any rate," he remarked in tones of satisfaction to +the first mate, as the two stood poring over a chart in the deck-house +on the bridge. "We've our bearings, and can go straight ahead till dawn. +But we shall have to be careful to take into account the set of the +gale. I reckon that we are making a knot or more to leeward for every +five we advance. So keep her helm well up, Farmer, and send to wake me +if you have any doubts. If I were at all anxious, I'd keep at my post +till morning; but now that we're in the open sea, there can be nothing +to fear. A bright look-out, then, and good-night." + +The captain gave vent to a loud yawn, and wearily left the chart-house; +for he had resolutely kept at his station on the bridge ever since the +ship entered the canal, and was now completely worn out. Groping his +way, he descended to the spar deck, and disappeared into his cabin. Ten +minutes later the gleam of light from his porthole was suddenly cut off, +and the deck outside was plunged into darkness. + +For three hours the fine ship plunged forward, ploughing deep into the +waves and rolling heavily every minute. But no one suspected danger. Why +should they indeed? What harm could come to such a powerful vessel in +this open sea? Evidently the mate, as he kept watch upon the bridge, had +no qualms, for he even hummed the refrain of a popular London air as he +clung to the chart-house table, and pricked off the course run during +the night. Danger! Why, not a soul expected such a thing, for if they +had, would the passengers have been lying below in their bunks, vainly +endeavouring to snatch a few moments' sleep? Certainly not. They would +have been cowering in the open, a prey to terror, expecting every moment +to bring some dire catastrophe. + +"We're in the gulf, and safe," murmured the colonel, thrusting a pillow +between his shoulders and the edge of his bunk, so that he might retain +his position more easily. "We've a capable skipper and crew, and, so far +as I can see, we have nothing to fear. So here's for a snooze till +morning." + +With that he turned on his side, and, covering his head with the +clothes, settled himself for slumber. + +Crash! The shock threw every sleeper from his bunk, and even brought the +steersman to the deck. Crash! Suddenly arrested in her onward progress, +the ship drew back for a moment, and then hurled herself with awful +force against the obstruction. For the space of a few seconds she +remained firmly fixed, and then, to the accompaniment of rending iron +and timber, and the crash of the waves as they beat against her side, +she slid into deep water once more, and wallowed there, as if undecided +how to act. But there was no pausing with that sea raging all about her, +and with such a gale forcing her onward. Heaving her stern high into the +air, she rushed upon the unknown reef for the third time, seeming to +leap at it eagerly in the vain hope of surmounting it. A moment later +her keel fell upon the rock with a sickening bump, and breaking asunder +in the bows, she disappeared in the raging sea. + +It was a frightful calamity, and Colonel Hubbard, as he clung to a +portion of the wreck, could scarcely believe that he was awake--could +hardly realize that this was not some terrible dream, a nightmare for +which the storm and its attendant discomforts was to blame. + +"Wrecked?" he wondered, shaking his head to clear his eyes of water, and +shifting his grasp so as to obtain a more secure position. "Am I awake, +or is this only imagination? No; I am wet and shivering. It is all too +real." + +At this moment a monstrous wave bore down upon him, and clinging +desperately to the tangled seaweed with which the rock was thickly +covered, he braced himself to withstand the strain to which he was about +to be subjected. Taking a long breath, he had just time to close his +eyes when the mass of water was upon him. Clasping him in its cold +embrace, it tore him from his hold as if he were weaker than a child, +and then, bearing him onward, it hurled him against a piece of floating +wreckage, and left him there, breathless, gasping for air, and almost +unconscious. But the instinct of self-preservation soon asserted itself, +and ere a minute had passed he was astride the floating woodwork, +clinging to it with all his strength. + +"If this is torn from me," he gasped, "I shall be washed away and +drowned. But it shan't be, I'll see to that, for I don't mean to die +yet. Things look black enough, but I won't give in." + +Clenching his teeth, the gallant colonel clung to the wreckage gamely, +and, though frequently submerged beneath the huge masses of green water +which rolled and tossed about him, contrived to maintain his hold. +Breathless, and shivering--for it was the winter season, and a +piercingly cold wind blew through the gulf--he rode his strange steed +through the remainder of the night, and just as the dawn was breaking, +and the dark clouds in the east were beginning to light up with the rays +of the rising sun, he espied a low bank of sand lying directly before +him. Shading his eyes with his hands, he looked long and eagerly, and +then gave vent to a shout of joy. Yes, though he had lost the best +friend he ever had during the night, and had to mourn the death of every +one of the crew and passengers of the ill-fated liner, yet so strong is +the love of life to the average healthy individual, that Colonel +Hubbard's spirits were raised to the highest by this piece of good +fortune. + +"Land, land!" he shouted excitedly, sitting up upon the baulk of timber +to obtain a better view. "I reckon it is two hundred yards away, and +getting closer every minute. I'm a bit done, or I'd make nothing of the +swim. But I mustn't forget that the gulf has a reputation for its +sharks; they are said to swarm everywhere, and to be only too ready to +snap up everything that comes within their reach. Ugh, I won't give 'em +a chance!" + +Shivering at the thought, the colonel turned once more to the land, and +watched it closely as the light of the dawning day disclosed its various +features. + +"A long rolling sandbank," he said thoughtfully, "with blue hills in the +distance, and scarcely a patch of vegetation to be seen. Now, what shore +can it be? The gale has been from the northeast, and therefore it must +be the northern coast of Africa, and, I fear, a desolate, uninhabited +region altogether. But I mustn't begin to grumble when Providence has +watched over me so carefully. I must just make the best of matters, and +be thankful that my life is saved." + +Cheering himself with these thoughts, and with the reflection that, once +ashore, the greater part of his troubles would be ended, the colonel +began to paddle with his hands and kick out with his feet. By now, too, +he had the satisfaction of finding that he was in smooth water, though a +line of hissing surf in front of him, and the dull boom of breakers +falling upon the sand told him clearly that he had still some danger to +contend with. But what was it, after all, when compared with the storm +he had outlived that night? He asked himself the question, and for +answer prepared to leave the piece of wreckage which had proved his +salvation, and strike out for the shore. + +"I should be a fool to stick to it longer," he said. "Once in those +breakers it would be twisted and turned in every direction, and if it +did not stun me by a blow upon the head, it might very well roll over me +and crush the life out of my body. So here goes!" + +Slipping gently into the water, he struck out for the shore, firmly +determined to do battle with the breakers. Almost before he thought it +possible he reached the broad white line, and was engulfed in a moment. +And now, indeed, his powers of endurance were put to the test, for +whereas a green wave had frequently covered him for the space of a +minute whilst in the open sea, now the seething water bubbled and +frothed about his mouth and ears continually. Then, too, caught by the +fierce wind which was blowing, a sheet of spray covered the tops of the +breakers, making breathing almost an impossibility. But the colonel was +no chicken, and now that he had come through so much danger, was +determined to reach the shore alive. Undaunted, therefore, and with +never a pause, he struggled manfully onward. + +At length, worn out with his exertions, he reached shallow water, and +though the receding waves did their utmost to drag him backwards, he +contrived to escape their fatal embrace, and to reach a belt of dry and +glistening sand upon which he threw himself at full length, for he was +utterly exhausted. A quarter of an hour later he sprang to his feet, +and, turning from the sea, set out for the interior. + +"I shall starve if I stay here," he said, "for there's not a living soul +in sight, and not a tree or green bush to be seen. I'm done, and I want +food and drink badly. Perhaps I shall find both over that line of +sandhills, and in any case by climbing to the top I shall have a better +opportunity of looking about me to see how the land lies. Perhaps I +shall see a village in the distance, or a shepherd's hut, and if so I'll +go straight on and give myself into the hands of the inhabitants. It'll +be risky, I know, but I must just chance it." + +Trudging onward through the sand, which often rose above his ankles, he +at length reached the summit of a low range of dunes which the wind, +during centuries of ceaseless energy, had blown into position. + +"Ah!" No wonder the colonel gave vent to an exclamation of astonishment, +for when he reached the top he saw immediately before him a native camp. +It was composed of numerous shelters of coarse linen or tattered +camel-hide, which were dotted about the sand in regular order. Farther +off were herds of sheep and goats and of camels, browsing upon the grass +which here cropped out in every direction. There were also many horses, +and natives were standing about, watching the animals as they fed. But +what attracted his attention most and filled him with a feeling of +dismay, was the sight of some thirty or forty armed men who sat on +horseback in the midst of the camp. They were wild-looking natives, +swarthy of feature, tall, and not ungainly, and clad from head to foot +in flowing robes of white. Some were armed with guns, while a few +carried long spears and shields, which they waved frantically above +their heads. Then, at a shout from one of them who had suddenly caught +sight of the colonel, they set their horses in motion, and came +galloping at a headlong pace towards him. In a few moments he was +surrounded, and very soon he was bound hand and foot, a prisoner of +these fierce warriors of Somaliland. + +Two hours later the camp was struck, and the natives began to march +into the interior, driving their herds before them. The colonel's legs +were freed, and he was ordered by signs to rise and follow his captors. +To attempt to disobey was useless, and therefore, with downcast head and +spirits at the lowest, he trudged onward beside the horsemen, a native +with particularly brutal countenance riding close behind him. The +colonel noted at a glance the long double-handed sword with which this +ruffian was armed, and straightway he banished from his mind all +thoughts of resistance or escape. For a week the caravan pushed onward, +accomplishing, however, only short marches each day, for the pace was, +of course, regulated by that of the herds which accompanied them. On the +seventh day they reached their home, which consisted of a collection of +mud hovels, and thereafter settled down to enjoy the loot which they had +taken from the tribes inhabiting the coast. Colonel Hubbard was handed +over to the wife of the Sheik, as the headman of the tribe was known, +and at once became hewer of wood and drawer of water, a hateful and +laborious employment for a man who had fought so well for his country, +and who had commanded one of His Majesty's smart regiments. + +Of the passengers and crew of the ill-fated ship which had come to grief +in the Gulf of Aden not another soul escaped. The colonel, who was thus +carried off into captivity, was the only survivor. + + * * * * * + +"Come in, my lad," said the head master of a large school situated in +the Midlands, turning in his chair, as a knock sounded on his door. "Ah, +come in and sit down there, Hubbard. I'm grieved, my boy, terribly +grieved at this sad news. If only we knew for certain what had happened, +it would make this trouble easier to bear; but the doubt, the hope that +one dare not indulge in, is most trying. But you've come to see me. Have +you any more news?" + +As he spoke he sprang to his feet and crossed the floor to meet the +youth, who was no other than the son of the officer whose fortune we +have been following. Like his father, the lad was tall, and by no means +devoid of good looks. His features, indeed, had a close resemblance to +the colonel's. There was the same square chin, the same open, steady +look, and a similar air of resolution. + +"News, sir," responded James Hubbard, eagerly, declining the proffered +chair in his excitement, "yes, I have; look at that!" + +Thrusting his hand into his pocket, he produced a yellow envelope, and +offered it to his master with trembling fingers. + +"Good news, sir," he cried; "here is a telegram from my uncle which +gives me more hope. After all, father may not have gone down with the +ship. He may have been washed ashore. He may have had the good fortune +to secure a life-belt, which would have kept him afloat. Why should this +news not refer to him?" + +Snatching the telegram from him with equal eagerness, the head master +dragged the paper from the envelope and scanned the contents. + +"More news to hand," ran the telegram. "A native arrived last week at +Aden, having come from the Somali coast, and reports that, on the +morning following the night upon which the station at Perim sighted a +steamer passing east, a white man was cast upon the coast fifty miles +east of Berbera. He was at once pounced upon by a marauding band of +Somali warriors, despatched to the coast by the Mullah for the purpose +of obtaining loot and prisoners. This is the only news, except that +pieces of wreckage have been washed up close to Aden, while a +homeward-bound steamer picked up a portion of a stern rail bearing the +name of the ill-fated vessel." + +"Hum, it is certainly news," said the head master, doubtfully. "This +telegram proves beyond doubt that the ship upon which your father sailed +met with a catastrophe. But, my dear lad, anxious as I am to give you +hope, I feel bound to tell you that you must not jump to conclusions. +This man who was cast upon the coast, and who fell into the hands of +that fanatic known as the Mullah, may have been a stoker, a greaser, or +an able seaman aboard the ship. I do not wish to discourage you, of +course. God knows, if it were only possible, and certain news had been +received that it was your father and no one else who reached the shore, +I would rejoice with you, and do my utmost to aid you in obtaining +further information. But it is hopeless. Whoever it was who lived +through that night and safely reached the African shore, would have been +far happier, far more fortunate, had he perished like the rest." + +The head master paused for a few moments, and stood looking at the young +fellow before him. There was no doubt that he was full of sympathy for +his loss, and anxious to help him. But what could he do? To advise the +lad to hope on would have been cruel in the circumstances. Better, far +better, to put the facts plainly before him, even though in doing so he +should cause him bitter grief. Yes, that was the best course to pursue, +for to hold out the hope that his father still lived, simply upon the +strength of this news just received, would have been madness--indeed, +the greatest unkindness possible. Why, the man who fell into the hands +of the Mullah was more surely dead than all those others who had sunk to +the depths of the ocean. + +"Don't think, my lad, that I am lacking in sympathy," he went on, taking +a pace forward, and placing his hand encouragingly on Jim's shoulder. "I +wish to help you to bear this trouble, and I feel that, when I tell you +to extinguish all hope, I am giving you the best and the most +considerate advice. There, tell me that you will take it in this way. +Try to absorb yourself in work, and so forget your loss. Do not let this +hideous uncertainty prey upon your mind, but banish it, for that is far +the best course to pursue." + +He pressed his hand more firmly upon Jim's shoulder, and looked +earnestly into his face, as if to help him in coming to a decision. But +the young fellow scarcely seemed to be aware of his presence. His eyes +were fixed upon some distant object visible through the window, and his +thoughts were evidently still farther away. His head was bowed upon his +breast, and he looked for the moment as though this trouble, which had +come upon him at such an early age, was crushing him. But suddenly his +eye brightened, and a more cheerful expression overspread his face. He +straightened himself, and, raising his head, looked steadily at his +master. + +"Thank you, sir," he said. "I know how kind you are, and that in +speaking to me in this way, and in giving me the benefit of your +experience and of your advice, you have acted with the sole purpose of +assisting me. But I cannot believe that my father is dead; I cannot, +indeed. Something tells me that he has survived the wreck, and that this +white man referred to in the telegram is none other than he. Until I +prove this or the contrary, I can never rest, and never settle to my +work. I am thankful now that my mother is not alive to feel this grief. +I am an only child, and my father is my best and kindest friend. I +cannot, and will not, forsake him. I don't know now how I shall act, but +I feel that if the necessity arises, as, indeed, it must, I will +willingly make my way into the heart of Somaliland, into the midst of +the Mullah's bands, and there clear up this doubt. If I find that it was +not he who was washed ashore and captured by the natives, then I shall +be far easier in my mind, and besides, sir, I might have the good +fortune at the same time to bring help to this poor captive. If he were +only a stoker, it would be sufficient reward to have rescued him from +such an horrible fate." + +"But your examination, my lad. Will you permit yourself to miss it +altogether?" exclaimed the head master. "Think what it means to you. You +have now been reading hard for a year, and in two months, if only you +are successful, as I fully believe you will be, you will have won a +commission in the Army, and will be on the high-road to success, to +follow in the footsteps of your worthy father." + +"I will give it up, sir," replied Jim, emphatically. "Everything must be +put aside for the sake of my father. I would rather lose this +commission, and spend the remainder of my days upon an office-stool, +than leave this doubt unsettled. It haunts me, and though I know how +hopeless the matter is, I will go through with it till I am sure of my +father's fate. But, in spite of everything, I feel that he still lives, +and, perhaps, is even now wondering whether his son will take up his +cause and set out for the purpose of rescuing him. There, sir, forgive +me for saying that my mind is firmly made up, and that I must act +contrary to your advice. In any other matter I would, as you know, have +instantly fallen in with your wishes. But here it is different, for my +father's life may be at stake, and both his happiness and mine depend +upon my exertions. Therefore, I ask you to let me leave at once and go +to my uncle. I will talk the matter over with him, and I feel sure that +he will help me in every way." + +Involuntarily Jim's hand left the pocket in which it had been reposing, +and went out to meet his master's. And there together they stood for the +space of a minute exchanging a firm and cordial clasp. + +"You are a credit to me!" exclaimed the head master, enthusiastically. +"A credit, I say, and your comrades here will be even prouder of you +than I am. I have put the position plainly before you. And, without +wishing to discourage you, have endeavoured to point out how hopeless it +is. You must know as well as I do what dangers and difficulties will +have to be faced in this undertaking, for your father and the many books +you have read will have given you some idea of life in Africa. Knowing +all this, and with a full knowledge that if you persevere in your search +you must undergo privation and exposure, and may even lose your life, +you tell me that you will sail for that country; that you have firmly +made up your mind to go through with it all for the sake of your father? +Then leave us, my lad, and may Heaven help you, for you are a brave +young fellow, and deserve the utmost success. There, go to your room and +pack your boxes. A cab will be at the door in half an hour; that will +enable you to catch the next train for London. There, leave me now. I +wish to think over the matter quietly before I say farewell." + +Once more the two shook hands in silence, and then, turning about, Jim +went hurriedly from the room, and hastened to prepare for his journey. +An hour later he was in the train, and that evening had arrived at his +destination, leaving his friends at the school to mourn the loss of as +fine and good-hearted a young fellow as had ever entered its portals. + + + + +CHAPTER II + +OFF TO ADEN + + +Jim Hubbard was a young gentleman of decidedly prepossessing appearance. +Broad of shoulder, and particularly well set up for a lad of a little +more than seventeen summers, he looked for all that far too young to +have such troubles thrown upon his shoulders, to be called thus early in +his life to face a difficulty which might well prove too great for a man +of mature years and experience. But just as the colonel was endowed with +the pluck and perseverance which had enabled him to live through that +wild night in the Gulf of Aden, so also was his son gifted with a spirit +and tenacity that helped him now to make up his mind to face any danger +and difficulty in accomplishing the task he had set himself. + +"It is clearly my duty," he said, as he trudged along from the London +terminus of the railway to his uncle's residence in Kensington, "to see +this matter through to the end. I have spent hours and hours in thinking +about it, and have always come to the same conclusion. Until this doubt +is absolutely settled, I can never rest, and never be sure that my +father is not living. I will show him and all those who are interested +in him that I am no fair-weather friend, and that I am prepared to stick +to him and to his cause until further search is useless. I cannot +imagine anyone placed in similar circumstances coming to any other +determination, and if I were to hesitate now and allow imaginary dangers +to frighten me, I should be a coward at heart, and unfit to bear my +father's name. I'll put the facts before Uncle George, and I'm sure he +will do his utmost to help me. Ah, there is his house opposite." + +Crossing the street, James mounted the steps of a handsome dwelling, and +pulled the bell vigorously. A moment later the door was thrown open by a +footman, who had scarcely taken possession of his bag and ushered him +into the hall before a short, stout old gentleman, with grey whiskers +and hair and a florid countenance, bustled forward to greet him. Mr. +George Hubbard was, in fact, some ten years the colonel's senior, and +was of decidedly comfortable appearance. Indeed, whereas his younger +brother had led an active life, going hither and thither to all parts of +the world, wherever the duties of a soldier called him, George could +scarcely boast that he had ever left the shores of old England. + +"I'm a regular stay-at-home, and never feel better, nor more contented, +than when I am engaged in my business in London," he had often said, +with no small amount of satisfaction and pride. "I confess that a +soldier's life never had any attraction for me, though, like all +civilians, I can and do admire the man who goes out to face death at the +call of his country." + +As he advanced towards Jim with outstretched hand, his fat, +good-humoured face showed the concern he felt for his young nephew. + +"My dear, dear boy, welcome!" he exclaimed. "I don't know what to say to +you, or how to help you in this distressing affair. Both your aunt and I +have done nothing but talk the matter over, and have, indeed, spent +sleepless nights in endeavouring to come to some conclusion, but without +success. It is the most cruel, the most unhappy misfortune that I have +ever experienced. But come upstairs. Your aunt would never forgive me if +I kept her waiting." + +Wiping the moisture from his forehead, and coughing as though the effort +of speaking had been almost too much for him, George Hubbard turned and +led the way upstairs. Jim followed him closely, and a minute later was +in his aunt's presence. Then sitting down, the three discussed the +matter fully, Jim telling his relatives to what decision he had come. + +"You know the facts as well as I do, uncle," he said, "and I am going to +ask you to do all you can to help me, and not to try and thwart me. I +know how hopeless my mission must seem to you, and that many would think +I was undertaking a wild-goose chase. But, as I told the head master at +school, I feel sure that the man cast up upon the African coast was my +father, and if that is the case, he surely needs my help. I have been +thinking the matter over as I came up in the train, and bought a map +specially to help me. By it I see that my best course will be to take a +steamer direct to Aden, and from there I shall be able to get a trader +to Berbera. Meanwhile, I shall telegraph to the News Agency which +supplied the information sent me this morning, and will endeavour to +arrange that the man who saw this survivor of the wreck land upon the +coast, and afterwards fall into the hands of the Mullah's Somali +warriors, shall be in waiting to receive me. Then, with him as guide, I +shall make my way to the actual point where the incident happened, and +from there we shall turn our faces inland. It may happen that I shall be +able to join some shooting expedition, for one reads occasionally in the +papers that English gentlemen take caravans into that part of Africa for +the purpose of big game shooting. If not, I shall endeavour to hire a +few followers, and take up the search alone. I know it sounds a big +thing to attempt, uncle; but wouldn't you do the same in a similar +case?" + +George Hubbard gasped. He was a man of peace, and though well read and +thoroughly sensible, he had, nevertheless, an exaggerated idea of the +wildness and dangers to be met with in Africa. Nor could he be blamed +for that, for weeks past the papers had been filled with accounts of +Somaliland, and of the doings of the Mullah. And now to sit there in a +comfortable armchair before his open hearth, and hear his young nephew +calmly propose to sail for Africa, and make his way into the very heart +of the Somali country, was quite enough to make a man of his disposition +do more than gasp. He sat forward in his chair staring at Jim with a +horrified expression on his face, and with eyes which threatened to fall +out of his head. + +"Go to Africa! March into the interior, and probably meet the Mullah +face to face!" he exclaimed, mopping his forehead with his handkerchief. +"Good gracious, you will be killed, you will lose your life to a +certainty!" + +"I may, uncle," responded Jim, calmly. "On the other hand, there is a +possibility of my succeeding, for many men have made their way into +Somaliland and returned to tell the tale. Think of the joy it would be +to rescue father." + +"But it is madness, Jim! Because one single white man out of some two or +three hundred who left England on that unlucky ship contrived to reach +the shore alive, you fly to the conclusion that it must have been my +poor brother. It is utter folly to argue in this way, though I cannot +help but admire the brave thought which prompts you. Still, I am a +matter-of-fact man, and I say, without hesitation, that the dangers are +too great, and the end too uncertain, to justify your taking the risks. +However, no efforts and no money shall be spared to obtain further +information, and should it turn out, as I trust and hope it may, that +this survivor is indeed my brother, then you shall go. Indeed, so +deeply do I feel his loss, that I am tempted to say that I, too, would +join you in the search. But that would be foolish, considering what I +am, and how utterly unfitted for such exertions." + +He rose from his seat, and turning, stood facing Jim, with a comical +look of despair upon his features. For some minutes there was silence, +and then, just as he was about to begin a long and telling argument, +with the object of dissuading Jim from an attempt which, to his uncle, +appeared worse than madness, a knock sounded on the door, and a footman +entered. + +"A telegram, sir," he said. + +With an agile spring, which was wonderful considering his unwieldy +proportions, George Hubbard left his position by the fire, and darted +across the room. Taking the telegram from the footman, he tore it open, +and then began to read it aloud, while Jim and his aunt jumped to their +feet and looked over his shoulder. + +"From the News Agency!" he cried excitedly. "I gave them instructions to +spare no expense in obtaining information, and here is the result." + +"Read it!" exclaimed Jim and his aunt, impatiently. "What does it say?" + +"Listen!" answered Mr. Hubbard, holding the paper so that the light +should fall upon it. "'In accordance with your instructions, we have +questioned native who gave information. He states that surviving white +man was tall, with dark hair, getting grey at temples, grey moustache, +and muscular body. Not quite certain, owing to distance, but thinks he +caught a glimpse of a bangle about his wrist. If not that, it was a +piece of cloth tied there, perhaps to cover a wound.'" + +"That is father!" shouted Jim, unable to restrain his excitement. "I am +certain it is he, for the description tallies exactly with his +appearance, and, moreover, he was in the habit of wearing a watch +bracelet upon his wrist." + +"Tall, dark hair getting grey, and grey moustache," repeated Mr. +Hubbard, as if to assure himself that he had read the telegram aright. +"There can be no doubt that this is my brother. I quite agree with you, +Jim, for, though it is possible, and even very probable, that many men +aboard the ship would have answered to that description, the fact that +the survivor wore a dark bracelet upon his wrist is, in my opinion, an +absolute confirmation. I am glad, my boy--more than glad. Indeed, I +cannot tell you how much this good news rejoices my heart." + +Turning to his nephew, he grasped his hand and shook it till the lad's +fingers ached, patting him meanwhile upon the shoulder with his other +hand. + +"Yes, delighted; pleased beyond measure," he continued earnestly. "Now +you may rely upon the fact that your uncle is wholly on your side." + +As for Mrs. Hubbard, she had a tender heart, and gently pushing her +husband aside, threw herself into Jim's arms with tears of joy in her +eyes. + +"You deserve the good news, my dear boy," she said, kissing him +affectionately. "It went to my heart to see your silent grief, and how +bravely you had determined to clear up this uncertainty. It was horrible +to feel that your father might be dead, and still more trying to hear +that there was just a possibility that he was still alive, a captive in +the hands of this man they call the Mullah. The uncertainty was more +than I could bear, and I feel sure that, had I been a man, I should have +followed the same course, and gone to Africa, so as to set the matter +for ever at rest." + +"And now let us discuss the question," interposed Mr. Hubbard, pacing +restlessly up and down the room. "There must be no delay in setting out +to rescue my brother, and as we in England can do little, seeing that we +are so far from Somaliland, I advise that you at once take ship for +Aden. It happens that my firm have business relations with a man living +there. He exports camels to that part of Africa ruled over by the +Italians, and gathers in his warehouses every description of merchandise +which comes from the interior of the country. If anyone can help you he +is the man. Now, let me see, a ship will leave the London Docks for the +Mediterranean and Egypt to-morrow evening; we will telephone at once to +obtain a berth for you. That done, we will set about getting you a kit, +for it is absolutely necessary that you should go well provided, and in +that respect the utmost attention must be paid to weapons. That reminds +me, a gentleman of my acquaintance who has visited Africa for purposes +of sport happens to live close at hand. We will go in and see him at +once, for it is more than likely that he will be able to give us +valuable advice." + +It was wonderful to see the energy displayed by Mr. Hubbard. Now that +there was no doubt that it was his brother who had survived the wreck, +he was like a schoolboy in his eagerness to set about his rescue, and +took the matter up in a manner which showed that he was determined to do +as much for the cause in his own way as was his nephew. Hastening from +the room, he and Jim quickly donned their coats and hats, and hurried to +the nearest telephone station. As it was late in the evening, the +instrument was disengaged, and within five minutes a passage was booked +upon a steamer that was to leave England the following evening. Jim and +his uncle now hailed a cab, and were quickly transported to the +residence of the gentleman of whom the latter had spoken. + +"Glad to be of service, I'm sure," he said, when Mr. Hubbard had +explained the reason of his coming. "Indeed, had it been possible, I +should willingly have undertaken to accompany your nephew, in which case +my experience of life in Northern Africa would have been of some help to +him. Aden is certainly his first point of call, and as you already have +an agent there, the difficulty of obtaining a passage over to Berbera, +and of getting together the necessary followers and camels for transport +purposes, will be easily overcome. I strongly advise him to engage a +'shikari,' or head hunting-man, to accompany him and take charge of the +natives; and if he applies at the British Consul's at Berbera, it is +possible that he will be able to obtain the services of a man called Ali +Kumar, a civilized Somali warrior, who accompanied me on an expedition +two years ago, and who proved invaluable. Now as to kit. A couple of +suits of rough cloth, with leather gaiters and good marching boots, will +be the best. A felt hat would be worse than useless as a head-covering +out there, for in the hot season the sun pours down with a fierceness +that cannot be imagined, and can only be fully understood when actually +experienced. Three or four water-tanks, so constructed as to be capable +of being easily slung upon camels, should be procured, for this +gentleman known as the 'Mad' Mullah has his happy hunting-grounds some +two hundred miles inland, and to reach him it is necessary first to +cross a range of hills, and then to face the Hoad, or waterless desert, +which stretches for quite a hundred and fifty miles without a break. +That is always a most trying ordeal, but you will have to face it, for, +until the Hoad is passed, there will be no prospect of obtaining more +than the most meagre news of your father." + +"That will, indeed, be a terrible difficulty," interposed Mr. Hubbard. +"One often hears of whole caravans lost in the attempt to cross these +waterless tracts, and I suppose, in the case of this one which you call +the Hoad, such a fatality is not unknown." + +"I will not say that accidents have not happened," was the answer, in +reassuring tones; "but so well is this desert known, and so accustomed +are the natives to crossing it, that they think lightly of its dangers. +But your raising the question reminds me to speak of animals. A good +supply of transport camels will be required, and, in addition, a dozen +or more of the trotting variety will be absolutely necessary. Then, +supposing our young friend happens to obtain some piece of important +news, he will be able to leave his caravan, and make a dash to any given +point. Horses, too, he must have, and he will find no difficulty in +getting as many as he requires. A small case of drugs is another item +that should prove of use, and I strongly advise him to take some rolls +of strong barbed wire. The additional weight that will have to be +carried will be fully compensated for by the feeling of security that +the wire will give." + +"But how? I do not follow your point," said Mr. Hubbard dubiously. "I do +not see how this wire will help my nephew." + +"Then I will explain. He will march in the early morning, and if the sun +is not too hot, will continue to do so for the greater part of the day. +Sometimes he will cover only a few miles, and will then halt, for his +powers of getting about the country will depend greatly upon the +condition of his transport animals. Again, he will occasionally have to +make forced marches, for the water-holes are often separated by long +distances, which it is absolutely necessary to cover. + +"But to come to the barbed wire. When he halts at night, he will form a +zareba, sending out his followers to cut thorn-bushes with which to +build a hedge. A few posts driven into the ground at intervals along the +outside of the zareba, with wire stretched between them, will +effectually stop a rush of the enemy, and will give timely warning in +case of attack. In South Africa miles and miles were used between the +blockhouses, and proved of great service." + +"I see your point," exclaimed Jim, who had followed his words closely, +"and I should imagine that if the posts and wires were hidden amongst +the thorns, the surprise and alarm of the enemy would be even greater. +Numbers might easily become entangled, and then we should be able to +teach them a lesson with our rifles." + +"Quite so. I fully agree with you," was the answer. "And, speaking of +weapons, reminds me that I have not yet dealt with that subject." + +For a few moments the speaker buried his face in his hands, and sat +there thoughtfully. + +"There is no doubt," he suddenly continued, "that this is a most +important matter. I take it that you are not bent upon big game +shooting, and that if you come upon lions or elephants you will leave +them severely alone. For your purpose the Lee-Enfield rifle will be the +best, and should it turn out, as it very well may, that you are attacked +by the beasts I have mentioned, then you must trust to slay them by +means of a volley, for it is hopeless to expect that a single one of +these small-calibre bullets will prove fatal. If it were to strike a +vital spot it certainly would, but that is a piece of luck which you +must not count upon, for, remember, you cannot afford to take +unnecessary risks. So you should equip your party with the rifles I have +mentioned, and, in addition, a hunting knife and a brace of good +revolvers would be useful possessions for yourself. A pair of +field-glasses and a tin water-bottle should complete your equipment. I +need hardly mention the advisability of carrying an abundant supply of +ammunition. + +"And now, my lad, it only remains for me to wish you the best of luck. I +admire your pluck immensely, but I shall give you a few last words of +advice. Be always cautious, never omit to post sentries at night and +visit them yourself, and, above all, be ever on the look-out for +treachery. The Somali natives have the reputation of being cunning +rogues. Plunder seems to be their sole object in life, and camels have a +peculiar attraction for them. They would think nothing of killing you, +if by doing so they could obtain possession of your transport animals." + +Thanking him heartily for his kindness, and exchanging a cordial shake +of the hand, Jim and his uncle left their friend, and returned home at +once. + +"We shall have to be busy to-morrow," said Mr. Hubbard, as they took +their seats once more in front of the fire. "In the first place, we must +get your clothing and revolvers, with a few strong trunks in which to +carry them. The rifles and any other items we may happen to think of can +be purchased during the week, and I shall see that they follow you out +to Aden. You will want to have means of drawing money, and for that +purpose I shall write full instructions to our agent. His name, by the +way, is Andrews, and you will find him an extremely obliging gentleman. +I shall tell him to supply you with anything you may ask for, and I may +say now that, though I do not desire that you should be extravagant, no +expense that may help to the recovery of my dear brother shall be +spared. And now to bed, my dear Jim, for to-morrow you have much to do." + +Early on the following morning Mr. Hubbard's house in Kensington was +astir. There was an air of subdued excitement about the servants, who in +some mysterious way had contrived to hear full details of all that was +occurring. Mrs. Hubbard took her place at the breakfast-table, assuming +as cheerful a look as she could, though her heart was full of misgivings +for the safety of her nephew. But she was wise enough to know that he +needed encouragement and help, and therefore determined that he should +not guess what her thoughts were. As for Jim, he appeared with smiling +countenance, for now that he felt sure that his father had really +escaped the wreck, he was quite light-hearted, and though fully aware of +the difficulties and dangers before him, was prepared to face them +without hesitation. + +"I know it's going to be a job," he had said to himself, as he lay awake +during the night, "and I must be prepared to spend months, and even a +year, in accomplishing it. But it has to be done, and if only I make up +my mind from the beginning that nothing shall beat me, then my chances +of success will be good." + +Breakfast over, he said good-bye to his aunt, and then, entering a cab +with his uncle, drove off to a firm in the city, from whom he was able +to obtain a complete outfit of clothing. Trunks were bought at the same +place, and directions given to have them packed at once. + +"We'll call for them in an hour," said Mr. Hubbard, "and I shall be +obliged if you will arrange to have everything ready for us, so that +there shall be no delay." + +Entering their cab again, they drove to a gunsmith's, where a couple of +big Webley revolvers were purchased, together with a strong hunting +knife contained in a sheath, which was so arranged as to be slung in a +belt. A small case of drugs in tabloid form was obtained at another +establishment, and then, armed with their purchases, James and his uncle +returned for the clothing. + +Within five minutes the luggage was on the cab, and they were on their +way to Fenchurch-street Station. An hour later James was safely +installed in his cabin, and shortly afterwards took leave of his uncle. + +"You may rely upon my sending the other things promptly," said Mr. +Hubbard, as he moved towards the gang-way. "They should reach you within +a week of your arrival in Aden, and so that there shall be no difficulty +about importing the arms, or about transhipping them to Africa, you had +better go to the Governor at Aden, and tell him all the facts. I will +visit the Foreign Office in London, and I am sure that every effort will +be made to help you. Good-bye, and may you be successful." + +That afternoon the steamer put out into the river, and by night was well +at sea. Running down Channel, she made a good passage to Ushant, and was +soon in the Bay of Biscay, which, to the delight of all the passengers, +was comparatively smooth. + +Jim was enchanted with this new experience, and before very long began +to feel quite at home. Indeed, so quickly are friendships made upon an +ocean-going steamer, that within a day or two he felt as though he had +known all the passengers for quite a lengthy period. + +After coasting along the Portuguese shore, the ship steered to the east, +and entered the Mediterranean. Gibraltar was sighted, and signals +exchanged, so as to let the folks at home know that a safe passage had +thus far been made. + +A week later they were in the canal, and in due time reached Aden. Here +Jim's baggage was put ashore, and he himself followed, feeling somewhat +forlorn amongst so many strangers. + +"Mr. Hubbard, I think?" said a cheery voice at his elbow, causing him to +turn round with a start, to find that a short, bearded man, with a +pleasant face, was addressing him. He was clad in white from head to +foot, and wore an enormous "topee," or pith helmet, upon his head. "I am +making no mistake, I think?" he continued. "I am Mr. Andrews." + +In a moment they were shaking hands, and then Jim's new friend called +loudly to some Indian porters, and gave them instructions concerning the +baggage. + +"Everything here is done by natives from India," he said, noticing a +look of inquiry on Jim's face. "In fact, Aden is, officially, part of +our Eastern possessions, and boasts of no other coin than the rupee. But +I will tell you all about that later. We'll drive to my place now. Hi! +gharri!" + +At his shout an open carriage, drawn by two "tats," as the small native +ponies are known, dashed up to them, and when they were seated drove off +along the main street of Aden at a pace which in London would have been +considered furious. Leaving the town, they took another road which led +to the right, into a part occupied by many bungalows, and at one of +these they finally alighted. + +"Aden itself is a horrible place," said Mr. Andrews, apologetically, +waving his hand towards the town. "It is, as you see, little more than a +wide volcanic plain, with nothing in the way of vegetation to relieve +its barrenness. Out here, however, we have contrived to arrange a little +oasis, in which we Europeans live. But come in, Mr. Hubbard, and I'll +show you the room you are to occupy while staying with me. Then we'll +have tiffin (luncheon), and afterwards we'll sit on the verandah and +talk this matter over. I believe I've excellent news for you, which you +shall hear in good time." + +"About father? Does it concern him?" asked Jim, eagerly, pricking up his +ears at the mention of news, for he had been without any for more than a +week. "Perhaps he has been rescued? But that is expecting too much." + +"No, it's not that," was the answer, in reassuring tones; "but it's +remarkably good news, I can tell you, for I have ascertained that a +certain gentleman is bound upon a similar expedition, or rather, is +about to go into the Mullah's country for the purpose of obtaining +intelligence of his movements. Hearing that you also contemplated +penetrating into the interior, he asks leave to accompany you, and I +have no doubt you will be delighted to take him." + +"I shall, indeed," answered Jim, eagerly. "I was quite prepared to +undertake the journey alone, but a companion will make all the +difference, and I willingly agree to his joining my expedition." + +"Then, that's settled; and now for tiffin." + +Leading the way through a wide compound, laid out like an English +garden, Mr. Andrews mounted the steps of a shady verandah, and entering +a doorway in front of which hung a curtain of reeds, ushered his +companion into a delightfully cool inner room, in which, on a table +placed in the centre, was spread a snowy white cloth, littered with +sparkling glass and silver. Silent-footed natives salaamed and prepared +to wait upon them, and at once the two sat down and began their meal. + + + + +CHAPTER III + +THE GUN-RUNNERS + + +"Now come out to the verandah," said Mr. Andrews, taking James by the +arm as soon as tiffin was finished. "I have a couple of comfortable +chairs there, in which we can lounge, for just now is the hottest part +of the day, and no European ventures abroad unless compelled to by +unforeseen circumstances." + +Leaving the airy dining-room, the two stepped on to a broad paved +verandah, which entirely surrounded the bungalow, and took their seats +in a shady nook. + +Above their heads was a thickly thatched roof, the eaves of which +projected so far beyond the supporting posts as to make a broad stretch +of shadow beneath. But as they lay in their chairs, Jim and his new +friend could easily see beneath it. For the moment they sat there in +silence. Indeed, Jim was lost in admiration, for Mr. Andrews had created +for himself a perfect English garden. Glancing between the pillars, +about which clung roses, jasmine, and honeysuckle, and many another +creeper, he looked out upon beds of brilliant flowers, laid out in +orderly array, and flashing gorgeously in the rays of the Eastern sun. + +"I've only to forget the bungalow, and imagine myself in old England +again," said Mr. Andrews. "That garden is just one of the luxuries I +allow myself, and which helps to make life more pleasant here. Some day +I hope to end my exile and return home, for, however fascinating bright +and continuous sunshine may be, to return to one's native country is +always a pleasure to which we who live out here look forward. But here +is someone coming through the gate. Ah, I see, it's the gentleman of +whom I was speaking." + +He sprang from his seat and went toward the steps to greet his visitor. +As for Jim, he watched with some interest to see what kind of man this +stranger should prove to be. + +"I hope I shall like him," he said to himself, "for it would be +disastrous to our expedition if we were to fall foul of each other. But +here he is, and--yes, he looks a good fellow, and I am sure we shall be +excellent friends." + +As this passed through his mind the visitor mounted the steps, and Jim +obtained a clear view of his features. He was tall and thin, with fair +hair and clean-shaven face, and, as far as one could guess, was about +twenty-five years of age. + +"Ah, how do, Andrews?" he exclaimed cheerily, springing with one bound +on to the verandah. "Glad to see you, my dear fellow. I heard that the +ship had arrived, and so came along to have a chat, and to meet the Mr. +Hubbard of whom you were speaking." + +"There he is, then," cried Mr. Andrews, turning to Jim; "and he, too, is +anxious to make your acquaintance." + +A moment later the two were shaking hands, each greeting the other with +a steady look, which seemed to say, "I want to know what sort of a chap +you are, and how we are likely to get along together." + +"Glad to meet you, and I hope we shall be good friends. My name is +Dixon--Tom Dixon; Tom for short." + +"And mine is James--James Hubbard, you know," said our hero, with a +friendly smile. "Mr. Andrews tells me that you, too, are bound for +Somaliland, and have suggested accompanying me. I need not say that I +shall be delighted, for it would be dreary work to go alone. But I +would do it if necessary, for my father's life depends upon my going." + +"Quite so, and that is just where we shall agree," was the ready answer; +"for you must understand that I am a secret agent, an Intelligence +officer, as we are often called, and----But one minute. Are we alone, +Andrews? For my news is of great importance, and if your native servants +were to obtain an inkling of it, the tidings would fly at once, and +reach the ears of the Mullah in an incredibly short space of time. It is +a fact," he continued, noticing the look of surprise with which Jim +greeted his remark. "Our dusky friend has a perfect system of espionage, +which would shame that of many a European country. Tales of a coming +expedition told across the dinner-table in these bungalows are whispered +in the native bazaars before a day has gone, and I speak only the truth +when I say that the first ship for Berbera or the Somali coast, whether +it be a steamer, a native dhow, or a rascally gun-runner, bears a man +whose duty it is to pass on his information to the Mullah. Why, he knows +well that the British Government is now buying camels here and training +and equipping a native levy at Berbera. Our camp there is full of spies, +and I do not exaggerate when I tell you that the movements of our troops +are known by the Mullah almost before they are by our officers. So, take +my advice, and go about with your lips closed and your eyes very wide +open." + +Tom Dixon spoke in the most earnest manner, and lifted his finger, as if +thereby to impress Jim with his warning. And, indeed, he was making no +erroneous statement, and telling only the truth when he described the +extraordinary manner in which news is conveyed into the heart of +Somaliland. + +"Make your mind easy, Tom," said Mr. Andrews, reassuringly, stepping +across the verandah to look into the dining-room. "The servants are all +on the other side of the bungalow, and out of earshot, so that you may +speak here without fear of the consequences, and chat this matter over +to your heart's content. But your warning is a timely one, and, indeed, +has only forestalled by a few minutes the advice I was about to give our +young friend. Ever since this matter cropped up, I have kept it a dead +secret between myself and the British Governor, you, of course, being +also included. I have gone so far as to set aside a certain number of +camels of the trotting and of the transport variety, and have also +engaged some fifty followers. They were despatched from here a month ago +for the service of the Government. But this is a more urgent matter, +and, with the Governor's permission, I have arranged that you shall have +them. When you arrive at Berbera, you will find them all encamped +outside the town. Ali Kumar, a shikari of noted reputation, and a +trustworthy fellow, will be there to head the followers and guide you +through the country, while some twenty miles along the coast is a +village in which lives the man who gave information about the survivor +of the wreck. I have purposely refrained from engaging him in any +capacity, but my agent at Berbera has seen him, and has informed him +that a relative of the survivor will come to speak with him. That means +reward, or 'backsheesh,' as these Somali fellows know it, and you may be +sure that he will not fail you." + +"Splendid!" exclaimed Jim. "Then, thanks to your kindness and +forethought, there will be little or no delay, and, so far as I can see, +the weapons and ammunition which are coming from England are the only +things that can keep us waiting, and my uncle promised that they should +be here within a few days of my arrival. What luck, too, to have got +hold of Ali Kumar, for he is the very man I was told to engage." + +"I know him well, and can tell you that he is a capital fellow," +answered Mr. Andrews. "But to continue my story. All these preparations +have been made in the quietest and most secret manner possible. Once you +and Tom arrive at Berbera, you have only to ride out to this camp. Then, +when night falls, you can slip away and march along the coast. There is +a headland, forty miles east of Berbera, where you had better camp for a +few days, keeping a bright look-out for a certain native dhow, which +will bring you your rifles, ammunition, and stores. By acting in this +way, you will be able to leave the coast for the interior without anyone +being aware of your intentions--at least, I hope you may. Tom and I have +talked the matter over, for he is as anxious as you to get away without +the news reaching the Mullah's ears." + +"Just so," interposed Tom. "You see, Hubbard, your search will carry you +into the very heart of the Mullah's country, and as I am anxious to +obtain full information of his doings, I, too, am bound in that +direction. If he had the slightest notion of our intentions, you may be +sure that he would do his utmost to murder the whole lot of us, and so +it is of great importance to keep him in ignorance. This is your +expedition, but I propose that we share expenses, and the command also, +if you like. You see, I have spent many years on the coast, and speak +the language like a native--a useful accomplishment for the job we have +in hand. But I'm not a bit of a soldier, and when it comes to fighting I +shall have to look to you to pull us through. Nominally, you will be in +charge of the expedition, but I think that by putting our heads together +we shall get along with greater success." + +"I quite agree with you," responded Jim, thoughtfully; "the fact that +you speak the language will be of the greatest service, and as this +expedition is to suit your purpose as well as mine, I feel sure that we +shall not fall out when difficulties arise. But there is one thing I +wish to say. I must not have my movements hampered in any way, for it +may turn out that news of my father will reach us as soon as we get into +the interior. Perhaps, even, we may have the good fortune to rescue him +at once, and in that case, my mission being ended, I should return to +the coast immediately." + +"And I should not attempt to dissuade you," said Tom Dixon, with a +smile. "If by that time I had not obtained information of the utmost +value, it would be my own fault entirely; and besides, supposing you +were to rescue your father, I think there is but little doubt that we +should find it necessary to retire at once--in fact, to make a bolt for +our lives, for the Mullah has a reputation for fierceness, and would not +easily forgive our boldness. + +"But I have something else to tell you, which may cause you to prick up +your ears. It has come to my knowledge that a rascal here is about to +ship a load of guns across to Somaliland. Would you care to join me in +an attempt to capture him? It would be a risky business, I tell you +candidly, but if we are successful, it would be a glorious adventure. +You need not be afraid that it will delay us, for my plan is to ship +aboard as a hand, and wait until close to the African coast. Then +matters must depend upon circumstances. I shall endeavour to give +warning to one of the British gunboats stationed in these waters, and in +that case should allow myself to be taken prisoner without saying a +word. But it is just possible that I may be unable to ascertain the +exact destination for which we are bound, and in that case should have +to take my chance of capturing the dhow single-handed, or of looking on +quietly while the guns were handed over to the Mullah's emissaries. If +you were with me, we could make a grand fight of it, for these dhows +seldom have more than four men aboard. Sometimes, of course, they carry +a bigger crew, and if it were to turn out like that, we should have to +alter our plans." + +"But how am I to be smuggled aboard?" asked Jim, eagerly, delighted at +the thought of such an adventure. "I don't speak the language, and +should certainly be spotted the very moment I set foot upon the vessel." + +"I don't think so," responded Tom Dixon, emphatically. "The natives in +these parts do all sorts of curious things, and it has just struck me +that, by pretending that you have made a vow, you can get over this +difficulty. We'll give it out that we come from some Somali tribe which +is friendly to the Mullah, and that we are willing to lend a hand in +loading and unloading the dhow in return for our passage. I shall say +that you have sworn never to speak until you have made a pilgrimage to +Mecca. That is no uncommon vow, and amongst these fanatical people will +raise you to their highest estimation." + +"It sounds a likely story," cried Jim, "and I'll come with you. When do +you propose to start? And when are we likely to arrive on the Somali +coast?" + +"That I cannot say, but I believe the dhow will sail within a couple of +days, and two more should take us across the water. Then much depends +upon how matters turn out." + +"It's a risky business," said Mr. Andrews, who had listened attentively +all the while. "But I won't try to dissuade you, Hubbard, for the danger +is no greater than you will encounter in Somaliland, and I think the +experience you will get will help you in your search. It may turn out +that by going upon this dhow you will come across a native who knows of +your father. In that case the risk will not have been taken for nothing, +for you can rely upon it that Tom will worm his secrets out. Our friend +is a thorough native, and I only tell you the bare truth when I say that +his get-up and behaviour are marvellous. You see, his father was +stationed here for many years, and Tom has made the most of his +opportunities." + +"That is so," said Tom. "I used to be awfully fond of dressing up as a +native and going down to the bazaar. Once or twice my disguise was +discovered, and if I hadn't taken to my heels, I should have come in for +some rough handling. But that is a very old tale, and I have played the +trick so often now that, when in native costume, I feel and act the part +with assurance. Indeed, I often forget that I am an Englishman, so +absorbed do I become, and many and many a time have I come from the +bazaars primed with a piece of information that has proved of service to +our Governor. And it is on that account that I have been employed as an +Intelligence officer. But you'll come, then, Hubbard? That is splendid, +for, with you to help me, I shall hope to bag these fellows. I propose +that you remain here till this evening, and then, when the servants have +retired after dinner, walk down the garden to the gate. I'll be there to +meet you, and together we'll go to my place. Mr. Andrews will look after +your things here, and will send them over in the ship he spoke of." + +Tom Dixon now rose, and, after chatting for a few moments with his +friends, departed. For more than an hour Jim and Mr. Andrews sat on the +verandah, talking in low tones, for there were many points to be +arranged. Then Jim went to his room, and wrote a long letter to his +uncle, telling him all that was about to occur, and describing the +preparations which Mr. Andrews had made for his expedition. + +"And now, as weapons will be required, I'll look to my revolvers," he +said to himself. "I am very glad that I spent the time on board ship +practising, for until then I had never fired anything but a toy pistol. +Now, however, I can feel fairly sure of putting a bullet into a man at +ten yards' range, and, as they are heavy revolvers, that should be quite +enough to stop him. I have heard that these natives are very hardy, and +will stand far more knocking about than the average individual, but I've +a notion that if I were to hit the hardiest of them plump with one of +these big bullets he would not require any more." + +Unpacking his revolvers, he set to work to clean and thoroughly overhaul +them. Then wrapping them in a towel, together with a small box of +ammunition, he placed them in one of his trunks until it was time to +join Tom Dixon. Then he set to work to look through his possessions, and +so absorbed did he become in the occupation that he did not notice the +time slipping by, and, when dinner was announced, could scarcely believe +that it was already evening. + +An hour later, having said good-bye to Mr. Andrews, he left the +bungalow, with his bundle under his arm. When he emerged from the gate +of the compound, he was joined by Tom Dixon. + +"That you?" asked Tom, in a low voice. + +"Yes; here I am," answered Jim. + +"Then come along, old chap. We had better walk along silently, for I +know these natives well, and caution in such matters pays. For instance, +it's quite likely that someone is following you, just to see where you +are going. The natives are the most curious people under the sun, and +will take no end of trouble over a little matter like this. But we'll +soon see. Come down here." + +Catching Jim by the sleeve, Tom Dixon suddenly drew him into the deep +shadow of a palm which grew close at hand, and whispered to him to +crouch low upon the ground. Ten minutes later their caution was +rewarded, for a dusky figure crept silently past them, and disappeared +in the darkness. + +"We'll give him five minutes to get well away," said Tom, "and then +we'll move off in the opposite direction, and get to my place by a +different route. I dare say all this secrecy seems unnecessary to you, +but you've heard my warning." + +"It does seem strange," Jim agreed, in a whisper. "Coming from old +England, where everything is so free and open, one is at first at a loss +to understand the need for all this secrecy; but after what you have +told me, I can fully believe that our plans might easily be ruined, +unless we kept them to ourselves. That fellow creeping after us just now +is an object-lesson which I shall not easily forget." + +When sufficient time had elapsed to make it certain that there was no +fear of detection, the two rose to their feet again, and leaving the +shadow of the tree, went off in the opposite direction. In some twenty +minutes' time they arrived at the outskirts of the town of Aden, and, +pausing to make sure that they were unobserved, entered a narrow +doorway, which led to the interior of a native house. + +"Ten paces to your front, and then stop," whispered Tom. "Now follow me +closely, and take care that the door does not bang in your face." + +There was the creak of rusty hinges, and the snap of a lock being pushed +back. Then, guided by Tom's hand, Jim found himself descending a flight +of rickety stairs, which groaned beneath his weight, and threatened to +deposit him with more swiftness than was quite agreeable in the room +below. A minute later a match flickered before his eyes, and he saw Tom +applying it to a candle, which quickly burned up and allowed him to take +note of his surroundings. To his astonishment he found himself in a +comfortably-furnished room, with a tiny bed in one corner. There was a +washhand-stand against the wall, and a couple of basket-chairs, while a +big chest stood beneath a tiny window, which admitted light and air to +the room during the day, but which was now curtained with thick +material. + +"Not exactly a model dwelling, or the kind of place that a European +would choose for his residence in this hot climate," said Tom, with a +laugh, "but it has the great advantage of obscurity. This is really part +of a disused building, and it was whilst consorting with a gang of +rogues, whose secrets I was endeavouring to ascertain, that I +accidentally discovered it. I at once saw that it was the very place for +me, and promptly set about putting it in order. You see, I am supposed +to be a kind of clerk to the Governor, though my duties in that way are +purely nominal. As a matter of fact, I turn up every now and again with +bundles of papers in my hand, and have an audience with my chief. But +the official-looking documents are a fraud, and my conversation has no +reference to them. But to return to this room. I've the share of a +bungalow elsewhere, and when about to undertake one of my spying +adventures, I slip away from there during the night, for all the world +like a thief, and find my way to this place. That chest is full of +disguises, stains, and paints, and it takes but little more than an hour +to transform myself into a worthy Parsee, a race of men engaged in trade +in Aden. More often I leave this place as a simple coolie, and at times +I have appeared in more disreputable attire, such as is worn by the +budmashes, or criminal class of the town. Look here!" + +Taking the candle with him, he went across the room to where the chest +stood, and slipped in a key. Throwing open the lid, he disclosed a +neatly packed interior, with a shallow tray at one end, which contained +a number of wigs and hirsute adornments for the face. + +"My stock-in-trade," said Tom, with some degree of pride. "It has taken +me a long time to collect them, and so important do I consider the +question of wigs, that I've gone to enormous trouble to provide myself +with all those you see. After all, clothes are easily purchased. One has +merely to go into the bazaars, and one will easily find every variety of +garb worn by the natives in these parts. With the hair it is a different +matter, and to obtain exactly what I wanted I have been compelled to +make every one of those little articles myself, for the slightest +mistake in get-up would lead to discovery, and most likely to death. But +take a seat, and let us decide how we are going to act." + +Throwing himself upon the bed, Tom motioned Jim to one of the chairs, +and then lay at full length, his hands behind his head, and his eyes +fixed upon a patch of dingy light thrown by the flickering candle upon +the ceiling above. As for Jim, he sat back in his chair, lost in +wonderment. Indeed, when he came to think the matter over, he could +scarcely believe that less than three weeks had passed since the first +news of the wreck had reached his ears. Then he was just a schoolboy, on +the threshold of life, with no higher aim than to go up for his +examination, and win a commission in the Army. In the meanwhile no worry +troubled his mind, and all his spare hours were taken up in an +endeavour to excel in games, for he was passionately fond of exercise in +any form. And now, in a moment it seemed, he had been transported into a +different life--into a different world indeed. Who could have dreamt +that those few short days would have made such a difference to him, +would have brought him all those miles across the sea, to face dangers +and difficulties the extent of which he could scarcely conceive! + +"And here I am, a regular conspirator," he said to himself, looking +about the room, "and bound upon an adventure which, from all I can +gather, will afford considerable excitement. But I've thought the matter +out carefully, and believe that I am justified in entering upon it, for, +who knows but that it may turn out an advantage in the end! If these +gun-runners are in league with the Mullah, it stands to reason that they +know something of his movements, and as white prisoners are seldom or +never taken, the fact that the survivor of the wreck fell into his hands +will have reached their ears. Perhaps, too, they are even aware of +father's exact whereabouts, and if only Tom can worm the secret out of +them, we shall be saved enormous trouble, and very likely a large +proportion of risk; for, in that case, we should march into the interior +as rapidly as possible, choosing night for our movements, and hiding up +amongst the sand-dunes and hills during the day. Then, when we got +within striking distance, we should mount our trotting camels, and make +a dash for the place. If we were successful, I should abandon the +transport animals and our baggage, so as to enable us to retire to the +coast at all speed. + +"But that is hoping for too much," he continued. "This business is going +to be no ordinary affair, and before we are successful we shall be +compelled to face no end of difficulties. But all the better, if in the +end we are able to carry out our purpose." + +For quite five minutes Jim sat there silently, lost in thought, while +Tom lay upon the bed, still staring at the dingy ceiling, as if, indeed, +he could see there a plan which would be likely to prove of service when +endeavouring to capture the dhow. + +"I can see my way quite easily," he said aloud, as if addressing himself +to no one in particular. "At first, of course, I shall have to find out +where the dhow lies, but an hour or two spent in the bazaar will soon +set the matter at rest. That done, we shall have to obtain a passage +aboard her, but there again I fancy things will be easily arranged. I'll +get into casual conversation with some fellow who seems to know the +destination of the craft, and I'll drop, as if by accident, a few words +which will let him know that I am a friend of the Mullah. These natives +are well aware of the risk they incur in these gun-running expeditions, +and I've no doubt that hands are difficult to obtain. If that is the +case, they will jump at our services, and we shall soon find ourselves +installed upon the dhow. After that the outlook is uncertain." + +"Bound to be!" exclaimed Jim, emphatically. "That's just where the risk +comes in. But it would be a fine thing to hold them up, and to capture +the vessel and its contents." + +"By George, it would! You're right, Jim, and we will do it," cried Tom +enthusiastically, swinging himself into a sitting position. "Look here, +I've been going over all the points, and I've come to the conclusion +that our best plan will be to do as I have just said. Just you lie down +there and have a snooze, while I get into the proper togs and go out to +the bazaar. Then we shall be able to start for the dhow to-morrow +morning, without delay." + +"I'd like to come, too, if it could be arranged," said Jim eagerly. "You +see, I have to get used to the dress of a native, and shall feel far +more sure of myself if my first attempt is made while it is dark." + +"Then come along. Just hop out of your things as quickly as you can, +while I do the same. Then we'll apply the stain to our bodies, and dress +ourselves in the robes usually worn by natives from the interior of +Somaliland." + +Both at once proceeded to undress, and that done, Tom dived to the +bottom of the chest, and produced a carefully stoppered jar, and a big +brush, composed of the silkiest hair. With this he at once proceeded to +paint Jim from head to foot, and when that operation was concluded, the +latter took the brush and did the same for his companion. Another dive +into the chest produced an earthen pot. This contained a dark, oily +liquid, which was freely applied to the hair and eyebrows. + +"Hum! Doesn't smell over-pleasant," remarked Jim, with a grimace. "It +has a most peculiarly pungent odour." + +"Oh, you'll get used to it in time," was the laughing rejoinder. "But I +can assure you that it is very necessary, and quite typical of the +Somali people. There are your sandals. Slip your toes into the tags, and +walk across the floor. No, not that way, but like this, shuffling +along." + +Slipping a pair on to his own feet, Tom strode swiftly up and down the +room, imitating a native, and would not be satisfied until Jim was able +to do precisely the same. + +"Now watch me put on this head-gear," he said, taking a long fold of +snowy linen, and beginning to wrap it about his temples. He then +produced a light belt of webbing, to which two holsters were made fast, +and proceeded to buckle it about his waist, tossing a second to Jim for +his own use. A minute or two later he had wound a long cloak of linen +about his body, contriving, however, to leave one arm and half his +breast bare, while his legs were visible from the knee downwards. Then +revolvers were placed in the holsters, a small pouch filled with +ammunition, and a long and spiteful dagger thrust through the belt, and +arranged so that the handle just peeped out through the clothing. A +second and shorter weapon was attached to the inside of the left arm, +and thus equipped, Tom placed himself before a wide strip of +looking-glass which was nailed against the wall, and having put the +candle in position, so that its light fell full upon him, began to +survey himself critically. + +It was evident that he was satisfied, for he smiled at his own image, +displaying a set of teeth which looked particularly white, now that his +features were stained. + +"And now for you," he said. "I want you to dress yourself from head to +foot just as I have done, for, remember, you may have to do so before +the natives, and if you bungled, then you would certainly be +discovered." + +Twenty minutes later the candle was extinguished, and the two crept up +the creaking staircase and went out. Then, with long, shuffling strides, +which carried them quickly over the ground, they made their way towards +the native bazaar. + +"Remember your rôle," whispered Tom, as they approached the line of +squalid huts and booths which formed the native market. "Not a sound is +to escape your lips. If you are addressed, make no answer, but turn away +angrily, waving your arm. Should the man persist, turn upon him, but +beware that you do not touch your weapons, for to do so would be fatal. +Of course, if you are discovered, you must make a fight of it; but +we'll hope that it is not coming to that." + +Walking side by side, the two were soon in the midst of the bazaar, and +Jim was interested to see how these Eastern people behaved. Lights +twinkled in the various booths, and dusky natives were gathered in knots +here and there. Some sat silently, but the majority were conversing in +the most excited and voluble manner. Indeed, they might very well have +been engaged in a squabble, so exaggerated were their movements. +Suddenly, on turning a corner, the two adventurers came upon a circle of +men squatting about a brazier, and singing a weird song to the +accompaniment of a tom-tom. As they came into the firelight, one of the +natives caught sight of them, and called loudly to them. + +"Come hither and join us, brothers," he shouted. "Here we shall make +room for you." + +He shuffled to one side, those who were close at hand doing the same, +until a sufficiently wide gap was left in the circle. + +"Come on," whispered Tom; and straightway, shouting his pleasure, he +went towards the place, Jim following closely upon his heels. To +hesitate would have been to arouse instant suspicion, and therefore, +watching closely to see how his comrade acted, our hero joined the +circle and squatted in native fashion. It was a trying ordeal for a lad +who had but recently left school, and though he fought against the +feeling of excitement, almost of fear, which assailed him, he was +nevertheless well aware that his heart was beating like a sledge-hammer +against his ribs, and that his pulses were throbbing almost painfully. +But he was not the lad to show the white feather, and remembering his +determination to go through with the adventure, he sat stolidly, staring +into the glowing brazier. + +"A song, brother! Allah has willed it that you should join us this +night, and we would hear your voice," shouted one of the group, +stretching out a lanky arm and touching Jim upon the knee. + +There was no answer, and, to the astonishment of all the natives +gathered there, the stranger who had been bidden to join them as a guest +still kept his eyes fixed upon the brazier. That he had heard they were +certain, for an involuntary turn of the head had betrayed that fact. At +once shouts of anger arose, and the man who had spoken sprang to his +feet. + + + + +CHAPTER IV + +IN DISGUISE + + +For the moment it looked as though the expedition upon which Jim and his +friend had set out was doomed to early disaster, for there was no +denying the fact that they had unwittingly aroused the anger of the +natives. And yet, what could they do? Passing through the bazaar in +their search for information, an evil chance had brought them into +contact with this gathering, and they had found themselves compelled to +accept the unwelcome invitation to join the circle which sat about the +brazier. And now, at the very beginning, indeed, within less than a +minute they were engaged in an altercation with them. Deeply did Jim +regret the fact that he could not speak the language, for had he been +able to do so, there would have been no need for silence, and no need to +ruffle the feelings of the gathering. + +It was a dilemma, and, puzzle his brains as he might, he could not come +to any solution that would help him. Instead, therefore, he sat there +stolidly, his eyes now fixed upon the brazier, and then turning for the +space of a second to the man who confronted him. + +"Insolent! How dare you to insult us so?" shouted the native, thrusting +his hand into the folds of his waistcloth, to withdraw it a moment later +clasping the handle of a dagger. "Dog!" he continued, springing forward. +"Speak, or I will bury this blade in your flesh." + +Meanwhile the other natives who formed the gathering had sprung to +their feet, and crowded about the two young Englishmen with threatening +gestures. + +[Illustration: THE NATIVES CROWDED ABOUT THEM WITH THREATENING +GESTURES.] + +"Yes," they shouted angrily, "answer, or we will kill you now, and throw +your bodies into the gutter." + +It was wonderful to see the coolness with which Jim and his companion +acted. Had they lost their presence of mind, and sprung to their feet +with the intention of escaping, they would have been instantly cut to +pieces, for they were entirely surrounded. Indeed, there was no doubt +that this was a situation demanding cunning more than anything else, and +both recognized that fact fully. Seated, therefore, side by side, as if +they were unaware of the commotion raging about them, Jim still looked +nonchalantly into the flames, as if, indeed, he had no other interest in +life, while Tom stared at the circle of angry faces with the utmost +calmness. + +"Are we, then, guests or dogs?" he demanded quietly, letting his eyes +wander from one to the other. "Was it not you who bade us join your +circle? Then why do you grumble if one of us is a man who will keep his +vow, whatever befalls? My friend and I have come here from Somaliland, +bound upon an expedition to Mecca. But ill fortune fell upon us, and now +we return to our country to replenish our funds. For my part, I confess +that I am disappointed, but my comrade is grieved beyond expression. His +lips are closed, and his ears deaf, until the day when he completes his +pilgrimage. He has sworn it by Allah, and by Allah he shall keep to his +oath, even though thousands attempt to dissuade him. Take your places, +then, again, I beg of you, and let us be friends, for we are deserving +of your kindness." + +The words, spoken quietly as they were, acted like oil upon troubled +waters. Scarcely had they left Tom Dixon's lips, when the excitement of +the angry natives disappeared even more rapidly than it had arisen. +For a moment only they looked incredulously at one another, and then, +saluting Jim with the utmost respect, they took their places again +shamefacedly. + +"We meant no harm, brothers," said the first speaker, apologetically. +"Forgive us, if we spoke angrily and in some haste, but the occasion +demanded instant explanation, and, now that you have given it, we are +fully satisfied. More than that, it is an honour to us to know that +there sits in our circle in friendship with us one who has made such a +vow, and who refuses to break his oath in spite of any danger. I watched +him carefully as I advanced upon him with my drawn weapon, but he did +not flinch, did not even turn aside, or raise an arm to ward off the +blow which might well have fallen. Moreover, he allowed no sound to +escape his lips, and, true to his word, and to the holy task which he +has set himself, sat there unmoved, prepared to die rather than cry out +for mercy. It is marvellous the strength that Allah gives to such men." + +"Yes, it is a great thing," chimed in an aged native, who sat crouching +over the brazier, as if to absorb all its warmth; "and in Aden here not +one in ten thousand is capable of making and keeping such a vow. It is +only men from Somaliland who are brave enough to do such a thing. Our +brother has just told us that we are honoured; we are more than that, +for these guests of ours are friends of the Mullah, a holy man, who has +made many pilgrimages to Mecca, and who will yet be king of the country +which lies yonder across the sea." + +He pointed towards the harbour, and looked round at his companions. + +"Yes," they agreed in guttural tones, "the Mullah is a great man, and +will be even more powerful." + +"We can speak openly," continued the old man, "for there are none but +friends here, and no Hindoos are within hearing. How thrives the +Mullah?" he went on, addressing Tom. "Does he know that the English are +preparing to march against him?" + +"Yes, he is fully aware of it," answered the latter, quietly, "and will +meet them in battle. But at present he is fearful of defeat, for though +his soldiers are numerous, they are poorly armed, and for the most part +carry only shields and spears. Guns are what he wants, and he is +prepared to pay well for them. Indeed, he bade us on our return to make +enquiries here, and endeavour to induce some of the wealthy merchants +who are friendly to him to send him a ship-load of weapons and +ammunition. We believe that such a ship has lately sailed, or will +shortly leave this shore, but we are uncertain. We have been to more +than one of those who live in this town, and are friendly to us, but +they will do nothing until silver is placed in their hands, and of that +we have absolutely none. However, once we can get a passage across to +Somaliland, we shall be able to replenish our store, and shall return +immediately." + +"And how knows your friend of this arrangement?" asked the old man +suspiciously, glancing sharply at Jim. "If he has made a vow not to +speak, how can he have discussed this matter with you?" + +The question was a shrewd one, and at once set the whole circle of +natives staring hard at their guests. + +"Yes, how can he have learnt of this plan?" cried another, rising to his +feet, and waving his arms excitedly. "You say that you have been to many +in the town, and have questioned them concerning arms for the Mullah. +Then this vow of which your comrade boasts is one made to be broken or +kept at will. Perhaps he is a spy come here to learn our secrets." + +His words at once brought the whole gathering of natives to their feet, +and again, such is the excitability of these Eastern people, they +crowded threateningly about their guests, calling loudly for an +explanation. But Jim and his friend were equal to the occasion. The +former was certainly dumfounded at the sudden turn affairs had taken, +for he had not understood a word of all that had been said. But he was +fully aware that here again an attempt to escape would be worse than +useless, and therefore, placing full reliance in his friend, he squatted +there as calmly as before, prepared, however, to spring to his feet in a +moment and join Tom in fighting for their lives. A hasty glance at the +latter told him that there was still some chance of calming the natives, +for Tom Dixon sat as if carved in stone. One hand was buried, as if +accidentally, in the folds of his waistcloth, though Jim knew well that +it grasped the butt of a hidden revolver; while the other was stretched +out towards the brazier, as if to gather some comfort from its glowing +embers. + +"Did I say that I had discussed this matter with my comrade?" he asked +sarcastically, looking round the circle with a contemptuous glance. +"When I said that we had been to various merchants in the town, I +thought that you were wise enough to understand my meaning. My comrade's +vow is one which few or none of you would dare to take, and yet you do +not hesitate to doubt it. It was sworn more than a week ago, and, by +Allah, it has never been broken. But look at him? Do you not see him +turn his head as each one speaks? He cannot help the words falling upon +his ears, and hears and understands all that you say, without, however, +deigning to answer. So it is with me. So that he should know what was +to happen, I have spoken of my plans to him, but we have never entered +into discussion on the matter. Come," he continued, "let us be friends, +and treat us like brothers." + +"We will," exclaimed the old man warmly. "We cannot venture to take +risks, for were a spy to come amongst us, he would learn many things of +value to the Government. It was on that account that we tested you, and +have proved you to be of ourselves. We are friends and brothers." + +Each of the natives gave vent to a guttural exclamation of approval, and +then, as if to forbid further altercation, the sharp notes of the +tom-tom were heard, and the gathering began a chant, one of those +peculiarly dismal dirges which seem to delight the ears of natives of +the East. Then, when the song was finished, an earthen dish, containing +slices of juicy lemon, was handed round, each man present helping +himself. + +"You spoke of a ship which might be sailing for Somaliland," said the +old man, suddenly, awaking from a reverie into which he seemed to have +fallen, and looking up at Tom. "You also told us that you and your +friend were in search of a passage. Are you strong, and are you willing +to work? For, if so, I will find places for you upon the dhow." + +"It is a good offer, and we accept it gladly," responded Tom promptly. +"As for strength, we are capable of hauling at the ropes as well as any +man. Would there be much else to do? For I tell you honestly that we are +unused to the sea, and are more at home when mounted upon horseback and +galloping across the smooth plains of Somaliland." + +"There is little else for you to do than keep watch upon the deck, and +help to pull in the sails, for three men will go besides yourselves, as +well as the master. But I warn you that fighting may fall to your lot, +for a steamship flying the Government colours patrols these seas, and, +should she sight you, will certainly endeavour to capture you. In that +case your death would be swift and almost certain. If not, you would be +thrown into prison, and would be a slave for the greater part of your +days." + +"Then the post will suit us well. If there is fighting we shall not +grumble, for it is our trade, and as capture means death, you may rely +upon it that we shall do all that is possible to defeat the enemy. But +why should the Government fall upon this dhow?" + +For a moment the old man scrutinized Tom closely, as if still suspicious +of him, and as if doubtful whether he was to be fully trusted. But the +latter returned his glance with one that was equally steady and +unflinching, and, satisfied with this, the native at length answered: + +"That dhow is filled to overflowing with guns and ammunition for the +Mullah," he said. "If she reaches the Somali coast in safety, I shall +have done well for myself, and shall have aided the cause of your +master. She sails to-morrow at noon, and you will know her by the fact +that she bears a red streak upon her bows, and has a large rent in her +sail. When you see her, she will be lying some few yards from the shore, +and any of the small craft in the harbour will put you aboard her. You +must go below as soon as you get on board, and if any of the crew are +there, pass them without a sound, but salute them in this manner." + +The old man paused for an instant, and withdrawing his hand from beneath +the blanket which covered him, placed two fingers upon his lips. + +"That is the sign which you must make, and be careful that you do it +exactly as I have shown you, for, if not, the crew will believe that +you are spies, and will fall upon you as soon as you are below. To-day +the Customs officer has been on board, inspecting the cargo. But the +crew are even now busily employed in transferring it to another ship, +and in taking in the guns and ammunition destined for the Mullah's +troops." + +"It is a good plan," said Tom, "and I can see the need for secrecy. +To-morrow we shall go on board the dhow, and we shall be careful to +follow your wishes. Can you tell us how long the passage will take, and +where we shall be landed?" + +Again the old man looked suspiciously at him, and then shook his head +emphatically. + +"No, I cannot tell you that. If Allah wills it, you shall land upon the +coast and return to your people." + +Some five minutes later Tom touched Jim upon the arm, and made signs to +him to rise. Then, nodding to the natives, they left the circle, and +went on into the bazaar. But they had already had one experience of +native cunning and curiosity, and instead of turning their steps towards +the room in which they had disguised themselves, they moved away in the +opposite direction, and taking advantage of a narrow alley, which was +filled with chattering natives, they mingled with the crowd, and +sauntered on, now looking curiously at the wares of some Hindoo +merchant, and then watching with evident interest the skill of a +juggler, who sat in the middle of the street, with an admiring circle +about him. Winding hither and thither, they at length came to a deserted +part, and having hidden in the shadow of a booth for some ten minutes, +so as to assure themselves that they were not followed, they took to +their heels, and before very long had reached the dwelling in which they +were to shelter that night. + +"We're in luck," exclaimed Tom, in tones of satisfaction. "I must admit +that at one moment I thought it was all up with us, for these natives +are suspicious beggars, and would think nothing of killing anyone whom +they suspected of spying upon them. If they had discovered us, you may +take it for certain that we should have disappeared for good, and no +amount of searching on the part of our friends would have led to news of +our fate. There is no doubt that they are masters at the art, and no +bribe will induce anyone to give evidence against his comrades." + +"I can quite believe that," answered Jim, "and I agree with you that +things looked very black. Of course, I didn't understand what was +happening, and am puzzling about it even now. But the shouting and +excitement, and the fact that that fellow drew his knife, told me that +trouble was coming. It was as much as I could do to sit there quietly, +but I took my cue from you, and I can tell you I was jolly glad when the +squabble ended." + +"You behaved like a brick, old boy. Considering that you are a novice, +and quite unused to these natives, you showed no end of pluck. I admit +that it was not without some misgivings that I allowed you to accompany +me into the bazaar, for, you see, I hadn't an idea how you would behave. +But I felt sure that the fellow who could come out here, and quietly +make his preparations to face the dangers of an expedition into the +heart of Somaliland, must be someone quite out of the ordinary. Of +course, you might have been a thoughtless kind of beggar, who had no +fear simply because you were unaware of, and had taken no trouble to +find out, the difficulties and risks you were about to face. But I soon +saw that you realized the gravity of your task, and, by George! I +admired you for it, for there are precious few youngsters of your age +who would have the grit to go on with the matter. But I am wandering +from the subject. There's no doubt that if you had flinched, and shouted +out when that beggar drew his knife, we should have been set upon by the +whole gang of ruffians, and, though we were armed with revolvers, we +should have had precious little chance. The whole row arose because you +made no answer when they invited you to sing." + +Throwing himself upon the bed, Tom Dixon gave his comrade a full account +of the altercation, and then went on to describe how a passage had been +offered them upon the dhow, which was to sail upon the following day, +with arms for the Mullah. + +"It will not do to take any risks," he said, "and therefore I vote that +we practise going aboard and making the sign, for the slightest slip +would mean ruin to our plans." + +Accordingly, while Tom stood at one end of the room, Jim advanced from +the other, and turning, raised his fingers to his lips as he passed him. +Not till he had done it some half-dozen times was Tom satisfied, and +then he, too, went through the process. + +"The next thing will be to give news to the Governor," said Tom, "so as +to make it possible for the gunboat to intercept us. She left Aden a +couple of days ago, but was to return to-morrow night. If she slips away +again at once, she should easily overtake us, and then I should give +very little for the chances of the crew. There should be four on board +besides ourselves, and if we cannot master them with our revolvers, I +shall be greatly surprised. It will be a feather in our caps, Jim, to +capture the dhow by ourselves and then hand her over to the gunboat." + +"But you said that you had been unable to ascertain the destination of +the dhow," interposed Jim. "Supposing the gunboat could not find her?" + +"It would be very awkward, and that's where the risk comes in." + +"Yes, it would be awkward," agreed Jim; "but then there would be all the +more honour in capturing her. It would be grand to overpower the crew +and compel them to sail the dhow back to Aden." + +"Perhaps it will turn out like that," said Tom. "But you lie down on the +bed and have a sleep while I go off to the Governor. I shall be back +within an hour, and shall make myself comfortable in the corner there +with a blanket as a covering. No," he exclaimed, seeing Jim about to +remonstrate, "you are not yet used to sleeping on a hard floor like the +natives. But I am, and even prefer it." + +A few moments later Jim was left alone in the room, and blowing out the +candle, at once lay down upon the bed and settled himself to sleep. An +hour later his comrade returned, and threw himself down in the corner, +where his heavy breathing soon gave evidence of the fact that he, too, +had forgotten the adventures of the night and was lost in dreams. + +Scarcely had the sun risen on the following morning when both were +astir, and at once rearranged their clothing, so as to make sure that +their disguise was satisfactory and would pass muster in broad daylight. +Then Tom produced a small oil stove and a frying-pan, and began to +prepare breakfast. Eggs were to be had in plenty, and as these were easy +to cook, four of them were quickly spluttering upon the pan. Meanwhile a +kettle of water was set upon a second stove to boil, and soon they sat +down to a satisfying if not dainty repast. To a hungry man food, if +clean and fairly well prepared, is always acceptable, and Jim and his +companion were not the ones to turn up their noses simply because their +eggs reposed on rough tin plates, and their tea was contained in mugs of +similar material. Seated upon the two chairs of which the room boasted, +and taking the plates upon their knees, they set to work with energy, +and quickly caused the food to disappear. Indeed, so keen was their +appetite, that they unanimously agreed to prepare a second relay of +eggs, and partook of them with the same relish. + +"And now to business," cried Jim cheerily. "I feel as fresh as paint, +and quite ready for this adventure. Shall I do as I am?" + +For the moment Tom did not answer, but pulling the curtain from the +window so as to allow all the light that was possible to enter the room, +he placed his comrade in the centre and walked slowly round him. + +"The disguise is perfect," he said in tones of satisfaction. "I +guarantee that you will pass muster anywhere, and, so long as you +remember that you are never to open your lips, I have little fear that +you will be discovered. Let me give you a little additional advice. As +we go towards the dhow it is quite on the cards that we shall run across +some of the passengers who accompanied you from England, and you may be +tempted to renew your friendship with them, quite forgetful of your +disguise. But you must not dream of doing such a thing, for sharp eyes +are always watching in this town, and were the natives to learn that a +spy is amongst them, your chances of success in Somaliland would be +considerably diminished. Now, are your revolvers in position, and do you +feel ready to accompany me?" + +"Quite," exclaimed Jim, with emphasis. "I tell you that I feel as +light-hearted as possible, and fully prepared for the adventure." + +"Then come along." + +Leading the way to the window, Tom Dixon threw it open, and placing a +chair beneath it, stepped upon it and crawled through. Jim followed, +without hesitation, and found himself in a narrow courtyard, from which +a gate that was almost tumbling from its hinges led into a street +behind. A glance showed them that the street was empty, and at once they +stepped into it, and hurrying along, were soon in the main thoroughfare +of Aden. + +Had anyone taken the trouble to scrutinize them closely, he would have +seen two stalwart and swarthy men, one somewhat younger than the other, +and of slightly smaller proportions, but both evidently from the shores +of Northern Africa. They strode along with that quick shuffling gait +common to men of their race, and due, no doubt, in some degree, to the +sandals which they wear. That they were strangers to Aden could be +easily guessed, for they looked curiously about them, and stopped every +now and again to look in at the shop windows. An Englishman marching +along the footpath was obviously an object of interest and respect, for +they turned aside to give him more room to pass, and gazed at him in +wonderment. So cleverly did they act their part that no one suspected +that they were not what they pretended to be, and even the natives, who +swarmed everywhere, let them pass without a doubt. On one occasion a +native arrested their progress, and would have entered into conversation +with Jim, but a few words from Tom altered his intention, and he stood +aside, allowing them to pass without comment. A few minutes later, when +turning a corner sharply, they barely escaped running into a second +Englishman, who was no other than Mr. Andrews. But he motioned them +aside with a brusque "Out of the way!" and went on, without a thought +of the two young fellows who had sat with him on the previous evening, +and without a suspicion that the two Somali tribesmen whom he had met +face to face were those whose interests he had so much at heart. + +Half an hour's sharp walk brought Jim and his companion to the shore, +where they paused for some minutes to gaze at a large steamer which was +moored there, undergoing the process of coaling with the help of a +perfect army of dusky figures who swarmed about her, shouting at the top +of their voices. + +From there they took their way to that part of the harbour usually +allotted to native craft, and before very long had the satisfaction of +noting that one which floated in deep water, and was of fairly large +proportions, had a thin streak of red upon her bows. + +Tom at once turned towards her, and, followed closely by Jim, went down +to the water's edge. A number of flimsy native boats were drawn up on +the mud, with their owners seated chatting beside them. As soon as they +caught sight of the two strangers, the boatmen at once sprang to their +feet, and, gesticulating wildly, offered their services. + +"We want to go aboard the dhow there," said Tom shortly, selecting one +of the boatmen. "What will you take us for?" + +A price was agreed upon after some little haggling, and a few moments +later a boat was run down into the water and pushed off. Taking his +place in the stern, the oarsman paddled out into deep water, and quickly +brought them alongside the dhow. Tom at once handed him his fare, and +then, grasping the halliards, which were close at hand, swarmed up on +deck, closely followed by Jim. As he did so he threw a glance aloft, and +noted that the huge leg-of-mutton sail which was tied up to the mast +had a large rent in one corner of it. + +"We are on the right ship, at any rate," he said to himself. "And now +for the crew." + +Turning towards the stern of the dhow, he and Jim walked towards a +narrow hatchway, which evidently gave admission to the hold. As they did +so, three figures started up from behind some coils of rope with the +silence of spectres, and gazed at them curiously and suspiciously; while +a fourth, happening to thrust his head up at that moment, caught sight +of the strangers, and, with a guttural exclamation, climbed out upon the +deck. They were fierce-looking fellows, clad in scanty raiment, and +undoubtedly armed, for, as the newcomers returned their glances and ran +their eyes over them, they noted the handle of more than one weapon +protruding from their waist-cloths, while the man who had just emerged +from the hold bore a pistol of gigantic proportions. + +"We shall have our work cut out to master them," Jim said to himself, +"for they will fight hard and make a desperate resistance. However, so +long as their suspicions are not aroused, and they believe that we are +friends, and to be thoroughly relied upon, we shall have every +opportunity of taking them by surprise. If we are successful in doing +that, I think we shall be able to overawe them; and if not, why, they +must look to themselves." + +A movement on Tom's part now attracted his attention, and following him +closely, Jim strode down the deck, taking little notice of the natives. +Arrived at the hatchway, his companion paused for the space of a moment, +and rapidly made the sign. Instantly the crew, who had stood there with +menacing looks, evidently determined to attack them should they prove to +be enemies come to spy upon them, sauntered away, watching, however, to +see that Jim, too, lifted his fingers to his lips. A moment later both +had disappeared into the darkness of the hold, and, creeping forward, +sat down side by side. + +"Guns!" whispered Jim, feeling about with his hands, and venturing for +one second to break the silence which he had promised to observe. +"Scores of them! They are all over the place." + +"And precious uncomfortable to sit upon," answered his companion in +husky tones. "The stock of one is digging into me. But, hush! We must +not talk, for those beggars are certain to be curious about us, and we +may take it for granted that for a day at least they will watch us like +cats. No doubt, for the present, and until the dhow sails, we shall be +left severely alone; but then will come the trial. Recollect, Jim, that +we are landsmen, and don't forget to bungle when you hang on to a rope. +I shall let them know of your vow, and you must act up to it by +appearing morose and stupid. Hear nothing; say nothing; but wait until +everything is explained to you by signs." + +"Right, old man; you may rely upon me," was Jim's whispered reply; after +which they both sat silently, neither venturing to speak nor move, but +listening intently to every sound that reached their ears. Now and again +they could hear the distant shout of some native boatman, or the howl of +a cur prowling along the shore. Then, too, the voices of the crew could +be occasionally heard as they chatted together on the deck, but the +actual words could not be distinguished at that distance, though Tom +would have given anything to learn what they were saying. And all the +while the dhow rolled lazily from side to side, her mast creaking +dismally as she did so, while the rigging rattled loudly against the +woodwork. Occasionally, as a boat of large proportions passed, the sea +would come with a splash against the side and drown all other sounds. +But the noise soon quieted down, and Jim and Tom found themselves +listening again, as if fascinated, to the distant shouts, the murmur of +voices above, and the flapping of the sail. + +Three long and weary hours passed--hours of suspense to the two young +Englishmen seated below; and then, just as their patience was exhausted, +they heard someone moving on the deck. There was a patter of bare feet +upon the boards, followed by the noise of a rope passing through a +block. + +"Up goes the sail!" whispered Jim, in tones of delight. "Hurrah! We're +off!" + +"Then prepare to go on deck," answered Tom. "They'll wait until we're +out of sight, and then will call us up." + +"Ah, there she goes!" exclaimed Jim, as the dhow suddenly heeled over, +and began to move through the water. A minute later she was driving +along before a brisk breeze, and the two young fellows below realized +that, at last, their adventure had begun in earnest. + + + + +CHAPTER V + +A DESPERATE ENCOUNTER + + +Barely half an hour had passed from the time when the sail was unloosed, +and the dhow cast off her moorings, before one of the crew knelt upon +the deck, and, thrusting his head through the hatchway, shouted to Jim +and his companion to come out of the hold. + +"Now for it," whispered Tom. "Keep cool, and be perfectly unconcerned. +If there is trouble, do not hesitate for an instant, but draw your +revolvers and shoot. You've only got to look at those fellows' faces to +see that we have to deal with desperate men, who would kill us if they +had the slightest doubts of our good faith. Ready?" + +"Quite," answered Jim with a calmness that surprised himself. + +"Then up we go." + +Rising to their feet, and bending low, for the cargo of guns left little +space in which to move, they crept towards the hatchway, and in due time +emerged upon the deck, blinking as the dazzling rays of the noonday sun +fell upon their eyes. When they had accustomed themselves to the strong +light, they became aware that three of the crew confronted them, while +the fourth stood at the tiller, keeping the vessel to her course. Right +astern, a dim blue line showed the position of Aden, while ahead, and on +either hand, nothing but blue ocean could be seen. Not a sail was in +sight, though Jim strained his eyes in every direction, and not a +streak of cloud in the sky could, by the wildest flight of imagination, +be interpreted as the smoke from the funnel of the gunboat. But at this +moment one of the natives addressed him. + +"You and your comrade can lie upon the deck for a while," he said, "but +you must be ready at any moment to give us a help. Keep a keen look-out +in all directions, and if you see a sail, shout so that I shall know. If +we are pursued we must fly, and may Allah send a breeze to aid us. If +not, we will fight, and in that we are told that you can help us." + +"We hear what you say," answered Tom hurriedly, anxious to explain his +companion's silence. "Take no notice of my friend, for, as those who +sent us here may have told you, he is, for the time being, both deaf and +dumb. Do not speak to him, I beg of you, for he will not answer, and +will stand, as he does now, refusing to comprehend your words. If you +have orders to give, I will hand them on to him by signs. As for +fighting, what is that to us? In our country we are ever at war, and +should be miserable without it. Make your mind easy, therefore, for we +shall strike hard when the moment of danger arrives." + +Apparently his words satisfied the natives, for they turned away, and +walked towards the steersman. Tom at once grasped Jim by the arm, and +pointing to the deck, strode across to the bulwark, and threw himself +down there for an instant. Then he rose to his feet again, and placing a +hand above his eyes, so as to shield them from the sun, stared long and +anxiously across the sea. Again he threw himself upon the deck and +repeated the process, but this time with a different result, for, +apparently, he caught sight of some distant object, and giving vent to a +shout, ran to communicate his news to the crew. Indeed, so realistic +was his acting that they, too, imagined he had seen something of +interest, and at once came crowding to the bulwarks, and stared eagerly +across the water in the vain endeavour to discover some object between +themselves and the horizon. + +"Where?" shouted the man who had addressed Jim, and who seemed to be the +master. "Where?" he repeated anxiously. "I can see no sail, though it is +possible that one is hidden in the haze yonder. Hold out your arm so +that I may follow the direction." + +There was no doubt from the manner in which he spoke, and from the +anxiety displayed by the remainder of the crew, that the prospect of +discovery had filled them with alarm. They were conscious that they were +engaged upon an unlawful expedition, and though that did not trouble +them much, the thought of what would follow if they were captured set +them trembling. + +"Ah, what is that?" shouted one of their number. "I can see something +which has the appearance of a bird, but which may well be a sail. If so, +we are safe, for the Government would follow us in a steamship, if at +all." + +"It is nothing," replied Tom calmly, with difficulty keeping his +features straight. "I saw nothing to alarm me, but was merely explaining +to my comrade the duties he was to carry out. See, it is evident that he +understands." + +"Is that so?" was the grumbling reply. "By the manner in which you gave +the alarm, I thought you had sighted a suspicious sail, and my heart +leapt into my mouth at your shout. But it is well that there is nothing +in it. Go to your places now, and do not forget to keep constant watch." + +For a minute he stood by the bulwark, while Jim and his companion went +forward and threw themselves upon the deck. Then he retired to the +stern of the vessel, and sat down in the shade cast by the enormous +sail. + +For three hours the dhow kept steadily on her course, and then Jim, who +lay upon the starboard side, suddenly caught sight of a speck of white +coming from the opposite direction. Keeping his eyes fixed upon it, he +noticed that it increased rapidly in size, and soon there was no doubt +that it was another vessel. Giving a low cough to attract Tom's +attention, he pointed towards the object, and then sprang to his feet. +Walking along the deck, he approached the group at the farther end, and +laid his hand upon the shoulder of the master, shaking him as he did so, +for he had fallen asleep. + +In a moment all were on their feet, and staring across the sea. + +"It is a large dhow," said the man who commanded the crew, "and she is +sweeping down in our direction. What do you think she is?" + +"It is too early to say," answered one of the men, "but she is not a +trader--of that I am sure--nor does she belong to the Government. It is +possible that she comes from some African port, but until she is closer +I cannot be certain. This I can say, she is larger than any dhow plying +between Aden and the opposite coast, and therefore we shall do well to +keep her at a distance." + +For a few minutes the natives held a heated conversation, and a sharp +order was given to alter the course. When that was done, and the dhow +was holding along in a southerly direction, the crew gathered in the +bows and stood there, gazing anxiously at the distant vessel. Cries of +alarm escaped their lips when they noticed that her head came round, and +that she, too, had altered her course so as to intercept them. + +"She sails faster than we do!" exclaimed the master, with an oath. "We +cannot hope to escape her, and therefore I advise that we resume our +course, and make ready for an encounter, though it is more than likely +that she will prove to be a friend. And if not that--well, we must +prepare to sell our lives dearly. But I cannot believe that we have +anything to fear, for none but peaceful traders sail upon this sea." + +"That is so," agreed one of the crew. "But I have heard that, at times, +piratical craft sail from the coast of Africa, and swoop down upon the +traders. If that dhow is bent upon such an expedition, we are lost, for +her owners care no more for the Mullah than they do for other people." + +The news filled his companions with dismay. In a half-hearted manner +they produced a number of guns from the hold, and proceeded to load +them. Then they placed swords beside the bulwark, and motioned to Jim +and Tom to select a couple. + +"There is trouble before us, and we must fight for our lives," said the +master, brightening up a little. "If you do not wish to be killed, you +must join us, and help in the struggle." + +"We shall do so gladly, if there is need," answered Tom. "But let us +hope that the stranger will turn out to be a friend." + +"I wish I could think the same," the master replied with a shake of his +head. "It is more than likely that she is a pirate. But now we must +separate. You and your friend go forward into the bows. I shall station +two of my men in the centre of the dhow, while I and the fourth go aft. +Then we shall be prepared at all points, and wherever they attempt to +board us, we shall have men at hand to beat them back." + +"If I were you I should order everyone to lie down," said Tom, +thoughtfully. "At the distance they are from us now they cannot have +ascertained how many we have on board, and will naturally keep away +until they are certain. If they are bent on capturing us, and open fire +when within range, we can all creep to the centre and give them a +volley. Then we'll hasten to the bows, and fire from that quarter. You +have plenty of guns, so that you have only to load a number, and pile +them at various points along the deck, in readiness for our volleys. If +we are quick, and take good care to keep well below the bulwarks, we +ought to confuse them, and make them think that we have plenty of men." + +"It is a good plan," the native answered. "I shall see that the guns are +brought up at once, and the men warned. That ship will sail close up to +us, expecting us to fall an easy prey. But we'll astonish them with our +bullets, and will set them wondering, for it is unusual for a peaceful +trader, as we are supposed to be, to carry any firearms. Go forward now, +and explain to your comrade." + +Tom at once ran to the bows, where Jim was reclining on the deck, +watching the oncoming ship, and throwing himself down beside him, began +to make signs to him, keeping a watch all the time, however, upon the +other members of the crew. + +"Ah, they've gone below for the guns," he said at last, "and there is +only the man at the helm to be feared, and he is engaged in watching +this pirate, or whatever she may be. Listen, Jim. We're in for a +struggle, for that ship is an enemy, and is probably filled with negro +cut-throats. I have advised the master of our ship to make a fight for +it, but I doubt if he or his men have the necessary courage. What are we +to do if that is the case?" + +"It is hard to say, Tom. If the dhow over there carries a big crew, +resistance would be madness, in my opinion. Better to give in and +fraternize with them, if they will allow us, trusting to get away from +them at some future date. That's the best advice I can give. But if you +think we have any chance, I'm ready and willing to stand by you." + +"I know that, old boy," answered Tom warmly; "but though I have advised +resistance, I doubt whether it will be attempted. We'll just wait, and +see how things go. This stranger may turn out, after all, to be a +friend." + +Whatever hopes they might have had as to the peaceful nature of the +approaching dhow, they were quickly disappointed, for she was coming up +rapidly, aided by a steady and brisk breeze. Almost before they thought +it possible, she was within range, and then they saw that she was quite +double the size of their vessel. Shooting up into the wind, she lay to +dead across their bows, displaying at the same moment a broad expanse of +white deck, which was thickly crowded with men. Almost instantly a puff +of smoke belched from her bulwarks, and a ball came hurtling over the +water. + +"Caught, I am afraid," whispered Jim, peeping at the stranger. "We +haven't a chance, Tom, for look at our comrades." + +As he spoke the leader of the native crew rushed to the helm and waved +his arm frantically in token of surrender, while his men threw +themselves upon the deck, and grovelled there, in terror lest another +shot should be fired by the pirate. + +"Curs!" exclaimed Tom, angrily. "When there is no danger to be feared, +they are fierce enough looking fellows. But now that we are in trouble, +they show the real stuff of which they are made. But what are we to do?" + +"Stay where we are till the enemy comes alongside," answered Jim, +promptly. "If they rush on board with the intention of killing us, we +must stand side by side up here in the bows, and keep them off with our +revolvers. It is ten chances to one that they are only armed with +swords, and in that case we ought to be able to make a good fight of it. +Whatever happens, I don't mean to be killed without a struggle." + +He spoke quite calmly, and thrust his hands into his waistcloth to make +certain that his weapons were there. As for Tom, he looked at his young +companion with amazement, and then, fired by his example of pluck, +prepared to do as he had said. + +"Then it's agreed that, if there is no hope, we fight," he said; "and if +there is, we give ourselves up, and trust to better luck later on." + +"That's it," replied Jim, shortly. "It would be madness to resist if +they were inclined to spare our lives. But if they want to slay us, +they'll find one here who strongly objects." + +By now, the big native dhow had paid off into her course again, and, +seeing that she had nothing to fear, came on till within easy +hailing-distance. Then a huge negro, dressed in gaudy colours, and +bearing a cutlass in his hand, sprang upon the bulwarks, and shouted to +them. + +"Who are you?" he cried. "And where do you come from?" + +Shaking with terror, the master went to the side, and answered that +there were five besides himself on the vessel, and that she came from +Aden. + +"Where for, and what cargo?" was the next question. + +"For the coast, with arms for the Mullah." + +"Then we are friends," came the answer. "The Mullah is our master also, +and we sail the sea in his ship. All whom we capture we send to him to +swell his forces, while the loot we keep for ourselves. Do you know of +any trader about to leave the shores on the farther side?" + +"Not one," shouted the master, scarcely able to restrain his joy. "But I +can tell you that a British gunboat is on patrol, and you will do well +to keep clear of her. Now, good-bye. We must press on at our fastest +pace." + +Going aft to the helm he brought the dhow round, and in another minute +they were shooting away from the piratical-looking stranger, leaving her +rolling gently on the water, with her bulwarks lined by a crew of +natives, of all sorts of every race, who stood there watching the +smaller vessel depart. Ten minutes later she, too, had turned, and was +dashing away at a pace which showed how hopeless it would have been for +the dhow to have attempted to evade her. + +The delight of the master and crew of the smaller vessel was immense, +and they could scarcely contain themselves for joy. They threw +themselves into one another's arms, leapt high into the air, and shouted +at the top of their voices. Then they produced a hubble-bubble, and, +going aft, squatted down close to the steersman, and began to converse +in loud tones. It was wonderful to see the change in their appearance. +Whereas, a few minutes before, they had been shaking with terror, and +prepared to accept their death without so much as a struggle, now they +held their heads erect, and recounted to one another, in piercing tones, +the brave deeds which they would have accomplished had the larger dhow +turned out, after all, to be an enemy. + +As for Jim and his friend, they lay full length upon the deck in the +bows of the vessel, keeping a bright look-out over the bulwarks, and +apparently undisturbed by the excitement of recent events. But, for all +that, they were deeply relieved, for the situation had for a time seemed +desperate. + +"I am trying to think what would have happened," whispered Jim, taking +advantage of the fact that the natives were fully engaged in +conversation. "Suppose those pirates had compelled us to join them, and +we had afterwards fallen in with a British ship, we should have been in +a very awkward position, for we could not have refused to fight." + +"We should have found a way out of it somehow, Jim. I noticed that, like +this dhow, she carried a dinghy on her decks, and we could have taken +advantage of that and slipped away during the night. But I am glad that +things have turned out as they have, for now we have a better chance of +capturing this vessel. Look out! Here's one of the beggars coming to +talk to us." + +As he spoke one of the men aft handed the stem of the hubble-bubble to +his companion and came running forward. + +"The chief bids you come and join us," he cried, and at once returned to +his old position. + +"You stay here, Jim," whispered Tom; "those fellows want a chat, so I'll +go and smoke with them. If you were to attempt that you would certainly +fail, for it requires a deal of practice to tackle a hubble-bubble." + +Accordingly, leaving Jim on the look-out in the bows of the vessel, Tom +sauntered aft, and was soon squatting beside the natives. The stem of +the pipe was at once handed to him, and soon he was engaged in animated +conversation. It was evident that something had aroused the suspicion of +the master and his crew, for they questioned him closely. But his +answers seemed to satisfy them, and in half an hour he returned to Jim's +side, and taking advantage of the fact that the natives were still +engaged in animated conversation, began to chat in low tones to him. + +"They seem inclined to be very friendly," he said, "but I am not quite +satisfied. Something--I don't know what it is--seems to have upset them. +The fact of the matter is they don't quite believe in this silence of +yours. One man declared that he had seen us exchanging words when the +pirate bore down upon us. Of course, I said that that was impossible, +and that he had imagined it. But he was positive, and, I could see, had +been talking to his fellows. However, the subject dropped, and after a +time turned to the Mullah. His position was mentioned, and, by +pretending to know a great deal more about him than I really do, they +became quite confiding, and told me the number of adherents of which he +boasted. In the most unconcerned manner, I mentioned that a white +prisoner had fallen into his hands of late, and I could see at once that +they knew all about it. But I could get no further information from +them. + +"'Yes,' said their chief, 'a man was thrown upon the shore, and fell +into the Mullah's hands; but he is only one, whereas, as soon as the +foolish English advance, hundreds more will be made into slaves.' + +"That's all I could get out of him, and so, after changing the +conversation and having another turn at the hubble-bubble, I rose to my +feet and returned." + +"I'm not surprised to hear that they are suspicious, Tom. I saw one of +the natives look at us while we were deciding what to do, and if he is +quite certain that he saw us speaking, he will never be satisfied until +he has found out all about us. You know what kind of men these fellows +are, better than I do, and I have no doubt that, rather than run any +risk in the matter, they would pounce upon us and throw us overboard. I +advise that we keep watch in turn. It's already getting dark, and, if +you like, I'll take the first watch. I'll wake you in a couple of hours, +and you can do the same for me when you have had your turn. Hush! They +are moving." + +Turning his head, Jim saw the natives rise to their feet and disappear +down the hatchway. Ten minutes later they climbed to the deck again, +bearing a large dish and a gourd of water, and, having given the +steersman a drink and placed a pile of food beside him, they advanced to +the mast and sat down there, motioning to Jim and Tom to join them. +Gladly did the young fellows obey the summons, for many hours had +elapsed since they had partaken of any food, and their naturally keen +appetites were sharpened by the sea air and by the excitement of the +past few hours. Indeed, up to that moment, so much had occurred that Jim +had had no time to think of food, for all his thoughts had been +concentrated upon his surroundings. But the sight of it reminded him at +once of his long fast, and he joined the group, feeling that it would +require a large amount to satisfy his hunger. + +Squatting around the bowl, they helped themselves to dates, of which +there was an abundant supply. Simple though the food was it was +satisfying, and Jim soon returned to his old position, feeling very much +better. Tom remained for a short while chatting with the natives, and +then rejoined his friend. It was now evening, and within a few minutes +darkness fell, for there is scarcely any twilight in the Tropics. + +"The night will be a cold one, and the dew heavy," said the master, +coming up to them. "You had better go down into the hold and sleep +there. I will post a man up here to keep watch." + +"If it is the same to you, we would rather remain where we are," Tom +answered promptly. "You see, we are not used to this kind of thing, and +that stuffy hold makes us feel ill. We will ask you to lend us a couple +of blankets in which to wrap ourselves." + +"You shall have them, but you cannot sleep here, for the look-out man +must stand in this position; but you can go farther along the deck, if +you like. Come with me now, and I shall give you what you have asked +for." + +Ten minutes later Jim and his friend were wrapped from head to foot in +thick blankets, and had taken their places close to the bulwark on one +side, and about the centre of the vessel. As they did so one of the crew +passed them and went to take his station forward, while the remainder +proceeded aft, and throwing themselves down upon the deck, prepared to +sleep. Two hours passed without incident, Tom's heavy breathing telling +clearly that he was asleep. Then Jim, whose eyes had been wide open all +the time, touched him gently with his foot, and had the satisfaction of +seeing that he had awakened his companion. Then curling himself in his +blanket, he closed his eyes. He could not sleep, however, for, though he +was tired out with the long day of excitement, his novel position, and +the thought that danger threatened them, kept him wide awake. He was, +therefore, fully prepared when Tom stealthily stretched out an arm and +tugged at his blanket, and at once sat up with his back against the +bulwark. Once more it was time for his companion's watch, and Jim, who +was now feeling decidedly drowsy, awoke him and lay down again upon the +deck. A few minutes later he was fast asleep, and remained so for a +considerable period. But a shout from Tom suddenly roused him, and, +starting up, he saw that a struggle was taking place within a few feet +of him. Dawn was just breaking, and the light enabled him to discover +the fact that his companion was clasped in the arms of two of the +natives, who were hustling him towards the bulwarks, and evidently +endeavouring to throw him overboard. + +Springing to his feet, Jim leapt across the deck at one bound, and sent +his fist crashing into the face of one of Tom's opponents. Then, with a +shout, he clasped the other by the neck, and, tearing him from his hold, +sent him reeling across the deck. + +"What has happened, Tom?" he asked. "What made them attack you?" + +"I can't say," was the breathless answer; "but I deserved to be thrown +overboard, for I believe I had fallen asleep. At any rate, they were +upon me before I was aware of it, and, while one held me by the +shoulders and placed a hand firmly over my mouth, the other caught me by +the legs, and hustled me to the side. I fought like a cat, and managed +to free my mouth. But you saved my life, old chap." + +"Look out! They are preparing to rush again," cried Jim, in a warning +voice. "I suppose we must make a fight for it." + +As they were talking, the two men who had attacked Tom had picked +themselves up, and had retired to their comrades, who stood close to the +helm. That they were disconcerted by the sudden resistance was evident, +but, seeing only two unarmed young fellows, they forgot their fear, and +at once prepared to renew the combat. Snatching arms from a pile which +lay beside them on the deck, they shouted to their comrades to join in +the struggle, and then came rushing towards Jim and Tom at their fastest +pace. + +It was a critical moment, and might well have unnerved the bravest of +men. Indeed, Tom was so shaken by the narrow escape he had had, that, +for a second or two, he did nothing but stare at his opponents, as if +fascinated. Jim, however, was fully alive to the danger, and promptly +took measures to protect himself. Without taking his eyes from the +natives he felt for and grasped the butt of a revolver, and, as they +approached, presented it at their heads, hesitating to press the trigger +in the hope that a sight of the weapon would overawe them. But they were +maddened with rage, and, with shrill cries, came on boldly, waving their +swords above their heads. + +Crack! Jim pressed the trigger ever so gently, and, to his astonishment, +the report had scarcely rung out upon the air when the leading man +suddenly tossed his weapon above his head and fell to the deck with a +crash. A second later, the native who followed him tripped over his +body, and came sprawling upon all fours, where he lay, stunned by the +fall. + +"Now get ready for the other two," cried Jim. "Pull yourself together, +Tom, and when they rush, leave me to manage the first one. You can put a +bullet into the second, if necessary, but we don't want to kill them +all, if it can be helped. Ah, here they come!" + +Undeterred by the quick fate which had befallen their comrades, the +master of the dhow advanced cautiously along the deck, accompanied by +the steersman, and armed with an enormous double-handed sword, which he +held well before him. The steersman snatched at one of the guns which +had been loaded in preparation for the attack of the pirate on the +previous evening, and sinking upon one knee, took steady aim in Jim's +direction. He was in the act of firing it when Tom, who had suddenly +come to his senses, took a snapshot at him with his revolver, in the +hope of killing him before he could do any harm. But the bullet flew +wide of the mark, and striking the bulwarks, buried itself deep in the +wood. An instant later there was a loud report, and, to Jim's amazement, +the folds of linen which were bound about his head flew high into the +air, while he staggered back, feeling as though someone had struck him +violently. + +But he was not the lad to give way without a struggle, or to cry out +before he was hurt. Starting forward a pace or two, he levelled his +revolver at the man who had just fired, and who was, at that moment, +engaged in reaching for another gun. Sighting carefully, and with the +utmost coolness, he pressed gently upon the trigger, and had the +satisfaction of seeing the native start to his feet with a shriek of +pain, and then collapse suddenly upon the deck. + +"And now for the master!" he said quietly, turning to Tom. "Tell him +that if he moves a pace forward we will shoot him like a dog." + +"Drop your weapon!" Tom at once shouted, advancing towards the man, +revolver in hand. "We have already killed two of your number, and will +shoot you also, if you show the slightest wish to continue the conflict. +Drop your sword, I say, and hands up!" + +"You are too strong for us," answered the native humbly, letting his +weapon tumble with a crash to the deck. "Spare my life, and I promise +not to attack you again." + +"That's right! And now, wake this fellow up," continued Tom, pointing to +the man who had been stunned, and who was now recovering consciousness. +"When you've done that, go aft, and send him into the bows; but before +doing so, you can repeat to him what I have said." + +Meekly obeying these commands, the master of the vessel went to his +fallen comrade and shook him savagely. Then he dragged him to his feet, +and shouting words of warning in his ear, sent him forward, retiring +himself to the helm. + +"And now let us see to these other fellows," said Jim. "I expect the +first is dead, for I fired at close quarters, and aimed plump at the +middle of his chest. The second was a longer and more difficult shot, +and may not have proved fatal." + +Keeping their revolvers in their hands, in case of treachery, they +crossed the deck to the fallen native, and turned him upon his back, Jim +in vain attempting to disguise the horror with which the sight filled +him. + +"Dead!" he said in a whisper. "It's terrible to think that I killed +him." + +"I dare say it is, old boy," Tom answered calmly. "But then, you see, it +would have been far more terrible if he had run you through with this +murderous-looking sword, and had then thrown you into the sea. It's not +nice, I admit, to feel that that ugly-looking wound is due to your +bullet, but then, you know, he fully deserved it, for he had every +intention of killing you, and, as you saw, did his best to rid the world +of my presence. So, cheer up, Jim. It was a splendid shot, and I'm still +marvelling at your pluck and coolness. If it hadn't been for you, I +really believe that our bodies would have been floating a mile or more +astern by now, a prey to the sharks, for I was completely unhinged by my +struggle with them. You behaved grandly, I tell you, and you saved both +my life and your own." + +"I don't think so," replied Jim modestly. "You see, I couldn't very well +have behaved in any other way. Your shout awakened me with a start to +find you fighting with those two ruffians. Naturally, I went to your +help, and as an Englishman's first weapons are his fists, I used mine +with a result that fairly astonished me. After that, everything was, of +course, plain sailing." + +"There's no plain sailing at all about it, Jim, my boy," said Tom +sharply, "and I'm not going to allow you to run down the share you took +in the matter. You behaved splendidly, and with the greatest pluck, +while I made a fool of myself. First of all, I fell asleep when I should +have been keeping careful watch, and then I was so thoroughly upset by +the attack made upon me that I was practically useless. But there, I can +see you don't like the subject, so I'll say no more. Shake hands! That's +right. I feel better now." + +"Then let us look at this other fellow, Tom." + +Walking along the deck, they knelt down beside the second native who had +fallen, and turning him over, at once saw that he was dead, for he had +been struck in the neck. + +"A lucky shot," said Jim, looking pityingly at the man. + +"And mine was an execrable one!" exclaimed Tom, in disgust. "It almost +lost you your life. Let's look at your head." + +"Yes, it was a narrow shave, Tom, but I was so excited that I forgot all +about it in a moment. George! Look at that!" + +Jim placed his hand to his head, and withdrew it with a long curl of +dark hair, which had been neatly severed by the bullet. + +"Yes," he repeated, "it was a close shave, and I never want another like +it. Indeed, I have very much to be thankful for, for had the gun been +aimed half an inch lower, my head would have been shattered, and I +should be lying like that poor fellow there." + + + + +CHAPTER VI + +ON AFRICAN SHORES + + +There was no doubt that Jim had good cause to be thankful, for his had +been an extremely narrow escape; and as he turned away from his +companion, he was quite overcome at the thought, for this was the very +first time he had known what it was to be face to face with death. +Burying his face in his hands, so that Tom should not see his emotion, +he stood there, leaning upon the bulwark, for at least five minutes. +Then suddenly he roused himself, and went to join his comrade, who +respecting his feelings, had walked away to the other side of the deck. + +"Well, Tom," he said cheerfully, "the expedition has so far proved an +undoubted success, and this gun-runner is safely in our hands. The next +question to be considered is what we are to do with her. You said that +you would probably sail her back to Aden; but doesn't it seem a shame, +now that we are almost within sight of Africa, to return to our +starting-point?" + +"It does, Jim; and I am in hopes that that will not be necessary. As far +as I have been able to make out, we have held steadily upon our course +since we left Aden; and in that case the gunboat should soon catch us +up. I propose that we remain where we are until she comes up with us, +and then we'll ask them to do us the favour of taking us on to Berbera. +They'll be glad enough to help us, for this capture will appear in their +names, and will be a feather in the captain's cap, though he will not +fail to give us the credit that is due to us. You see, it wouldn't do to +publish the full facts of the case, for, if the natives learnt that I +had a hand in the capture, my life would not be worth an hour's +purchase, and I should have to leave Aden for good and all. But, I +say----" + +"What?" asked Jim. "You were about to suggest something." + +"About those fellows there, old man," Tom replied, pointing to the +bodies of the natives. + +"They're not very pleasant objects to look at, Tom; and if you think it +right, I vote that we tie some weights to them and throw them over the +side. Half a dozen guns should be sufficient if we cannot find anything +better. What do you think of the plan?" + +"It will have to be done sooner or later, Jim, and I think had better be +carried out at once. Let's slip down into the hold and see what we can +find. But--that would not do, for there is no trusting these native +beggars; and it's more than possible that while we were beneath decks +they would play a trick upon us." + +"That has occurred to me, too, Tom; but from the look of them, I don't +think we have much to fear. They are thoroughly cowed, and go in terror +of our revolvers. I'll wait here at the stern while you go below. Just +order the master to go forward, so that I can keep an eye upon both of +them. If they show signs of wishing to attack me, I'll shout, and you +can hop up to my help." + +"That will do famously," answered Tom. "Look here," he continued, +addressing the late commander of the dhow, who stood a few paces away, +watching his captors through the corners of his eyes, "get away forward +to your comrade, and sit upon the deck. If either of you attempts to +move, you will be shot. So take good care to keep absolutely still, for +my friend is a capital shot, as you have been able to see for yourself." + +The precaution was a wise one; but a glance at the two prisoners showed +that it was scarcely necessary, for all their courage had fled. Indeed, +at the mention of Jim's prowess with the revolver, they shivered +visibly, while their eyes wandered to the two figures lying upon the +deck. + +"You can trust us to be still," said the master humbly. "We have seen +your bravery, and know that we are beaten. Promise that you will spare +our lives." + +"I can make no promise at all," answered Tom sternly. "You have been +caught in the act of carrying arms to the Mullah, and in aiding the +enemies of the Government, and to the latter you must answer." + +"What is the talk about?" asked Jim at this moment; for, being entirely +ignorant of the language, he could not even guess the drift of the +conversation. "I hear you chatting away to these fellows, and long to be +able to join in and understand what is said. I've quite made up my mind +that, at the first opportunity, I shall begin to take lessons." + +"He is asking me to promise them their lives," explained Tom, "and I +have told him that it is impossible, and that someone else will have to +do that for them." + +"But you could say that you would speak for them," exclaimed Jim, a +sudden thought occurring to him. + +"And why? You seem to forget, old boy, that a few minutes ago these +fellows were doing their best to kill us. And now you want to help them +to escape the punishment which they have earned." + +Tom became quite indignant at Jim's words, and turned away from him +impatiently, as if it angered him to listen. + +"Steady. Wait until you have heard all that I have to say," cried Jim, +catching him by the arm and detaining him. "Did you not tell me that one +of the crew knew more than he would admit about that white prisoner of +the Mullah?" + +"Yes, that is the case," answered Tom, unable as yet to follow his +companion's meaning. + +"Well," continued Jim eagerly, "these fellows deserve to lose their +lives, but, you know, the Government are no more fond of hanging people +than we are. You could, therefore, safely say to them that you would +speak on their behalf on certain conditions. Don't you see my point +now?" + +"By Jove! Of course, I do, Jim! What a duffer I am, to be sure! I'll see +what I can do at once." + +They went along the deck towards the natives, who watched them +furtively, fearful of what was coming, and expecting at any moment to be +shot where they sat. + +"I have talked this matter over with my friend," said Tom sternly, +addressing the man who had commanded the captured dhow. "We both agree +that we should be within our rights if we shot you. But you have asked +me to promise you your lives, and I am inclined to do so on certain +conditions. The first is that you solemnly promise to remain faithful to +us until we hand you over to the Government; and the second, that you +tell us all you know about this white man who recently fell into the +hands of the Mullah." + +"We shall fall in with your wishes gladly," replied the native, scarcely +able to repress a shout of joy. "We solemnly declare that we will be +true to you, and will not venture to attack you. As for the other +matter, we do not know much, but we have heard that the prisoner was a +soldier, what the Hindoos in Aden call a 'sahib.'" + +"He says that the prisoner was an officer," explained Tom, turning to +Jim, so that he should be able to follow the conversation. + +"Ask him if he heard the name," was the eager reply. + +"My friend wishes to know more," said Tom, continuing his interrogation. +"What was the name of this prisoner?" + +"That I cannot say; but he was 'sahib' and 'colonel,' so the man who +told me of his capture said." + +Jim was listening eagerly, vainly endeavouring to understand all that +passed, and he could have leapt for joy when Tom translated the man's +answer. + +"That settles it, then," he said. "Up to this there has been some doubt +as to whether my father was the man who reached shore alive, but now I +am certain that it was he; for I have been through the list of +passengers, and there was only one colonel on board, and he, of course, +was Colonel Hubbard." + +"I think you are right in what you say," answered Tom, after a pause. "I +must confess that, until this moment, I have been very doubtful, far I +happen to know that nine British officers out of ten wear a watch +bracelet upon their wrists. It is a habit which seems to have become +general during the Boer war. Still, the fact that this survivor was +tall, and in other respects corresponded with your father, made it +possible that it would turn out to be he. Now, however, the question is +settled, for, no doubt, when the Mullah's men captured him he gave his +name, hoping that that would cause them to release him. They know quite +sufficient of the British to feel sure that a colonel is a man of some +importance, and they must have boasted of it. That's how the news has +got to this fellow's ears. Yes, I think you may take it as certain that +your father is the white prisoner spoken of, for if not, who else could +it be?" + +"There is no doubt about it," answered Jim emphatically. "I was never +very doubtful, and now any fears I may have had are absolutely set at +rest. But ask him more, Tom. For instance, perhaps he knows where father +has been taken, and whether he is being well treated." + +Turning again to the native, Tom plied him with question after question, +and was able to elicit the fact that the white prisoner was constantly +with the Mullah, who often changed his whereabouts. Also that he acted +as a slave, but was safe for the time being. + +"How long he will continue to be sure of his life I cannot say," the +master continued thoughtfully. "But I feel certain that if the Mullah +suffers at the hands of the British troops, he will avenge himself by +slaying the white man. Indeed, I wonder at his allowing him to remain +alive so long, for all those who are not of his own colour and religion +are his bitter enemies, and he slays them without remorse." + +"So you can feel easy about his safety for a time," said Tom, as he +discussed the facts with Jim; "we know that the Government is making +preparations for a general advance, and that nothing can be done till +all is absolutely ready. I should say that we have quite two months, and +perhaps more than that, in which to effect his rescue." + +"We must try to do it in two weeks, if that is at all possible," said +Jim with decision. "You see, there is always an element of doubt, and +until my father is out of the Mullah's hands, I do not think we can ever +consider him out of danger. These native beggars are cruel and +capricious; at least, so I have always been given to understand. He +might order his prisoner to be killed in his rage at hearing that the +British were preparing to attack him, and even might make the capture of +these guns sufficient excuse to execute father. It is horrible to +imagine such a thing." + +"Don't be down-hearted, old boy," exclaimed Tom encouragingly. "If you +allow yourself to think in that way, you will be miserable. Make up your +mind that your gov'nor is alive and well, and badly in need of his +freedom; and that you are going to bring it to him. That's the way to +look at the matter." + +"You're right," answered Jim with a sigh of relief. + +"Better look at the bright side of things, and just put all one's back +into the task. Yes, that is the way, I'm sure; and by Jove! I'll do as +you advise, and what's more, I'll rescue father, or die in the attempt." + +"Spoken like a man! If you say that you'll carry the job out +successfully, I am sure that that is half the battle, and that you will +get along ever so much better. I can tell you this, that I will help you +to the best of my power, for this expedition has taken my fancy; and +besides, Jim, I owe you something. Remember that half an hour ago you +saved my life. I want to pay back the debt, you know; and how could I do +it better than by standing beside you in this affair?" + +There was no doubt that Tom was thoroughly in earnest, for he spoke with +a vigour to which his companion was unused, and to show how deeply he +felt, grasped him firmly by the hand. + +"Thank you," Jim answered, returning the clasp with one as warm. "As to +the debt, I fancy that we are quits, for, had you not stood by me, we +should both have been like those two poor fellows there. Let's get rid +of them. I cannot bear to look at them, for it reminds me that it was I +who caused their death." + +"Right. We'll set these two natives to work, for they will understand it +better." + +Tom beckoned to the master, and gave him instructions to tie half a +dozen guns to each corpse, and then consign them to the sea. When that +necessary but unpleasant task was satisfactorily accomplished, he +ordered the two prisoners into the bows again, and retired with Jim to +the stern, from which point of vantage they could keep a watch upon +their prisoners. Not that that was necessary now, for the promise that +he would speak on their behalf, made by Tom, had put the natives on +their best behaviour. Indeed, unbidden, they began to sweep the decks, +and then suggested that they should prepare some food. + +"We have taken nothing to break our fast," said the master, coming to +them as they sat by the tiller. "Is it your wish that I and my comrade +should go in search of something with which to stave off our hunger?" + +"You can go, certainly," answered Tom readily; "but one at a time. It +does not matter what it is so long as there is sufficient, for we are +badly in want of food." + +In a short time the master returned and placed before them a plate of +dried meat and some pieces of wheaten cake. This they devoured with the +utmost satisfaction, completing the repast with a copious draught of +cool water. Then both rose to their feet, and began to patrol the deck, +for after having lived ashore for the greater part of one's existence, +the craving for movement, for exercise of some description, when aboard +a ship of such small proportions as the dhow, is very great. Half an +hour later Jim gave vent to a sudden shout of joy and pointed astern. + +"What do you make of that?" he asked in excited tones. + +"No, not there, but more to the left." + +Stretching out his arm so that his companion could follow the direction, +he pointed to the horizon, where a faint streak of dark colour was +visible. Tom looked at it for some minutes without answering, but at +last he turned to Jim with smiling features, which told that he had +guessed at the origin of the cloud. + +"It's the gunboat, sure enough," he said, "and I tell you that it lifts +a weight from my mind. You see, things have been rather uncertain, and +there is no doubt that we have been in great danger. Of course, we came +through this scuffle remarkably well, but if that pirate fellow had +turned up again we should have been in a nasty mess. There can be no +doubt that the patch of dark colour on the horizon is a steamer of some +sort, and I fancy it will turn out to be the gunboat, for this is right +out of the track of ordinary shipping, and though a few steamers are +just now engaged in bringing stores to Berbera for the Mullah's +expedition, I happen to know that none were leaving Aden during this +week. So we can take it for certain that that is the gunboat, and I can +tell you I am jolly glad. Won't it be grand when she comes alongside and +finds the capture already made!" + +"It ought to get you promotion, at any rate," answered Jim. "After all, +when you come to look at the matter quietly, you must admit that it was +rather a risky thing to do. Who else would have thought of making up as +a Somali native and shipping aboard the very dhow upon the capture of +which you were bent? Mind you, I take no credit to myself for that part +of the adventure. It was you who planned the whole thing, and I think +you deserve no end of praise. But, I say, look at her again." + +By now the dark streak had developed into a low-lying hull, which was +fast coming up from the horizon. Very soon a stumpy mast could be seen, +poking up barely into the blue sky, and, within twenty minutes, Jim and +Tom could even make out her guns, two of which stood amidships, and +formed her only broadside, an amply sufficient one in such waters. Half +an hour had barely passed before the gunboat came rushing alongside, +surging through the swell, and sending the foam seething in a broad band +of white from her cut-water. Then she put her helm hard over, and +turning upon her heel in the space of a few seconds, and with a heave +which caused her to roll her scuppers into the sea, she came up on the +other quarter, and lay to, with the muzzle of one of her quick-firers +grinning at the occupants of the dhow. + +"Dhow ahoy!" came in stentorian tones. "Who's that?" shouted Tom in +reply, springing upon the bulwark to obtain a better look. "Is it +Humphreys?" "Yes; and who are you?" "Government agent from Aden," sang +out Tom, refraining from giving his name, for, had he done so, the +natives would have heard, and it would have become common property +before very long. "I want to hand over this vessel to you. She's full of +cheap guns, which were going to the Mullah. We've a couple of prisoners, +too." + +"Bravo! Congratulate you!" was shouted from the gunboat, while at the +same moment a figure, clad from head to foot in snowy white, leapt upon +the diminutive bridge and signalled to the dhow. "We'll come right +alongside, and then you can slip aboard, and give us the tale. Any +casualties?" + +"None, I'm glad to say, though one, if not both, of us, was nearly +killed. But we shot two of the crew, and threw their bodies overboard +half an hour ago." + +"Look out for us now," was shouted from the gunboat. "If you have a rope +fender, or two, you might sling them overboard. Our plates are too thin +to stand bumping, even against the wooden sides of your dhow." + +Jim saw the commander of the gunboat grasp the handle of the telegraph, +and, so short was the distance intervening between the two vessels, that +he could actually hear the tinkle of the bell sounding down in the +engine-room. Then the screws whirled around, the blades churning the +waters of the gulf into white foam, which went hissing and frothing +along the sides of the vessel as she ran astern. Five minutes later, she +was securely fastened to the dhow, great care being taken to place +several thick rope fenders between the vessels, together with some fibre +matting which happened to be aboard the dhow. No sooner was all to his +liking than the captain of the gunboat stepped on to the bulwark of his +own vessel, and leapt lightly upon the deck of the one which Jim and his +companion had contrived to capture. A particularly smart officer he +looked, too, in his spruce and neatly cut white drill-clothing. Coming +forward, with outstretched hand, he advanced towards Tom with a smile of +welcome. + +"Glad to see you--heartily glad to see you!" he said. "'Pon my word, +when the Governor told me for what I was wanted, and packed me off +post-haste last night, I quite thought I was on a wild-goose chase. It +seemed to me that you and your young friend must have run your heads +into a perfect hornets'-nest, and I tell you, had I come across your +bodies floating in the sea, I should not have been by any means +astonished. But I'm bound to say that the Governor, though fully +realizing the extent of the danger, thought far better of your chances +than I did. You see, I've often met you before and known you in the Club +at Aden as a clerk in the Civil Service, and as a particularly good +billiard-player. And to hear suddenly that you were an Intelligence +officer, who was notorious for success in worming out the secrets of the +natives, was quite astonishing, for you must understand that I always +looked upon you as a peaceful sort of fellow." + +"And so I am," laughed Tom. "You see, I've lived the best part of my +life in Aden, so that to appear as a native is nothing out of the way +for me. I am so thoroughly used to it that I run very little danger. But +it's different with my friend here, for he is only just from school, and +doesn't understand a word of the language, and yet he boldly came with +me; and if it had not been for his help, I can honestly say that this +would have proved my last adventure. But he turned out trumps, and +proved to be as cool and steady as an old hand, and thoroughly plucky +into the bargain. But, I say, let me introduce him. Jim Hubbard--Captain +Humphreys." + +"Glad to meet you, and I congratulate you on coming so well out of your +first engagement," said the officer, gripping Jim by the hand. "Never +been under fire before, I suppose, and never seen men fighting in real +earnest?" + +"Never!" answered Jim, returning the handshake with equal fervour; for +the captain of the gunboat was an open-hearted, cheery individual, to +whom one was bound to take on the instant. "I must admit, too, that the +experience for the first time was far from pleasant; and if it hadn't +been that the fighting came suddenly, and before I was really prepared +for it, I am sure I should have been in a regular funk. You see, waiting +always did upset me. I was the same at school when I was in for a +licking, and had orders to attend in a few hours at the Doctor's study. +I'm too impatient, I suppose, and employ the interval in imagining all +kinds of awful things. But I'm sorry to say that I killed two of the +natives during the struggle." + +Jim looked the captain steadily in the face, and then flushed guiltily, +for it appeared to him a terrible admission to have to make. + +"I know what you feel, my lad," was the hasty answer, given with an +encouraging smack upon the back. "But that's the fortune of war, you +know, and everyone has the same regrets at first. Why, I remember how +terribly upset I was when I sent a bullet into the body of a rascally +slave-dealer. It thoroughly unnerved me when I looked at the fellow +afterwards. But my chief took me aside, and just put the matter to me as +I have to you. You may take it from me, that if you engage in adventures +of this sort, you will kill more men before you have done, though always +in self-defence. It's just that that helps one to get over the feeling." + +"And now about the dhow," interposed Tom. "She's full up to her hatches +with cheap guns and ammunition, and I now hand her over to you. In +return, I ask you, if you possibly can, to take us to Berbera, for we +are bound for Africa." + +"So the Governor told me, and you may rely on it that I shall do as you +ask, for I know how important it is for you both to make an early start +into the interior. You say that the dhow is full of cheap arms. If that +is the case, they are unlikely to prove of any use to the Government, +and we should not be thanked for bringing them back. I'll just pop +below, and look for myself, and then we'll put a charge of gun-cotton +into her and blow her to pieces. It will be the cheapest and best plan +in the end. But you may rely upon it, Dixon, that I shall make a full +report to the Governor, and if there is no promotion in your particular +branch, then I prophesy that your salary will be increased, for there +is no doubt that this is a most important capture. Indeed, had all these +guns reached the Mullah, so many more lives would be lost in the coming +expedition. So you can see for yourself what good service you have +done." + +"It's very good of you to say so, Humphreys," answered Tom, "and I will +only ask you, while mentioning the fact to the Governor, to be sure that +my name is not published in connection with the capture, for it is +important for me to continue to be known as a simple clerk in the Civil +Service." + +The captain of the gunboat readily assented to this proposal, and then, +stepping along the deck, quickly disappeared through the hatchway. Ten +minutes later he appeared again, and returned aboard his own vessel. An +order was given, and within a short while a couple of seamen went into +the hold of the dhow, where they remained for half an hour. Meanwhile, +the lashings which connected the two vessels were cast off, the fenders +and matting removed, and all aboard the dhow, except the men who were +placing the fuse, were ordered to leave and take up their quarters upon +the gunboat. Five minutes later the two British tars appeared, and when +they had joined their own ship again, she sheered off from the low-lying +gun-runner. When she had run a mile at the top of her speed, she went +about, and stopped her engines. And there, with eyes fixed upon the +distant vessel, all waited for the explosion that was to rend her to +pieces and send her cargo to the bottom. + +Bang! The roar of the bursting fuse could be loudly heard, followed by a +spurt of fire which rose high into the air, accompanied by a dense +column of smoke. As the latter cleared away, all looked to see what had +become of the dhow, but not a vestige of her was to be seen. + +"The Mullah will grieve for her, and will grind his teeth with rage when +he learns that the freight of guns and ammunition is lost to him," +laughed Captain Humphreys. "But we can smile, for we have done a good +turn to those who are going with the expedition. And now, I want to ask +you young fellows whether you intend to land as you are. If you would +prefer to change into European costume, I have plenty of togs aboard +which will fit you, and to which you are heartily welcome." + +For the moment neither answered, but each looked at the other, as if +awaiting a reply. + +"I've been thinking the matter out," said Jim at length, "and I've come +to the conclusion that we should be wise to make no alteration in our +dress. Secrecy seems to me to be the object at which we particularly +aim. Now, if we take advantage of your kind offer, and appear as +Englishmen, our coming will certainly be noticed at Berbera." + +"No doubt about it, Hubbard," said Captain Humphreys decisively. "Like +Aden, Berbera has a very large native population, consisting, for the +most part, of Arabs. The landing of a couple of Somali men would pass +unnoticed, whereas it is perfectly certain that each white man causes a +stir. He becomes the subject of conversation in the bazaars, and if his +mission to the town is not perfectly clear, it sets every native +wondering. Of course, if you were officers come to join the troops +there, you would arouse no further interest. But as you are not that, +and not traders, then for what reason have you come to Berbera? That's +how these fellows look at such a matter, and they're cute enough and +curious enough to go more deeply into it. Therefore, I think you will be +wise to make no change in your dress." + +"And I fully agree," cried Tom. "Our aim, as Jim has just said, is to +arouse no curiosity, and to maintain our incognito. That can be best +done by appearing as Somali natives. Once ashore, we can go to the +Consul's to tell him our plans, and from there we shall strike straight +away for the camp, where Ali Kumar awaits us with the followers. The +same night we shall disappear, and when we have received our baggage and +stores, and put a day's march between ourselves and the coast-line, we +can get rid of this paint and these long white robes, and reappear in +our ordinary costume." + +"And now for a meal!" interposed the commander of the gunboat. "I expect +you two fellows will be glad of one, for the grub aboard that dhow must +have been of the coarsest. Let me see, it's a hundred and forty miles +from Aden across to Berbera, and I reckon we have already steamed the +greater part of the distance. By the time we come on deck again the +coast should be in sight, and shortly after noon we should be at our +destination." + +Accordingly, the trio descended to the tiny cabin, where they did ample +justice to an excellent luncheon. Then they chatted for an hour before +going on deck again. When they did so, it was to discover a low-lying +coast before them, with purple headlands, and a long range of hazy blue +hills in the distance. Indeed, at the first glance, it was a +hospitable-looking coast, for the sand-dunes and the desolate, treeless +wastes were not visible. Soon Berbera itself was sighted, and the +gunboat was headed for the harbour, which seemed to be filled with +trading dhows, and with a few steamers of small size, which had come +there with stores for the troops. Half an hour later they were safely +moored inside. + +Jim and his companion took farewell of the captain, and watched him as +he was rowed to the tumble-down pier which did duty as a landing-place. +Then, as the dusk of evening fell, they put off in a small dinghy which +the gunboat carried, and were landed at a deserted part of the town. +Stealing away in the darkness, they were soon lost among the Arab +streets, and had the satisfaction of feeling that their expedition was +to begin under the best auspices. For who would take the trouble to +enquire about them? Captain Humphreys had impressed upon his men the +need for silence, while the two prisoners who had been captured with the +dhow could do them no harm, for they were at that moment in irons +beneath the deck of the gunboat, and likely to remain there until they +were thrown into prison at Aden. + +It was, therefore, in the highest spirits that they sauntered through +the town, and made their way towards the British Consul's. + + + + +CHAPTER VII + +THE "MAD" MULLAH + + +"You'll know the house where the British Consul lives immediately you +set eyes upon it," Captain Humphreys had said, when giving directions to +Jim and his friend. "It's a long, low-lying bungalow, surrounded by +quite a little forest of trees, and has the reputation of being one of +the coolest in Berbera. As soon as you are ashore, you must pass through +the Arab town, and bear towards the harbour again. I shall go to him at +once, and will tell him that you are coming, and arrange for the door of +his sitting-room to be left open. Of course, it gives entrance from the +verandah, and all you will have to do will be to walk straight through +the compound and into the room. I leave it to yourselves to get there +without being seen." + +Accordingly, acting upon this advice, they made their way slowly through +the narrow and dirty streets of the town, remarking how clean the +white-washed houses looked in contrast with the filth and squalor +around. Here and there a smoky oil-lamp glimmered, allowing them to +catch glimpses of huddled figures sitting in the doorways, swathed from +head to foot in robes of white. At length they reached the outskirts, +and seeing a belt of trees before them, at once turned in that +direction. Nestling in the centre of this plantation was a low building, +the windows of which were brightly illuminated. For a minute or more the +two stood in the deep shadow cast by the trees, and took careful stock +of the dwelling. + +"There's the room which we must aim for," said Jim, in a whisper, +suddenly pointing to the farther end. "Look! you can see that the door +leading on to the verandah is wide open. Let us creep along in the +shadow until we are directly opposite; then we shall be able to see +whether there is anyone waiting in there for us. If none of the native +servants are to be seen walking about, we'll cut straight across and +slip in. After that we'll ask the Consul to draw the blinds, and shut +out the light, for it would look funny, and would certainly give rise to +a good deal of chatter, if we were observed in conversation with His +Excellency." + +"I follow. It's very good advice; and, upon my word, you are becoming a +regular conspirator," laughed Tom. "I quite thought when we started out +upon this expedition that I should constantly have to warn you to be +cautious; but really, you seem to have taken to your new _rôle_ as a +duck does to water, and I am sure that no one could lay his plans with +more care and discretion than you do. Come along. I quite agree that the +room yonder is the one in which we are to have our interview." + +Stealing along in the dense shadow cast by the thick growth of leaves +overhead, Jim soon reached a point exactly opposite the farther end of +the building, and at once threw himself upon the ground, for a dusky +figure suddenly appeared between himself and the brilliantly lit window +beyond. It was a native servant; of that there was little doubt, for he +stood there, leaning against one of the verandah posts, sharply +silhouetted against the rays cast by a tall standard lamp. + +"Hush, Tom!" Jim whispered, turning to find his comrade close beside +him. "Lie down, for I can see someone over there." + +"And there's a man in the room," was the answer. "See, he's getting up +now and coming our way." + +As he spoke a tall figure, clad in white, and with a red cummerbund +about his waist, suddenly appeared at the open window, and catching +sight of the native, addressed him angrily. + +"Be off!" he cried sharply. "Have I not frequently given the order that +no one is to come upon this side of the verandah at night? Be off, then, +I say, or I shall find a means to sharpen your memory." + +The words had effect at once, for the servant salaamed, and retired +hastily. + +"Now is our time," said Jim. "Let's walk quickly across." + +Leaving the shadow of the trees, the two started across the open space +at a sharp walk, and mounted the verandah. A few steps forward took them +into the room, when they at once crossed to the farther side, so as to +be well away from the window. + +"Excuse me," said the gentleman who was present, and who had betrayed no +astonishment at their sudden entry. "I'll just shut the window, and let +down these thick rolls of matting, for, you know, it wouldn't do quite +for the Consul at Berbera, the representative of the great 'Sirkal,' as +the British Government is known, to be seen engaging in an animated +conversation with two of the very tribe against which our forces are +about to march. It would look queer, particularly at this time of the +day, and would set the town agog." + +Gently pulling the sash to, he lowered the blinds, and then turned with +smiling face to his visitors. + +"Very glad to see you," he said, coming forward, and shaking both by the +hand. "I have already had a communication from the Governor of Aden, who +writes to me that he has had orders from the Foreign Office to help you +as far as is possible. Short of providing you with troops, or an armed +following, I am prepared to do anything that lies in my power, for, Mr. +Hubbard, I have the pleasure of your father's acquaintance. But putting +that aside altogether, it is the nature of Englishmen to stand by one +another, whatever the trouble, and this, I think, is just the case in +which we should do our utmost to give assistance. Now, sit down there, +and tell me what I can do for you." + +"I hardly know," answered Jim, after having thanked him for his kind +offer of assistance; "but if you will allow the dhow which is to bring +our guns and baggage to land her cargo without question or molestation, +we shall be greatly obliged. We have decided to go straight from here to +the camp in which our followers are quartered. To-morrow morning we hope +to have disappeared, and a week from this we should be in the heart of +Somaliland. Should you obtain news of us after we have gone, will you +kindly forward it to Mr. Andrews at Aden, who will telegraph home to my +uncle?" + +"Make your mind easy about the dhow," said the Consul. "The Governor at +Aden gave his authority for it to sail, and the gunboat which blew up +that rascally vessel which was carrying weapons for the Mullah has been +quietly warned to look the other way. As for news of you, it is quite +probable that I shall occasionally hear some, for we have many spies in +various parts of the country, who are well paid to bring in information. +Thanks to them, we know a good deal about the Mullah and his movements, +though I am bound to confess that their word is not always reliable. +But Mr. Dixon and yourself will have excellent opportunities of +obtaining an insight into the true condition of affairs, and I may tell +you that we are hoping to derive great benefit from your expedition." + +"You shall have all that we can get," exclaimed Jim, "but I must admit +that at the present moment I have only the haziest idea of this +gentleman whom you call the 'Mad' Mullah. In fact, until a month ago, I +should have found it very difficult to explain precisely the whereabouts +of Somaliland." + +"In that you are like the majority of people, I fancy," laughed the +Consul. "Hitherto the minds of the public have been fully occupied with +other parts of this huge continent. First, there was Egypt, with the +campaign which ended at Omdurman, and resulted in the reclaiming of the +Soudan. Then the Boer war began, and whereas scarcely one in ten was +aware of the position of the two Republics a couple of years ago, now +everyone could point them out on the map with the greatest ease. You +must recollect, too, that the Niger, the West Coast, Abyssinia, +Coomassie, and other parts, are forever engaging public attention, and +consequently, this strip of country which occupies the north-eastern +angle of Africa has been overlooked. Suddenly, however, the rising of +this Mullah and his bands of desperadoes has filled the papers with long +and interesting articles, and bids fair to arouse as much enquiry as did +the rising of the fanatics who met our armies at Omdurman. + +"But--look here--you're just bound for the interior, and it is as well +that you should have all the news I am able to give you. Sit down, do, +and make yourselves quite comfortable. You may feel quite certain that +we shall not be interrupted, for I have given strict orders to my +servants that I am not to be disturbed." + +The Consul, who was a man of middle age, dragged a chair into a +convenient position, from which he could easily observe the faces of his +listeners. Then, seating himself, he gave a preliminary cough. + +"Let me see," he said, "I think, then, I had better begin by giving you +some idea of the class of men you are likely to meet with. Of course, I +understand that Mr. Dixon is well acquainted with them, in fact, better +even than I am, for his long residence in Aden has given him many +advantages. But to you, Mr. Hubbard, the news will be strange, no doubt, +and may be of service." + +"I'm sure it will, and I am eager to hear all about these Somali +people," exclaimed Jim. + +[Illustration: SOMALILAND.] + +"Well, I will tell you what I know about them. Up to recent times they +have been known to us as friendly and harmless people. Many of our +countrymen have made shooting expeditions into the interior, and all +have reported that they have met with kindness and courtesy; that the +natives are intensely fond of sport, and enjoy the pursuit of wild game, +with which the country abounds. I remember having a long chat with one +of these great hunters, and he told me that the Somali people are +entirely different from the 'Fuzzy-Wuzzy,' as the natives of the Soudan +are jocularly known. They are more like playful children, and are +extremely excitable. If suddenly thrown into a position of danger, they +will face it boldly, and are reliable fighters in such circumstances. +But they are afraid of uncertainties, and that being the case, are of +little use as soldiers. Then, as I dare say you have already heard, they +are a scheming and cunning race, so that it is always well to be on the +best terms with them, for then one has nothing to fear. On the other +hand, if you incur their hatred, you may look out for squalls, and you +will find it a wise precaution to put an extra guard over your camels. +Indeed, the one serious occupation of the Somali is to keep his own +beasts safe from marauders, and to rob his neighbours of as many as +possible. Sometimes a few of the men will band together and raid a +neighbouring tribe. If they are discovered, they fly for their lives; +for camel-stealing, though a recognized crime in the country, is one +which is not easily forgiven by those who are attacked, and capture +means certain death. But the narrow escape is never taken in the light +of a warning, for, on the very first opportunity another raid will be +planned and carried out. + +"There, I think that will give you a fair idea of the men you will meet +during your march; but, because I have described them as a friendly +race, you must not on that account omit to take every precaution. You +will meet many different tribes, some of which are still friendly to the +British, but others which have gone over to the Mullah, whose emissaries +are busily at work stirring them up against the white people. + +"As for this man, whom we all speak of as the 'Mad' Mullah, he is, I +have little doubt, an unscrupulous ruffian. To the Somali he is known as +Hadji Mahomed Abdullah. He belongs to the Habr Suleiman section of the +Ogaden tribe, who have their hunting-grounds in the southwest of the +country. He married into the Ali Ghiri, a Dolbahanta tribe, and is, +therefore, connected with a great number of people. But what has given +him such a powerful position in Somaliland is the fact that he has made +several pilgrimages to Mecca, and, consequently, is considered a man of +deep wisdom, and 'hadji,' or holy, as the word is understood here. For +some time he has travelled about Somaliland, pillaging the various +districts and attacking the peaceful tribes. But it was not until he +quarrelled with a certain tribe living in our Protectorate that we took +any notice of him. Then we began to gather troops, so as to attack him. +Having pillaged the land in this direction, he struck off towards the +Abyssinian frontier, and flung himself and his hordes of desperadoes +upon the men of that race who happened to be stationed there. I am happy +to say that they beat him handsomely, so that he was forced to fly. For +some time we heard little more of him, and, no doubt, during all that +while he was busily collecting men and arms, the latter being +considerably harder to obtain than the former. But there are some +rascals who will do anything for money, and amongst them, I regret to +say, are a few white people, who, at considerable risk, run cargoes of +inferior guns to the coast, and sell them at an exorbitant price, +careless of the consequences to the peaceful nations who live within +touch of the Mullah. + +"In due time his preparations were completed, and he then began to give +us further trouble. First, it was by raiding a tribe who lived under our +protection, and then by stealing camels from Berbera itself. In one way +and another he has steadily made himself a pest to the country, and as +he is as cruel as he is unscrupulous, the people have suffered terribly +at his hands. + +"And now to tell you why Britain should concern herself with the Mullah. +The Italians, the French, and ourselves, each hold a Protectorate over a +large tract of country along this northern coast of Africa, and there is +really no more reason why we should take up the quarrel any more than +the others. But then, you know, Britain has always been the one friend +of the oppressed. It has been our policy for generations, and we are +known the world over as a fighting race who love freedom and hate the +oppressor. Look at the manner in which we subdued the Soudan at enormous +cost to ourselves, and yet without benefit to our country. This is a +sample of the work we do, and we are about to repeat the same process +here. Indeed, we have already made one successful attempt, during which +we beat the Mullah with heavy loss to himself, and caused him to +retreat. But a holy man, in a country like this, has extraordinary +power, and the Mullah rapidly took advantage of that fact. Within an +incredibly short space of time he gathered together the remnants of his +following, and at once began to march through the country preaching a +holy war. Those tribes who were reluctant to join him, and who preferred +a peaceful existence, were compelled to throw in their lot with him or +take the consequences, which meant that they would be robbed in a most +scandalous manner, and, possibly, would run the danger of being +altogether exterminated. And so the host of warriors marching beneath +the banner of the Mullah has steadily and rapidly increased, so much so +that they have become a menace to us, and forced us to take action. + +"The Foreign Office, which governs this Protectorate, gave orders that a +field force should be prepared for service in Somaliland. In January, +1901, the force did not exist, but, by dint of superhuman exertions, +fifteen hundred natives were got ready for the fray at the end of May. +They consisted almost entirely of Somalis from the neighbouring friendly +tribes, and they were trained and taught to use the rifle by a select +band of British officers, than whom there are none more expert at this +class of work. A score of non-commissioned officers from India helped +them, and together they built up a very creditable following. At length, +when all arrangements had been made for transport, and sufficient +drivers had been engaged, the force marched for Burao to cross the +waterless Hoad. Crossing the range of mountains known as the Gobik, they +entered the Geratto pass, which leads from the Guban, or low country, to +the high country, which is known as the Ogo, and which is very much +healthier. From there the troops safely crossed the desert, and entered +the Mullah's country. And now, for the first time, they met with +opposition, for stragglers hung upon their flanks, sniping at the +caravans, and flying whenever an attempt was made to come to close +quarters. At length information came to hand that the enemy was a couple +of days' march away, and at once it was decided to attack him. Leaving +his baggage and the greater part of his camels to the care of a handful +of the Somali levy, with Captain McNeill in command, Colonel Swayne, who +had charge of the whole expedition, marched forward with the bulk of his +men, hoping to come upon the enemy unawares and teach him a lesson. + +"You will remember that I mentioned to you a certain characteristic of +these people. I told you that in certain circumstances they were bold +and reliable, and that, if they were unfriendly to you, it was wise to +watch them with the utmost care, on account of their cunning and +treachery. The Mullah speedily gave an example of this, and made a +crafty move, which might have proved disastrous had it not been for the +soldierly qualities and the bravery of Captain McNeill. You may be sure +that if we had information of the Mullah's whereabouts, he, also, was +well aware of our movements, for his spies and scouts were in all +directions. Waiting until Colonel Swayne and his men had marched well +away from the camel zareba, this leader struck his 'karia,' or +camping-ground, and travelling in a roundabout direction, so as to evade +the main column, threw his thousands upon the tiny garrison which was +left to protect the camels and baggage. It was a splendid move, and was +most successfully accomplished, so far as eluding the main army went. +But the Mullah was not to have it all his own way, for he had, as I have +just said, a man to deal with who had studied his profession. Put +yourself in Captain McNeill's position for one moment, and imagine what +you would have done. Knowing that the greater part of the force had +marched against the enemy, many men would have put aside all thought of +danger, and would have been content with the ordinary precautions which +are necessary when campaigning in an enemy's country. But Captain +McNeill thought otherwise. It occurred to him that, with a crafty man +such as the Mullah was known to be, this was a splendid opportunity for +him to fall upon the weaker portion of the force which had come to +attack him, and after disposing of that, to march swiftly upon the other +part, and take it by surprise. Therefore, he at once made preparations +to meet an attack in force. Selecting an excellent site, upon a raised +plateau, so situated as to be unapproachable from one side, and +altogether cleared of the scrub and undergrowth, which could be so +useful to an attacking enemy, he built two zarebas of thorns, +strengthened with long stretches of barbed wire, and between the two a +third, into which he drove the camels. At the highest point he built a +mound, and placed upon it a Maxim, which, owing to its elevation, could +command the plateau in all directions, firing over the heads of the +defenders when necessary. That done, he sent out scouts in all +directions, and having appointed each man to a post and given him +precise instructions as to his part in the coming battle, he sat down to +await, with as much patience as he could, the appearance of the Mullah +and his rascally gang. + +"Never before was there such an uneven contest, for you must recollect +that in this case the commander of the British zareba had only Somali +natives to depend upon, and they were so little trained that they could +only be termed raw recruits, while their reliability was a matter of +pure conjecture, for they had never yet been called upon to show the +stuff of which they were made. In addition, there were a few Indian +non-commissioned officers, and one lieutenant from an English line +regiment. In all, their numbers were extremely small, while the Mullah +would have at least five thousand troops. + +"Well, thanks to the foresight of Captain McNeill, all that experience +could suggest had been carried out, and, satisfied that this was the +case, the garrison waited. They were not to be disappointed, for, +scarcely was all in readiness, when quickly moving dots in the distance +told them of approaching horsemen, and very soon scores of the Mullah's +followers came clambering over the distant sky-line and dashed down into +the wide sweeping plain which surrounded the zareba. Evidently with them +it was a foregone conclusion that this weak party left in charge of the +camels was to be annihilated, and then, what loot there would be! At the +thought of the hundreds of camels there, and the huge stores of baggage, +their delight was intense, but it was as nothing to their pleasure when +spies reported to them that the reserve ammunition of the whole force +lay in that zareba, ready to be taken. And what a prize that and the +rifles of the defenders would prove! Guns were difficult to obtain at +any time, but of late, since the British Government had sent its +torpedo-boats to patrol the coast, it had become almost an impossibility +to get them, while, in the case of ammunition, it was difficult to lay +hands upon the smallest supply of powder. + +"No wonder the Mullah, as he looked down from the surrounding heights +upon that solitary camp, gave vent to an exclamation of satisfaction. He +was exultant, and almost shouted for joy. + +"'They are mine!' he shouted; 'the hated foreigners will fall into our +hands, and Allah will punish them as they deserve. Press on, my men, and +fear not the bullets of the enemy, for I swear to you that they shall do +you no harm; and, even though they strike you, they shall melt upon your +bodies as the snow turns to water. Rush on them, then, and slay every +living man within the zareba.' + +"By now, some thousands of dusky warriors had descended into the plain, +and while those who we're unmounted pressed forward at their fastest +pace, the men who had horses and camels to help them came on +impetuously, and it seemed, indeed, as though they would venture alone +to attack the tiny garrison. Such, no doubt, was their intention, for, +carried away by their fanatical hate, and shrieking loudly so as to +encourage one another, and with weapons waved high in the air, they +charged at the lines of thorn-bush which surrounded the zareba. + +"Were they to break in without opposition, and without losing a man? It +looked as though this was to be the case, for not a gun flashed, and not +one of the defenders could be seen, save a group of five or six, who +stood immovable upon the mound where the Maxim was placed. But the +defenders were acting under the orders of their commander, and +resolutely held their fire, though the temptation to open upon the +oncoming horsemen must have been great indeed. Lying behind the thick +thorn-bushes, with rifles in readiness, all in the upper zareba kept +their eyes upon that tall, khaki-clad figure standing beside the Maxim. +Would he ever give the word? Were they to lie there and suffer death at +the hands of the Mullah's soldiers without even attempting to defend +themselves? It was a sore trial to untrained troops, to men who up to +this had done little else but occupy themselves in agricultural work, +broken here and there by a camel raid, the excitement and danger of +which was as nothing to that which they were now experiencing. + +"'Fire!' The command rang out sharply in the crisp, clear air, and +almost instantly the clatter of the Maxim awoke the echoes. Glad to be +doing something, the remainder of the defenders joined in the fusillade, +and, encouraged by the calmness of their officer, emptied their rifles +without throwing away a shot. Scarcely a cry escaped them, for their +attention was far too much engaged in the business of exchanging full +cartridges for empty ones, and of discharging them against the enemy. +And still the latter came on in their hundreds, undaunted as yet, +reckless of the consequences, and careless of the numbers killed, so +long as they could gratify their hate and slay these insolent invaders. +Falling by ones and twos, and very often in groups of five and more, the +adherents of the Mullah pressed on with a courage which was truly +wonderful, and which was, no doubt, due in part to their leader's +promises that no harm should befall them. + +"Then, too, these Eastern people have a childish belief in fate. To them +Allah's will is everything, and if it is decreed that they shall die, +they will meet death boldly. Therefore, though scores of their comrades +had already fallen victims to the Maxim, or to the rifle-bullets, the +horsemen still dashed forward, while the footmen, coming upon the scene +at this moment, rushed to join them, undeterred by the bodies which lay +scattered everywhere upon the plain. Armed with Sniders, with +elephant-guns, and with cheap muzzle-loaders, which no sane man would +have dared to fire, they went bounding forward, shrieking at the top of +their voices, and waving their weapons madly in the air. A few of the +more cautious ones halted at times, and, dropping upon one knee, +discharged a load of slugs at the defenders. But they were up again in a +minute, and this time, with sword in hand, flung themselves against the +zareba. Leaping upon the thorns as if they did not exist, they hacked +desperately at them, endeavouring to force a way through. Coming in +contact with the wire, a few became hopelessly entangled, and in due +time were killed. And all the while, without cessation, without a +moment's pause, the rifles of the defenders flashed forth revengefully, +and the Maxim scattered its volleys into the masses of the enemy. + +"'They give way, they fly!' shouted the British commander. 'Hold to it, +my men! Let them learn that we are not to be so lightly attacked, and +that when the time for fighting comes, they have soldiers here to deal +with who will make them pay dear for their boldness.' + +"At his words the defenders redoubled their efforts, and so fierce and +well-aimed was their fire, that at last the hordes gave way. Panting +with their efforts, shattered by the terrible hail of bullets which +poured continuously amongst them, they turned their backs to the zareba, +and, taking to their heels, or applying spurs to the flanks of their +animals, fled in dismay. Yes, bleeding and breathless, some of them so +grievously wounded that they could not look to live, they raced away +across the plain, followed still by those scathing volleys, and when +they were out of range, threw themselves upon the ground, cursing their +fate, cursing the day on which they had thrown in their lot with the +Mullah, and the leader who had betrayed them with false promises. Then, +when they had regained their breath, they retired sulkily to the hills, +and were quickly lost to sight. + +"Not till then had the gallant defenders time to look round and +ascertain the losses they had suffered, but it was with a feeling of +relief and gratification that their young commander learnt that he had +few to mourn, and that in no case had the enemy been able to force a way +into the zareba. Had they done so, there is little doubt that their +swords would have given them a great advantage, and they would have +quickly despatched every one of the defenders. But the thorn-bushes, +strengthened as they were by the barbed wire, had effectually kept the +enemy out, and the check given to their first rush had enabled the +garrison to pour in a stinging fire which, as I have told you, proved +sufficient to drive them back into the plain again. + +"It was a glorious success, but as yet it was not sufficient to teach +the Mullah that he was beaten. His surprise and anger at the result can +be imagined, for he had expected to find an easy prey, and had already +counted the huge stores of baggage and ammunition as his own. And now, +instead of victory, he had to mourn the loss of numbers of his men, and, +what was worse, a fall in his own prestige, for he had sworn to the +tribesmen who accompanied him that this was a holy war, and that the +bullets of the infidels could not possibly harm them. + +"However, this 'Mad' Mullah has always been a man of resource, and +quickly recovering from his depression, he gathered his followers about +him, and harangued them, as he alone knows how to do. A few words from +his lips were sufficient to revive their courage and hate, and before +very long they were ready to make a second attack. You will remember +that I told you that no warning is taken to heart by these people, and +that life is held but cheaply in their efforts to obtain camels. This, +of course, is no matter for surprise, for in this world men will do much +for money, and the beasts I mention are practically the only currency +with which the Somali people are acquainted. They pay their debts with +these animals, and their wives are bought at the cost of so many camels. +If they are engaged as followers on a shooting expedition, the promise +of a camel or more proves a far more tempting bait than does the rupee, +particularly to the tribesmen who come from the interior. The men +hereabouts are, perhaps, a little more civilized, and are always eager +for the large silver coin. + +"Can you be surprised, after what I have told you, that the sight of +that small British zareba, with its piles of baggage and its hundreds of +beasts, proved a tantalizing object to the Mullah's followers? From +their position of security in the hills they looked down at the three +circles of thorn-bushes, and saw the defenders moving busily about, saw +their scouts leave their comrades and ride out into the plain, and +watched with longing eyes as the camels were driven down to the river, +which formed one side of the zareba. Then, forgetful of the reverse +which they had recently suffered, they swore that they would not leave +the place until they were conquerors. + +"A few hours later, therefore, they stole down from the hills, and +separating so as to approach the zareba from every available point, +crept softly towards it, hoping to take the defenders unawares. But, +again, they were bitterly disappointed, for scarcely had they sprung to +their feet and begun to charge, when the rattle of the Maxim set the +hills echoing again, and the angry snap of the rifles told that the +defenders were fully awake, and ready to receive them, I will not +describe the contest to you, though it was even more severe and exciting +than the first. It suffices to say that the Mullah and his followers +were driven off with heavy loss, and that so great was their +consternation, that they at once left the neighbourhood of the zareba +and fled towards the interior. Meanwhile news had reached Colonel +Swayne, and promptly facing about, he marched to intercept the enemy. +Meeting him in his flight, his horsemen quickly scattered his Somalis, +and chased them for miles, killing and capturing large numbers. But the +Mullah, unfortunately, contrived to escape, and galloped away into the +desert with a few of his followers. + +"From that date nothing was heard of this fanatic for many weeks. But in +time he re-established himself in the favour of the people, and, +collecting a band of desperadoes, began his old tricks again. Soon there +were tales of him from every part, and such a pest did he become that +another expedition was decided upon. It proved a failure, for, meeting +the Mullah and his forces face to face, our Somali levies showed the +white feather, and bolted, leaving the expedition to its fate. +Fortunately, however, the greater part of it contrived to escape, and to +reach Berbera in safety. It was now apparent that operations on a larger +scale must be contemplated, and as the Somalis had shown themselves to +be unreliable, it was determined to employ native troops from the West +Coast of Africa, and Indian soldiers. If you were staying here +to-morrow, you would see these men about the town, and would obtain some +idea of the preparations we are making, but I understand that you are +pushing forward at once, a plan which I think is advisable. However, it +is more than probable that you will meet with the troops later on, and +who knows but that they may even prove of service to you? And that +reminds me of my instructions. If you are in need of help, and our +troops are within reach of you, do not hesitate to send word to their +officer, who will hold out a hand to you, if it is possible." + + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +PREPARING TO ADVANCE + + +"I think I have now given you all the information I possess," continued +the Consul, after a pause, "and at the risk of appearing anxious to be +rid of you, I suggest that you should lose no time in going to your +camp. It is already upon nine o'clock, and you will scarcely reach it +within an hour. After that progress will be very slow, for marching at +night with a convoy of camels is no light undertaking. And now it only +remains for me to wish you all success in your enterprise. May you, Mr. +Hubbard, return within a short period with your father, and you, Mr. +Dixon, reach us once again primed with information concerning the +Mullah. Good-bye, and good luck!" + +Rising from his seat, the Consul advanced towards Jim and his friend, +and shook them most warmly by the hand. Then thrusting the roll of +matting, which did service as a blind, on one side, he opened the sash +of the window, and stepped out upon the verandah. A hasty inspection +satisfied him that there was no one about, and he returned to +communicate his news to his guests. Five minutes later the two friends +were racing across the compound. When they reached the shadow of the +belt of trees, Jim halted, and gripped his comrade by the arm. + +"Let us wait here for a few minutes, as we did before," he said, "for it +might happen that one of the servants overheard our conversation, and +is waiting somewhere near at hand to catch sight of the Consul's +visitors." + +"Right," his companion answered promptly. "I was thinking just the same, +and I know the precaution is a wise one." + +Accordingly they lay down upon the ground, and remained in that position +for nearly a quarter of an hour. Then they rose to their feet again, and +moved away like ghosts, for their sandals made not the slightest noise +as they walked. When they had put some three hundred yards between +themselves and the bungalow, they halted again, so as to make certain +that they were going in the right direction. + +"Through the town, and bear to the left, away from the sea-coast, the +Consul told us," said Jim, whose spirits were now roused to the highest +by the prospect before him. "Ali Kumar has been warned to be prepared to +meet us, and, I hope, will have quietly made arrangements to move away. +If that is the case, and no one happens to be near, we ought to +disappear without exciting curiosity, and without arousing the +suspicions of the Mullah's spies." + +"After that, we'll strike along the coast-line," broke in Tom, "and +march until we come to some wells of which I have been told, and with +which our shikari is certain to be acquainted. The following day we +shall ride over to the village in which the man lives who gave +information about your father. That done, we have only to collect our +stores when the dhow arrives, and march straight for the interior. It's +going to be a risky business, Jim; and I tell you plainly, that the more +I think of it, the more do I realize the danger and difficulties we have +to face. Don't think I am getting nervous, old chap," he continued +hastily, "but we shall have to be extremely cautious, for this Mullah +has just obtained a victory, and that fact alone will make him even +more audacious, and will obtain for him the help and support of many who +have hitherto held aloof." + +"I agree with you, Tom, and I am quite sure that we shall find it well +to steer clear of all these encampments. If we march into the interior, +demanding of all we meet whether they have heard of a white prisoner who +recently fell into the hands of the Mullah, I am quite sure our doings +will be reported, and that we shall call down upon our heads the wrath +of this fanatic. I have been thinking the matter out as we came along, +and have hit upon a plan which might serve us. Let us tell anyone with +whom we come in contact that we have been in the service of the +'Sirkal,' or the Government, but that we are tired of them, and have +decided to throw in our lot with the Mullah. The fact that I do not +speak the language will not matter greatly, for, you see, I can be put +down as from Aden, where all sorts of nationalities are to be found. But +I shall contrive on all occasions to keep my mouth closed." + +"It sounds well," answered Tom thoughtfully; "but what about our men? +Knowing that we are Englishmen, they will quickly spread the news +abroad, so that everyone will know." + +"Much depends upon Ali Kumar," replied Jim decisively. "If he has told +them that they are in the employ of Englishmen, a portion of my plan +will fall through, but otherwise, we shall adhere to it, if you are +agreeable." + +"Perfectly! And now let us push on." + +Accordingly, walking side by side, and taking no notice of those whom +they occasionally passed, save that Tom returned their salutation, the +two pressed on, and passed rapidly through the Arab town. Then they bore +to the left, and within half an hour came in sight of a zareba. By now +a small crescent of the moon had risen in the sky, and its light enabled +them to see that some sixty camels lay stretched upon the ground, while +close at hand were other smaller figures, the followers who had been +engaged to accompany them into the interior. Standing in a listening +attitude, a few paces away, was a tall man, dressed in white robes. He +bore a lantern in his hand, and every now and again lifted it so as to +throw the light farther afield, as if he were expecting someone. +Suddenly he had heard Jim and Tom advancing, and recognizing them, even +though they were disguised, he came towards them, salaaming deeply. + +"Welcome, my masters," he said eagerly. "I am Ali Kumar, and I was +warned to be ready for your coming. Here is the camp, with thirty men +lying there sleeping, but prepared to march at any moment. Give your +orders, and I will see that they are obeyed." + +Again he salaamed, and, lifting his lantern, looked long and closely +into Jim's face, as if he were anxious to ascertain what sort of lad he +was to follow. + +"Good!" he exclaimed at length. "You are young, full young for this +enterprise, but you are brave--that I can plainly see in your eyes. And +how could you be otherwise, for no one who was not possessed of courage +could go upon this expedition, even for the sake of his father." + +"Have you heard news of him?" asked Jim eagerly, taking no notice of his +remarks. + +"None," was the answer. "I have but lately arrived, and know little more +than I did a week ago. But to-morrow, when we meet the man who saw your +father, we shall obtain all the information that is possible. Is it your +wish that we march at once?" + +"Yes; for the sooner we are off the better I shall be pleased. Do you +know the direction to take? We are informed that there are wells within +twenty miles of here, where we ought to halt." + +"I can follow the road in the dark as surely as in broad daylight," was +the reassuring answer. "Stay here, masters, and I will send camels to +you. You could have had horses, had the saddles arrived, but at present +we have not received them." + +Leaving the lantern with Jim and his companion, Ali Kumar went across to +the sleeping men and gave a quick order. Then he returned leading two +enormous camels, which grunted and grumbled at being disturbed, as only +animals of that class can. + +"Keep a strict watch upon their heads," said Ali, in warning tones to +Jim, "for these beasts are as treacherous as the followers of the +Mullah, and love nothing better than to seize with their teeth anyone +who may be passing. Then, too, they will kick out with their feet when +people pass too close behind them. I have seen more than one man killed +in that way. Hau! Lie down!" + +He shouted the words in the native tongue, and at once, obedient to the +command, but still giving vent to extraordinary grunts, the two camels +sank to the ground, and waited there to receive their riders. + +"Sit sideways," said Ali, taking Jim by the sleeve; for he saw that his +young master was wholly unaccustomed to such a steed. "Now put your +right leg round this piece of the saddle which sticks up in front, and +hook it there. That is the way; and now you can slip your foot into the +stirrup which dangles here, and will feel safe even when the animal +begins to trot." + +Jim carefully followed the instructions given to him, and was surprised +to find that, though intensely uncomfortable at first, his seat was +secure, and allowed him to turn freely, and without the fear that he was +about to fall from the saddle. Having settled himself, and watched Tom +take his place with the ease obtained from long practice, Jim gave the +word, and at once, on a sharp command from Ali, the camels rose to their +feet, swaying wildly from side to side as they did so, in a manner which +threatened to throw their riders to the ground, and groaning in such +loud and guttural tones that one would have thought the effort was a +severe one. + +Meanwhile the sleeping camp had suddenly awakened into bustling life. +Men hurried here and there, and the camels were forced to their feet by +a succession of loud shouts, and often, too, by means of the free +application of the haft of a spear, for they disliked this sudden +disturbance. But at last all were ready, and, at a sign from Ali, the +cavalcade streamed off into the night, the animals looking decidedly +ghostly in the uncertain light. In twos and threes, and sometimes in +bigger groups, they took the direction of the wells, leaving the +neighbourhood of Berbera without a soul being the wiser. + +"No one will know what has happened to us," said Ali, forcing his beast +up to the one which Jim was bestriding. "We have given it out that we +are in the service of the Governor, and as it is quite the custom for +camels to be sent on to one of the advance stations up-country without +warning, the natives will think that nothing out of the way has +happened." + +"But what about the men?" asked Jim. "Do they think that they, too, are +hired by the Sirkal?" + +"That is the case, master; but I have quietly sounded them, and I have +learnt that they are willing to go anywhere, so long as good pay is +promised them. Half of these followers were with me once before in an +expedition, and I can fully trust them; the remainder are, however, +strangers to me. But I think you will find them brave and reliable." + +"I want to ask another question," said Jim, as they rode along. "My +friend and I think that if we go into the interior disguised as we are, +we shall arouse no suspicion, and shall have a better chance of evading +the Mullah. What do you think of the plan? And, is it possible to keep +our nationality from the followers?" + +Ali Kumar did not answer for some moments, but bent his head upon his +breast, as if lost in thought. Then he looked across at Jim and shook +his head emphatically. + +"No; it is not altogether a good plan, and not a bad," he said. "If you +attempt to deceive these men who act as followers, they will certainly +discover your secret before many days are past, and will think the worse +of you for not taking them into your confidence. Besides, some of the +men who went with me before already know of your mission. But they are +to be fully trusted, as I said. To hoodwink the Mullah and the tribes +with which we happen to come in contact is, however, a ruse which +carries great weight with it, and I think with you that it will be well +if you and your friend go dressed as you are. If we are questioned, you +can stay in the background while I do the necessary talking, and if +strangers insist on speaking with you, you can freely admit that you are +English, and that you have found it more convenient to travel in the +guise of a native. + +"That would probably lead to trouble; but, then, you are sure to meet +with some, however cautious you are. And now, master, I will go to the +head of the cavalcade, and will lead them, for, though the moon is +bright, it is easy to lose the way at night." + +Salaaming to Jim and Tom, he spurred his camel forward with his heel, +and was not seen again till the following morning. Just as day was +breaking he came to the rear again, and reported that the wells were at +hand, and that the camels and men were already settling in the camp. + +"And now, if the masters are ready, we shall ride on to the village of +which you have heard. It is only an hour from here, so that we shall be +back before the sun is overhead." + +"We are ready. Show us the way," answered Jim promptly; "and let us hope +that this fellow will have good news for us." + +Accordingly, waiting for one minute to watch their followers, who were +preparing to water their beasts, they turned their faces towards the +east, and, with the sun striking full into their eyes, pushed on through +beautifully green country, dotted in all directions by trees. This was, +indeed, a small oasis, surrounding the wells, which, by the many +footprints that could be seen indenting the ground, was evidently +frequented by numerous animals, which, no doubt, came there to obtain +water. Farther on, however, as they increased their distance from the +camp, the stretches of closely cropped grass gave place to an +interminable sandy waste, devoid of all vegetation, and obstructed here +and there by enormous dunes of glistening sand, which had been built up +by the wind. An hour's ride brought them to a tiny village, and soon +they were conversing with the man who had given the information of +Colonel Hubbard's capture. But he had no further news. + +"It chanced that a beast of mine had strayed from its feeding-ground," +he said, "so that, mounting my pony, I rode into the desert, hoping to +discover it. Suddenly I saw a group of tents beyond me with armed men +about, and caution prompted me to watch ere I approached them. It was +not long before I had every reason to congratulate myself upon my care, +for they proved to be a marauding expedition sent down to the coast by +the Mullah. As I lay behind a hill of sand, keeping my eyes upon them, I +observed a man struggling wearily towards the shore, through the surf +which was breaking heavily upon it. Creeping nearer, I watched him, and +soon made out that he was a white man. Then, as I was about to run +forward to warn him, the Somali warriors suddenly espied him, and, +shouting to one another, galloped in his direction. For three hours I +watched, and saw the camp break up and the expedition ride away with +their prisoner, and then I learned by questioning a follower who had +been left behind, having broken a leg, that the prisoner was a colonel, +as you speak of the leaders of your soldiers. More than that, I do not +know, save his looks, which I will describe to you." + +The native then gave a description of the appearance of the Mullah's +prisoner, and as Jim listened with all his ears, any doubt that he might +still have had as to the identity of the man who had reached the shore +was set definitely at rest, for it was beyond question that it was his +father. Having assured himself that no further information was to be +obtained, he made the man a handsome present, and then the party turned +about, and retraced their steps towards the camp. On the following day +they pushed farther along the coast, and, when the next morning dawned, +had the satisfaction of observing a dhow beating in for the shore. It +proved to be the one which they were expecting, and before the day had +passed she had safely discharged her cargo. + +"And now to begin our work in earnest," said Jim, surveying the +piled-up baggage. "I propose that we issue rifles at once to those who +can use them, and that we give them a preliminary training. That done, +we'll appoint certain of the men to act as scouts, while others will be +in charge of the baggage-camels. I should say that if we march with five +men thrown well forward and on the flanks, and another five in the rear, +we ought to feel secure from a sudden rush. What do you think, Tom?" + +"That the plan is an excellent one, old boy, and shows that you have +your wits about you. As an additional precaution, I suggest that one or +other of us should always ride with these scouts, Ali Kumar accompanying +the one who goes in front, for it is from that direction that danger is +to be expected. Then, I think that we ought to make up our minds what +action we are to take should we be suddenly attacked. You see, it +wouldn't do to be thrown into confusion and have these followers of ours +firing wildly in all directions." + +"Quite so, Tom, and for that purpose I propose a preliminary training. +We've a couple of hours of daylight left, and we know that there is no +one to watch our movements, for Ali Kumar posted half a dozen of our men +this morning right away on the hills over there. Let us give the order +to strike camp; and, by the way, what about mounts for ourselves?" + +"For the purpose of the march we shall find ponies far more useful than +camels," answered Tom promptly; "for the ponies can carry one at a swift +gallop for a few miles, and will enable us to keep easily in touch with +our front and rear guards. For longer stretches, however, for instance +when we desire to reach quickly a spot some twenty miles away and return +with equal despatch, the camels will prove most valuable, for, once fed +and watered, they will go on for hours at a steady swinging pace, which +soon gets over the distance. No wonder they are called 'ships of the +desert,' for, with their extraordinary powers, their spider-like legs, +and their broad, soft feet, they are eminently fitted for such a +country. But can you ride, Jim?" + +"I've been on a horse several times in my life, Tom, but I can't say +that I ever felt very comfortable. But if it is necessary to ride, I +will learn, whatever it costs me." + +"Then we'll give orders for a couple of the ponies to be saddled and +bridled," said Tom, "and for the camp to move on." + +Accordingly they called for Ali Kumar, and directed him to see the +baggage loaded. Then, for half an hour, they toiled with their +followers, struggling in the midst of a group of recumbent camels, +busily lashing burdens on the animals' backs. That done, all the natives +were gathered together, and fifteen of them, who professed to be able to +use the rifle, were supplied with weapons, the remainder continuing to +carry swords and spears only. Then ten of those who were provided with +firearms were mounted upon the best ponies, and given strict orders as +to their behaviour. + +"They are terribly excitable people, these Somali races," said Tom, "and +I have often been told that when employed as scouts they are continually +giving the alarm. Perhaps they see a buck in the distance, or the peak +of a mountain comes into their line of vision, and at once, turning +about, they gallop furiously back to the column behind them, shouting at +the top of their voices, and waving their weapons above their heads. +Then they pull up in a matter of two yards, and express their +astonishment at finding a hasty zareba formed, and preparations already +made for an attack. It is all done to show off, for they are just like +children, and love to attract attention to themselves. But as we cannot +afford to be in a condition of constant alarm, we had better warn them +that they will meet with our displeasure if they behave in such a way." + +Tom's words were communicated to Ali Kumar, who, with Jim beside him, at +once began to address the followers, impressing their duties upon them, +and making them repeat the instructions. Then they were dismissed, and +at once mounted, the men who were to look after the camels clambering +into their seats. At this moment three spirited-looking native ponies +were brought forward for the use of the leaders of the party. Giving +them a hasty inspection, and pausing for a moment to see that the +stirrup-leathers were of the right length, Jim selected the one nearest +to him, and at once proceeded to mount. + +"Hold the reins like this," said Tom, coming to his side so as to show +him. "Now, while you grip them with your left hand, catch up a wisp of +the mane with your right, and twist it round the spare fingers of your +left. That's the way. Now put your foot in the stirrup, and up you go!" + +Following these instructions carefully, for hitherto he had had very +little acquaintance with horses, Jim was quickly seated in the saddle, +and feeling the opposite stirrup dangling beside his sandal, thrust his +foot into it. Meanwhile the pony had made no objection, but had stood +there, with ears thrown back, and eyes cast suspiciously at his new +master. Then, probably realizing that he had a more or less new hand to +deal with, he gave vent to a loud squeal of anger, and started away with +a bound which almost shook Jim from his seat. + +"Keep his head up, and your knees well pressed into the saddle!" sang +out Tom. "Now, watch him, for he's going to play a trick upon you." + +That this was the case was quickly evident, for, finding that his first +efforts to dislodge his rider were unsuccessful, the pony went off at a +furious gallop, kicking his legs high in the air as he did so. Then, +when in the very midst of the loaded camels, he suddenly ducked his head +between his forelegs, and, arching his back, sprang high into the air. +It was a fatal movement for Jim, who at once shot forward into space, +and, turning as he went, landed full upon the broad of his back. In a +moment he was on his feet again, gasping for breath, but determined not +to be beaten. Fortunately he had been thrown upon a sandy patch, and +though shaken considerably, he was by no means hurt. As for the pony, +now that it had accomplished its purpose, it stood there unconcernedly, +as if it were incapable of such behaviour. Jim at once walked up to it, +and gathering the reins in his hand as Tom had shown him, thrust his +sandalled foot into the stirrup, and was in the saddle again in a +twinkling. + +"Well done!" shouted Tom; while the natives, who were all looking on in +the most interested manner, gave vent to exclamations of approval. "Well +done! Stick to him like a leech, and show him that you mean to be his +master!" + +"I will, even if I'm thrown twenty times," answered Jim, setting his +teeth, and sitting down closer to his saddle. "Now then! On you go!" + +The animal needed no second bidding, and at once set off at a rapid +pace. But this time, when it attempted to go through the old movement +which had proved so successful, Jim gave a sharp jerk to the reins, and +kept its head well up. Again it made the attempt, but without success, +and then, unable to get rid of its rider by means of bucking, the +spirited pony suddenly darted to one side, and Jim, losing his balance, +was deposited upon the ground once more. Four times in succession was he +thrown, but in every case he clambered into his seat again, and finally, +after the animal had bolted with him at its topmost speed for a mile or +more, he managed to quiet it down by patting it upon the neck, and +talking to it in a soothing voice. Then he turned it about, and with the +beast well in hand this time, came trotting back into the camp, with +flushed face and dusty garments, but triumphant and elated. As he did +so, Tom gave vent to a cheer, while the natives hammered their +spear-heads loudly upon their shields in approbation. + +"You have done well, master," said Ali Kumar, coming forward as Jim +dismounted in their midst. "These men already know that you are an +Englishman, and that you are their leader. They have been waiting to +learn what manner of man you are, and whether you are bold enough to +ride into the Mullah's country. It was easy to see that you were no +great horseman, and, believe me, your courage in mounting again and +again, and in laughing at your falls, has raised you high in their +estimation. They will now obey your words far more willingly than they +would otherwise have done. But we are ready; shall we move on?" + +Jim agreed with a wave of his hand, and at once the cavalcade was set in +motion. Forty of the camels, which were laden with every variety of bale +and box, marched in the centre, while close behind them came twenty +others, which could be relied upon to trot for many hours together, all +roped to one another. Near them were the followers who were not to act +as scouts, keeping an eye upon them lest they should attempt to stray, +and prepared to make secure any bundle which showed signs of breaking +loose. Spread out like a fan, a mile ahead, were five well-mounted men, +while a similar number stood by their horses at the camping-ground, +waiting until the column moved well away. And in this order, with Jim +and Ali Kumar walking their ponies in company with the front guard, and +Tom with the rear, they pushed on in a southerly direction, their faces +turned towards a distant hazy blue line which showed the position of the +range of hills they would have to cross before reaching the highlands, +and the broad stretch of desert which intervened between themselves and +the Mullah's country. + +Jim was in the highest spirits, and delighted to feel that at last the +search for his father had begun. For a time he rode beside Ali Kumar, +conversing with him, and then he trotted back towards the camels. Having +assured himself that all was well with them, he was about to return to +his post, when suddenly one of the scouts, stationed away on the flank, +came galloping towards him at top speed, shouting and waving +frantically. At the same moment, catching sight of him, the other scouts +retired upon their centre. + +"Probably a false alarm," Jim told himself; "but I shall take every +precaution. Down!" he shouted, signalling to the followers to stop the +camels. Then, remembering the native word used on such an occasion, he +repeated it loudly. + +Collecting their beasts together, the men quickly had them lying upon +the ground. Then, obedient to Jim's signs, they left two of their number +to guard them, and separating, ran forward some fifty yards. There they +halted, and knelt upon the ground, ready for anything that might turn +up. A few minutes later Ali Kumar and the scouts joined them, and the +former at once sharply interrogated the man who had given the alarm. + +"What did you see?" he asked. + +"A group of camels three miles to the right," was the answer. "As far as +I could see, they were browsing quietly, and had no attendants." + +The words were interpreted to Jim, who immediately gave orders for the +column to move on again. + +"We'll send a couple of our scouts over in that direction," he said to +Ali Kumar, "and you must tell them that they are to ride near enough to +be able to obtain full information, without themselves being seen. Let +all these fellows know at the same time that they are to investigate +anything which may turn up within a reasonable distance, and that they +are not, on any account, to come galloping back until they are sure that +there is real danger. Let us have a signal in a case like that, so that +all may understand." + +"That is a first-rate idea," cried Tom, who had been listening to the +conversation. "If we are certain of danger, we need not fear making a +noise, and, therefore, it would be as well to fire a rifle. A shot out +here, in this atmosphere, will be heard for a couple of miles, and will +give due warning to all of our men. Immediately they hear it, they can +turn and gallop back to the centre." + +Ali Kumar gathered the scouts about him for the second time, and, having +again impressed the caution upon them, despatched them to take up their +posts. Then the camels were ordered to rise, and once more the column +took the road. Shortly after darkness fell a bright moon climbed into +the sky, and, aided by its light, they kept on steadily. At nine o'clock +they halted, and at once the followers were sent to cut thorn-bushes, +which grew in profusion everywhere. With these a thick wall, or zareba, +was formed about the camels, which meanwhile had been relieved of their +burdens. A second hedge was constructed near at hand, and in this the +two young leaders and their following took their places. Very soon a +fire was burning brightly, and an hour later they were all seated at +their evening meal. + +Two days passed uneventfully, and then, one evening, as the column +rested at the foot of the hills, Ali Kumar slipped away from his +companions, who were already fast asleep, except for the few who were +stationed some fifty paces off as sentries, and creeping to Jim's side, +touched him gently upon the shoulder. + +"Hush, master!" he whispered. "Awake, and listen, for I have news of +treachery for you. Within an hour, at any moment, indeed, we may be +attacked, for I have discovered that one of our followers, who was a +stranger to me until a few days ago, has been in conversation with some +wandering natives, and has even now stolen away from the zareba so as to +join them and lead them to the attack." + + + + +CHAPTER IX + +AGAINST HEAVY ODDS + + +Worn out by a long day's march in the sun, Jim had wrapped himself in +his blanket at an early hour, and had fallen into a heavy sleep. It was +with a start, therefore, and with an involuntary clutch at the rifle +which lay beside him, that he suddenly raised himself into a sitting +position, to find Ali Kumar beside him. + +"Treachery!" he whispered, as if dazed. "What news have you to give to +me?" + +The leader of the native followers repeated his words in low tones, and +again warned him to keep silent. + +"I have watched the man of whom I speak for these two days past," he +said. "And I have learnt that he is a traitor. Three times I have seen +him conversing with natives when supposed to be watching the camels +which were out grazing. Creeping towards him like a snake, I hid in a +thorn-bush, and listened with all my ears, but they whispered to one +another, so that I could not make out their words. This evening, after +our zareba was formed, I followed him again, and saw him meet two men, +who, by their dress, were the chiefs of a neighbouring tribe. He pointed +to the camels, and counted their number upon his fingers. Then I saw +them turn towards the entrance of this pass through which we are to go +on the morrow." + +"'We will meet you there,' cried one of the chiefs, 'and perhaps even +attack before you enter. But my men do not like the darkness to fight +in, and besides, in the confusion and alarm, the beasts might be slain +or scattered. But we shall see; Allah will help us in this enterprise, +for are not the followers in the zareba servants of the infidel?' + +"That, master, is what I overheard," continued Ali, "and returning to +the camp, I made plans to give you the warning; but there were many eyes +watching me, and so I waited until now." + +"You did wisely," said Jim quietly, now sitting bolt upright, and fully +awake. "We'll get my comrade to join us, and then will decide what is to +be done, for this is a serious matter, and, unless we take instant steps +to protect ourselves, may lead to disaster." + +Accordingly, he stretched out his hand and shook Tom gently, explaining +to him as soon as he was awake the reason for his doing so. + +"And now we have to decide what is to be done," he said. "If we sit +here, and take no measures to protect ourselves, it is probable that +this scoundrel who has betrayed us will induce the tribesmen to attack +to-night. The moon is full, so that they would have every advantage, for +our zareba lies bathed in the light, while they would be hidden in the +crevices of the rocks." + +"I don't see that we can do much else than awake our followers and warn +the sentries to be alert," Tom whispered in reply. "If these fellows do +attack us, we must lie down and answer their fire; but I fear that our +camels will suffer heavily." + +"Where are these men likely to come from?" asked Jim, suddenly, turning +to Ali Kumar. "If they live in the highlands, and march upon us by way +of the pass, I think we ought to arrange a trap for them. If it were +carefully laid and proved successful, the lesson might be a warning to +them, and teach them to leave us alone." + +"They will descend from the hills, master, of that I am sure; for the +chiefs whom I observed in conversation with our follower were men from +the highlands, without doubt." + +"Then I propose that we divide our forces," said Jim, after a thoughtful +pause. "Will you, Tom, stay here, and defend the zareba with one half, +while I take the other? Then, with Ali Kumar to help me, I shall creep +up the pass, and select a spot where the road is narrow and difficult. +There we shall lie down and wait for the tribesmen. If they come down in +force, and do not turn back when we call to them, we will empty our +rifles into their midst; and I think that if we are careful in choosing +the site, we ought to be able to do a large amount of execution. That, I +take it, is the only way to persuade those people to leave us alone." + +"I'll willingly do as you say, Jim, old boy," Tom answered readily, +wondering as he did so at the coolness and foresight shown by his young +companion. "Your plan sounds an excellent one, and the only suggestion I +have to make is that you should shout loudly as you return, or you may +be drawing our fire upon you. You see, these native followers of ours +are excitable fellows, and hearing the sound of people approaching, and +being in fear of an attack, they would blaze recklessly into the +darkness." + +"Then I'll be careful to call out your name, Tom, and you will be able +to explain to the men that all is well. Now I'll be off, as these +tribesmen may appear at any moment, though I fancy it is too early for +them yet. They will probably wait till the early morning, when we ought +to be in our deepest sleep, and should therefore fall easy victims. But, +thanks to Ali Kumar, we have been warned, and if we do not take +advantage of that fact, we shall have only ourselves to blame. Good-bye, +and don't get fidgety if I do not return for some hours, for, as I have +just said, we shall probably have to wait a considerable time before +they put in an appearance." + +Nodding coolly to his companion, Jim rose to his feet, and silently +crossed the zareba to the spot where the followers lay sleeping. One by +one, those who were armed with rifles, and could be trusted to stand by +their master in a position of danger, were aroused and cautioned to keep +silent. At length fifteen were collected, and with these and a +sufficient quantity of ammunition Jim stole out from the zareba, and +took the narrow and rough road which led to the pass. He left Tom busily +engaged in instructing the remainder. These were also armed with rifles +now, though they were less expert than their comrades. Still, at close +range they could be trusted to give a good account of themselves, and to +aid in keeping the enemy at a distance. Then the sentries were brought +in closer to the wall of thorns, and ordered to lie down, so that they +should be invisible to the enemy, for while they were standing the rays +of the moon falling upon their tall figures threw long shadows, which +would soon have drawn the fire of the tribesmen. + +Thanks to the brightness of the night, Jim and his little party had no +difficulty in picking their way, for every boulder, and each nullah, or +ravine, stood clearly outlined. They were soon at the bottom of a gentle +ascent, which marked the beginning of the pass. But here the road was +broad, and would have been difficult to defend. + +"They would manage to slip round us," said Jim in Ali Kumar's ear, +taking note of the surroundings. "I want to get to a part where the pass +narrows to a few yards only. If we can find such a position, we shall +pile boulders across the road, and post our men behind them. Then every +shot we fire will tell, for these Somalis who are about to attack us +will certainly come in force, and as they will not be expecting danger +until they reach the bottom of the gorge, they are likely to be marching +in close order. That will be our chance, and if it occurs, we will make +the most of it." + +"I know of a position which will suit your wishes, master," answered +Ali. "Often have I made my way by this road, so often indeed that I +could find the path during a darker night than this is. We must keep on +for another quarter of a mile, as you English people speak of distance, +and then we shall find that the hill to the right and left of us closes +in suddenly, as if about to obstruct our further progress. I think that, +at some time, years ago perhaps, a river must have forced its way from +the highlands through these hills on its way to the plains below and to +the sea. Whatever the cause, the crags are cleft in twain a little way +above us, so that a road is possible. Half a mile farther on the land +recedes as suddenly as it runs together here, and by marching for an +hour one finds one's self again in the midst of a sweeping plain, but +this time far higher than before." + +"It sounds as if it would prove a likely place," said Jim, eagerly, "so +let us push on, I am in a fever to get our men into their positions, for +if these tribesmen happened to advance now instead of later on, our +plans would be ruined, and we ourselves should be in a very dangerous +fix." + +Striding ahead through the darkness, Jim encouraged his followers to +greater exertions by the example which he set them. So rapidly did they +walk, that barely ten minutes had elapsed before he became aware that +the gorge in which they were was narrowing. Soon he could see black +walls of rock on either hand, and a moment or two later it seemed as +though the road itself had suddenly come to an end. Nothing but pitch +black darkness could be seen before them, while the path at their feet +was buried in obscurity, the rays of the moon having been cut off by the +steep cliffs. But a careful search revealed the interesting fact that +there was a broad cleft in the wall in front of them, through which the +road passed on its way to the highlands. + +"The very place for us," whispered Jim, almost giving vent to a cry of +exultation, so great was his delight. "This gorge cannot be more than +five yards in width, and will suit capitally. You say that it continues +for another half-mile at the same width?" + +"No, master, I said not at the same," answered Ali Kumar hastily. "From +this spot for twenty paces perhaps, it is as narrow, while the road is +littered with big rocks and boulders, which are difficult to cross. +Farther on, however, it widens gradually, and then, at the distance you +mentioned, suddenly, till one finds one's self in the open again." + +"If that is the case, these men who are coming to steal our beasts will +crowd together without meaning to do so," said Jim thoughtfully. + +"That will be the case, master. They will descend the pass without great +caution, for the traitor who was of our number will have told them that +our sentries are never posted more than a few yards from the zareba. +Therefore they will have no need to observe much stealth till they +emerge lower down. They will walk together or separately, knowing that +the difficulty of the path at this end of the gorge will impede the +progress of those who are in front, and allow all the stragglers to come +up with them. After that, no doubt, they will send scouts ahead, and +follow like ghosts, hoping to take us unawares." + +"We shall have something to say to that, I think," Jim answered, +indulging in a chuckle at the thought. "I've been busily making plans, +Ali, and I have decided to act in this way. We have fifteen men with us, +and our two selves. If more than a third of that number attempted to +hold the bottom of the pass, it would lead to certain confusion, for the +space is very small. Now, it has occurred to me that the surprise would +be far greater if we were to separate a little. For instance, we will +give five of the natives orders to remain here, and let them set to work +at once to pile a ridge of rocks across the path. Then we will climb the +cliff on either side, and if we can find ledges big enough for the +purpose, we will send the remainder to them." + +"It is a great plan, master," said Ali, salaaming to Jim in his +enthusiasm. "A truly clever one with which to entrap these people, and +it shows that our leader is not only brave--as we clearly saw when he +first mounted his horse--but wise and far-seeing also. We are fortunate +indeed, for it sometimes happens that the lives of all in such an +expedition as this are sacrificed because of the want of discretion in +the one who commands it. Yes, it is a good plan, and it should prove +successful. There are surely ledges above us to which active men such as +we have could climb, and from which they could pour a scathing fire into +the enemy. Perhaps, even, they might be posted farther up the gorge, +with a pile of boulders at their feet. There is nothing that strikes +fear into the hearts of those who are unaware of danger as the sudden +descent of rocks upon their heads. They fly in terror to right and left, +but cannot escape, and if they turn with the hope of retreat, it +sometimes happens that the road is blocked by their comrades. Then, +indeed, is the time when men become wild with fright, and suffer defeat +at the hands of a few." + +"Perhaps it may turn out in that way to-night," Jim said thoughtfully. +"I do not wish to harm a single one of these tribesmen, but if they +really mean to attack us for the sake of the loot which they would get, +then they must take the consequences. Of course, we might retreat, but +if we shirk this danger and difficulty now, we shall never succeed in +reaching the Mullah's country. We should be laughed at by everyone, and +should have cause to be ashamed of ourselves. No, I have decided to go +on with my undertaking, whatever happens, and if these fellows interfere +with us, they must look to themselves. I shall get you to warn them, and +if after that they still come on, hoping to overpower us by numbers, +then I shall blaze into the middle of them, and the severer the lesson +they are taught, the better it will be for us in the future, for the +other tribes will hear of the conflict, and will take the warning to +heart. And now let us place the men." + +Anxious as he was to get all in readiness for the expected attack, Jim +would not allow his fears to hurry him unduly, for it was important to +obtain the most advantageous position. To allot five of the followers to +the mouth of the ravine was an easy task, and very soon those who had +been selected were busily engaged in preparing a low breastwork which +would give them shelter should the tribesmen possess firearms, as was +very likely, and discharge them in that direction. Jim waited patiently +beside them, directing their operations, and was not satisfied till a +wall some four feet high was erected, with niches cunningly left near +the base through which the muzzles of the rifles could be thrust. Then, +accompanied by Ali Kumar alone, he scaled the steep cliff on the right, +and set to work to look for a ledge which would do for his purpose. + +"Here is one," he exclaimed at last, when after a very difficult piece +of climbing they had ascended some twenty yards or more. "This piece of +rock juts out from the face of the ravine, and will allow the men to +fire down into it, while the edge will protect them." + +"It is well chosen," agreed the native headman, creeping to the edge and +looking over. "Standing here, we are in deep shadow, but in an hour, +when the moon has risen higher into the sky, the light will fall full +into the gorge, and every object will be visible. Yes, master, it is +wisely chosen, for how can the enemy return our fire when it comes from +the darkness of the rocks?" + +Bidding Ali call gently to five more of the men, Jim waited to see them +take up their appointed posts, and left them there with strict orders +that they were not to make a sound, and were not to attempt to open fire +until the word was given. Then he and his companion descended, and made +their way up the face of the opposite cliff. It was even a harder climb +than the other had been, but after winning their way up for a distance +of a few yards only, they had the good fortune to strike upon a narrow +ledge which seemed to wind up the face of the rock. At the best of times +it offered but a precarious footing, but now, when it was attempted in +darkness, it was a hazardous undertaking. But Jim made light of the +danger. Indeed, he gave no thought to it, for all his attention was +occupied in the search for a favourable and commanding site. Thanks to +the soft sandals which he wore, he was able to obtain a firmer footing +than would have been possible had he been shod with boots, and taking +advantage of the feeling of security which this gave him, he clambered +steadily upwards, Ali following closely behind him, and giving notice of +his presence by his hard breathing. Suddenly the tiny ledge broadened +out, and on halting for a few seconds to rest, Jim became aware of the +fact that the cliff had receded, leaving a small shelf, capable of +accommodating thirty or more men. + +"We are in luck!" he cried joyfully. "This part of the cliff overhangs +the gorge below, and is some yards from the entrance. I can feel +boulders everywhere, so that our fellows will not have to search far for +missiles. Then, too, there is no danger of their dropping them on their +comrades, for they will be well out of range. Yes, it will suit very +well; let us call up the men." + +Once more the process of giving directions to the natives was gone +through, this time orders being issued that they were to rely upon rocks +instead of upon rifles. Then, satisfied that everything was in +readiness, Jim sat down upon a boulder at the entrance of the gorge, and +waited there with what patience he could command. It was exciting work +sitting there in the darkness surrounded by precipitous walls, and +without a sound to break the silence save the occasional jar of a rifle +as it was struck against a piece of stone. All sorts of thoughts and +fancies passed through his mind during the hours of waiting. He wondered +whether his school-friends were thinking of him, what time it was in old +England at that moment, and whether the boys were even then engaged in +battling with the same tasks which he had so lately forsaken. Yes, it +was strange to reflect that barely a month ago he was a mere boy, acting +a boy's part, and with scarcely a thought for the future. And now he was +the recognized leader of a real expedition, about to invade the country +of the Mullah, as fierce a fanatic as had ever sprung to power to be a +scourge to his neighbours. It was strange indeed. It was almost beyond +belief that it was he, Jim Hubbard, sitting there upon that rock, +listening to the beating of his own heart, and straining his ears for +the sounds which seemed as though they would never come. Supposing this +tribe did not attack after all. Supposing Ali had made a huge blunder, +and was the victim of too vivid imagination. Supposing----Hark! What was +that? A stone falling from the cliff away above his head, or a footfall +upon the road which led through the gorge? + +At this sound, faint though it was, each man who lay there in ambush +became alert, while Jim sprang to his feet and peered into the +blackness. + +"The enemy!" whispered a voice in his ear. "Did I not tell you rightly, +master? After all, the sheiks have decided to attack during the hours of +darkness." + +It was Ali Kumar who had slipped up to Jim's side without making so much +as a sound. Then, together, they stood listening, bending their heads +towards the gorge, as though that would help them. + +Ah! There it was again. Was it a man walking, or was it the sound of a +voice? + +For some minutes there was silence, and then the mystery was cleared up +to everyone's satisfaction, for down the rocky sides of the ravine came +the noise of men talking. Almost at the same moment a thin streak of the +moon climbed up above the highest edge of the cliff, and shot rays of +brilliant whiteness down upon the road. + +One, two--why, the gorge was packed with figures clad in white and +bearing every sort of arm. They might have been bound upon a friendly +visit so far as precautions went, for they talked without restraint, +but in low tones; while their leader, happening to strike his foot +against a boulder of unusual size, gave vent to a loud cry of pain, and +stood there, with one hand upon the mass of rock, and the other chafing +his injured limb. + +But however friendly their appearance, the object of their midnight +wandering was quickly apparent, for, as he rubbed his damaged foot, the +sheik called to his followers to gather about him, and proceeded to +harangue them, Ali Kumar interpreting his words to Jim as he did so. + +"Stand as near to me as the gorge will allow," said the leader of the +tribesmen, "and I will tell you what course to take when we have +descended to the plain. There, as you well know, lies the zareba of +these unbelieving dogs, and with them are many camels, and loot +sufficient for us all. I command you to keep together until you are +almost upon them. Then you will divide, and while one half march so as +to gain the farther side, the other will rest where they are, taking +pains to preserve the greatest silence. When all are ready, I will fire +my gun, and then let every man fall upon the dogs. Allah will strengthen +our arms, and will give us the victory." + +"Allah is great, and we are his chosen," murmured his audience. "Lead +us, and we will slay these unbelievers." + +"Let them come a few paces nearer, and then shout to them to return +home," said Jim sternly, whispering the words in his companion's ear. +"Tell them that we had news of their intended attack, and that we will +fire upon them if they come any nearer." + +Striding to the barrier of stones, Ali called loudly to the sheik, who +was in the act of moving forward again. + +"Halt where you are!" he cried. "My master bids me tell you that he +is aware of your treacherous plans, and that he is prepared to punish +you for them. But he does not desire to shed blood, and therefore gives +you the choice of returning in peace to your homes. If you refuse, he +will open fire." + +At the words the sheik and his following came to an abrupt stop, and +stood there silently, dumfounded by the news. It seemed impossible that +their intention should have been discovered by the leader of the +expedition, and still more unlikely that he had the power to do them any +but the smallest harm. + +"Why, they are but thirty all told," cried the sheik, with a scoffing +laugh. "And yet they come here to meet us and to threaten us with death +should we persist in our plan. It is ridiculous! It is a child's plot, +made to frighten us. Do not listen, but press on, my men." + +With a shout the tribesmen at once started forward, and, drawing their +weapons, rushed at the entrance of the gorge. But they had not counted +on the fact that it was plunged in darkness, and obstructed with +numerous boulders. Running forward upon a pathway which was, just there, +lit by the rays of the moon, they stumbled blindly against the rocks, +and, one of them happening to fall, a dozen or more of his comrades had +tripped over him, and were grovelling on their faces before a minute had +passed. But the remainder pushed on without a pause, and, closely packed +together, and shrieking threats at the top of their voices, endeavoured +to reach the spot where their unseen opponents were. + +"Fire!" shouted Jim, seeing that the moment for action had at length +arrived. "Empty your rifles into them." + +[Illustration: "FIRE!" SHOUTED JIM. "EMPTY YOUR RIFLES INTO THEM."] + +Leaning upon the breastwork of stones, he took steady aim with his own +weapon, directing it at the sheik, who was to be seen wedged in the +middle of his men, and frantically struggling to push them back so as to +allow him to bring to his shoulder the gun which he bore in his hand. + +Bang! The report set the rocks ringing on either hand, and was at once +followed by a volley from the breastwork and from the ledge to the +right. Shooting out the empty cartridge, Jim looked eagerly to see what +success he had had, and was astonished to find that the sheik still +occupied the same position. But he was hit, and mortally, too, for a +moment later he suddenly threw his hands into the air and fell +backwards. Another moment, and he was beneath the feet of the tribesmen, +who trampled upon him without hesitation. + +But now another feature was added to the scene. Struck by the volley +aimed at them, the attackers had drawn back in consternation, but, +quickly recovering, they answered the shout of another leader, who at +once came forward to replace the sheik, and again dashed headlong for +the entrance of the gorge. As they did so, a series of loud and +sickening thuds told that the men who had been posted above were +carrying out their orders. Indeed, a glance at the cliff overhead showed +clearly what was happening; for the rays of the moon had now penetrated +to the shelf, and each follower, as he rose to lift a boulder and cast +it over the ravine, stood clearly outlined against the dark rock behind. + +Shouts and screams soon told that their efforts were not in vain, and +just as Jim was about to order another volley to be poured into the +gorge, the enemy turned, and now fighting fiercely with one another to +get away, fled from the scene as rapidly as the circumstances and their +crowded condition would admit. + +"Let us hope that that will be enough for them," said Jim, leaning over +the barrier and staring along the ravine. "I can count twelve bodies +lying amongst the boulders, and there are others beneath the rocks +farther on. I am glad now, Ali Kumar, that you advised that these +boulders should be thrown down upon their heads, for it was that that +caused them to fly. What do you think will happen now?" + +"They will retire into the plain beyond, and perhaps even farther, +before they recover their courage," answered Ali thoughtfully. "Then +they will look amongst themselves to discover who is dead. When they +find that we have killed their sheik, and that they have suffered heavy +losses, they will be mad with anger, for all will know of their +disgrace. Before setting out this night, you may be sure that they held +a feast, and called all their women folk to it, boasting that to capture +the camp was but a simple matter, for it contained few men, and would +certainly be taken by surprise; and now they will reflect that they have +been beaten by a mere handful, and that their prey is about to escape +them, and even to laugh at them. I know these people well, master, for I +am one of them by birth; and I am sure that the succeeding sheik will +harangue his followers, speaking as I have just told you. Little by +little he will rouse their anger, and when he reminds them of the booty +to be obtained, I feel sure that they will again advance to the attack." + +"Then we had better prepare for them," said Jim sharply, "We have given +them one surprise, and I propose that we arrange another, for that is +the only way in which we can attempt to make up for the great difference +in numbers." + +"But what can you do, master? You have made all the plans and selected +every position that it is possible to think of, and now all that you can +do is to remain as you are." + +"I fancy that we can manage more if we try," answered Jim with +decision. "You see, if the fellows attack again, they will know exactly +where our men are posted, and will certainly open a hot fire upon them, +telling off so many of the tribesmen to keep it up and make it +impossible for them to show themselves, or hurl rocks down into the +ravine. At least, that is what I should do if I were their leader. In +that case, the remainder would have an excellent chance of getting to +close quarters, which is what we want specially to avoid, for if that +were to happen, numbers would certainly tell upon us." + +"But you cannot think of retiring, master!" exclaimed Ali hastily. "To +do so would be to sacrifice all your following. Stay here, then, for to +reach the zareba the tribesmen must pass through this gorge, there being +no other way round." + +The native headman grasped Jim by the arm in his anxiety, and looked +into his face, fearful lest he should decide to take a step which would +end in their ruin. + +"You may banish that from your mind," said Jim sharply. "I am not going +to retire for any man, but what I propose to do is to push on till near +the other end of the ravine. There, we will make the same plans as we +carried out here, and when the enemy advances, will have another +surprise in store for them. But, tell me, supposing we creep along, and +build a barrier farther on, can the tribesmen climb the cliffs and treat +us in turn to a shower of rocks?" + +"You are safe from that, master. It is true that there are ledges at the +farther end, but they are narrow and short, and do not come far this +way. Were it otherwise, the sheik would already have sent his followers +to occupy them, and by now we should have a storm of slugs and bullets +pattering upon us. No, we have nothing in that way to fear, while as +for your ruse, it seems to your servant that it is as wise as that which +you planned before. To find us at the other end, and come upon us long +before they expected to do so, will, indeed, be a surprise, and, as you +say, that is the only way in which we can make up for our small +numbers." + +"Then we'll move ahead at once," exclaimed Jim. "Call to the men to come +down, and warn them that they are to keep perfectly silent. Tell them +what we propose to do, and say that after the enemy have attacked us, +they are to remain in their new positions till I shout. Then they are to +retire to this post again at their fastest pace, and lie down as before. +In that way we shall have an excellent chance of withdrawing, should the +contest prove too uneven for us." + +Acting upon his orders, Ali soon had all the native followers gathered +at the bottom of the ravine, and a glance at their faces as they were +outlined in the rays of the moon was sufficient to show that they were +to be relied upon, and that the success which had already attended them +had filled them with elation and determination to fight to the end. + +"Good!" exclaimed Jim, surveying them critically; "they will do. Now let +us get ahead, and, Ali, come with me in advance. It will be as well to +make sure that none are watching us." + +Creeping along the rugged road which threaded the gorge, Jim and his men +soon reached the opposite end. Not a soul was met, and though they lay +down for some minutes, not a sound could be heard. Then a scout was sent +away into the plain, and while he was gone, the remainder took up their +positions much as before, for numerous rocky ledges were to be found. +Half an hour later a barrier was erected across the ravine, and behind +it lay Jim and five of his men. + +"Hush!" exclaimed Jim suddenly. "I hear someone coming. Perhaps it is +our scout." + +A second later the bleat of a sheep was heard, and before long a dusky +figure rose up before the barrier. + +"They are coming," said the man. "I went far out into the plain, and +came upon them talking and shouting. They were drinking the wine of the +country, which is made by melting the fat which comes from the tails of +young sheep, and were crying upon their sheik to lead them forward. As I +left them they were setting their faces this way, with the determination +to slay us all, for they are angry, and their bitterness is great at +their defeat." + +"Then let them come," said Jim doggedly, when the words had been +interpreted to him. "They have had their warning, and this time I will +not spare them as I did before." + +Standing behind the wall of loose stones, he waited in silence for the +enemy, and within a few minutes saw a large force of men streaming +across the moonlit plain on their way to the ravine. Very soon they were +close at hand, and, gathering together, came walking forward without a +thought of guarding against surprise. + + + + +CHAPTER X + +FIGHTING THE TRIBESMEN + + +Standing in the shadow cast by the cliff on his right, Jim looked out +upon the brightly lit plain, and watched the tribesmen coming to the +attack. There was no need for them to remain silent, for they already +knew that their design of capturing the zareba was known; and, +therefore, they marched forward, shouting loudly to one another, and +brandishing their weapons above their heads. A few, carried away by +their excitement, even fired their guns, as if already in sight of their +opponents, as indeed they were, if only they had known it. Nearing the +entrance of the gorge, they gathered together, and then, at a shout from +their leader, halted for a minute. + +"We must slay the infidels this time," he called out. "Let each man +prepare now for the fight, and when I give the word, rush forward at his +fastest pace. In that way only can we hope to escape the shower of rocks +from above. Some I have already told off to climb the cliffs and pick +off the defenders, and they will carry out their commands at once. Are +you ready? Then, in Allah's name, forward!" + +At his words a storm of cries and of fierce shouts burst from the +Somalis, and some three hundred of them came rushing towards the ravine, +eager to be the first to reach the farther end and come to close +quarters with the men who had given such a bitter blow to their pride. +Well might the little band of defenders tremble at the sight and at the +noise, for on the former occasion the tribesmen had advanced in +comparative silence, and their defeat and subsequent retreat had been +swift and but the matter of a few minutes. Now, however, it was a +different matter. Here were the enemy rushing upon them in numbers +sufficient to overpower them, indeed, to sweep over them and trample +them underfoot without feeling their presence. For the moment the +hopelessness of their case appealed to Jim, and he felt as though all +were lost, and that his hopes of saving his father from slavery, or +worse, were destined to be shattered at the very beginning. Then a +sudden determination to conquer came upon him, and he turned quietly to +Ali. + +"Call gently to the men, and tell them to hold their fire and keep well +under cover until they hear me shout," he said. "I shall wait till the +enemy is within fifty yards, so that our volleys may have good effect. +Let them know also that they are to reload at once, and that if the +natives do not retire after the first volley, they are to open upon them +with the magazine, and continue firing till they fly. How thankful I am +that we took the precaution two days ago of showing them how to manage +their rifles." + +Ali at once carried out his master's orders, first telling those who lay +behind the barricade of stones, and then going to inform the remainder +who had been posted upon the ledges. That done, he returned to Jim's +side, and stood there awaiting the attack, determined to help him as far +as in him lay, for the bravery of this young Englishman appealed to him. +Indeed, he was lost in wonderment to find this lad, who had had no +experience of this sort of life, and who had had no dealings with +natives, so calmly placing himself at the head of his followers, and +leading them against odds which would have appalled many a grown-up +man. + +By now the tribesmen were within eighty yards from them, and, led by +their sheik, they came rushing pell-mell towards the entrance of the +ravine, expecting to find it open, and never dreaming that the enemy +whom they were bent on attacking already occupied it. All their thoughts +and all their energies were occupied in the race to reach the farther +end, each one striving to be there before his fellows, to strike one of +the few blows which they told themselves would be necessary to conquer +these impudent people. + +"Death to the infidels!" shouted the sheik. "Fear not their bullets, but +rush upon them and slay them ere they can lift their weapons to do you +harm." + +Crowded together in a surging mass, his followers advanced towards the +gorge, shouting defiance. A minute more and they were within the +distance which Jim had mentioned, looking as though nothing could stop +them, so great was their eagerness, and as though they would overrun the +wall of stones and scatter it to right and left in their impetuosity. + +Clash! Bang! At Jim's order, a stream of flame spurted from the ambush, +and from the ledges to right and left, as the men opened fire, sending a +hail of bullets into the centre of the mass. At such a short range, and +with these modern rifles which threw bullets of the smallest calibre and +of the greatest penetrating force, every missile flew on till it was +stopped by the sheer weight of the mass before it. Not one, but many men +were struck down by the shower of lead, and falling headlong upon the +ground, lay there sprawling in all directions and in every attitude, a +trap for the feet of those who followed. But if the surprise of the +tribesmen had been great during their first attack, when they discovered +that the opening from the ravine had been closed, it was now more than +doubled. They were dumfounded at the trick played upon them, and as the +rifles flashed out vengefully, they came to an abrupt halt, as if by +mutual consent, and stood there, breathless, their weapons still held +above their heads, staring into the darkness beyond them, as if they +wished to penetrate into the depth of the gorge and learn what was +happening. For more than a minute they paused, while the defenders, +taking advantage of the breathing-space, opened the breeches of their +weapons. Shooting out the empty cartridges, they replaced them with +fresh ones, and closed the locks with a snap and bang which told, as +plainly as if they had mentioned the fact, that they, too, meant +business, and that nothing but the absolute defeat of their enemies +would satisfy them. + +"They give back! They fly! Death to the dags!" shouted Ali Kumar +excitedly, at this moment, noticing that a few of the leaders had +suddenly turned, and were endeavouring to thrust their comrades aside +and find a means of escape. "See, master, you have already taught them +the lesson of which you spoke." + +"Wait!" answered Jim sharply. "It is only those who have no stomach for +the fight who are returning. The majority will fight it out; of that I +am sure. Ah, here they come!" + +As he spoke, the sheik, whose astonishment had at first been +overpowering, suddenly recovered his wits, and, rendered desperate by +the position in which he found himself, and fearful of losing credit +with his following, suddenly sprang to the front, and, turning towards +his men, shouted loud words of encouragement. + +"Are you then afraid?" he cried. "Shall these few infidel dogs turn us +from our purpose? On! Let not the flash of their weapons terrify you +and rob you of your bravery. Forward! Death to the enemy!" + +Swinging round until he faced the gorge once more, he levelled his gun +at it, and pulled the trigger. Then he tossed it to one side, knowing +that it would be useless in a hand-to-hand conflict, and drawing a long, +double-handed sword from his waist with the quickness of a flash, he +charged at the defenders. + +Taking encouragement from his words and action, the tribesmen at once +sprang forward and joined him, following close on his heels, and setting +up a fierce shout which awoke the echoes, and almost deafened the +defenders. "Kill them!" they shouted. "Slay the infidels!" + +Pressing forward at their fastest pace, they were soon within some +twenty yards of the barrier. But at that moment the rifles flashed out +again, and a storm of bullets was poured into their midst. Throwing out +the catch of their magazines, Jim's followers sent missile after missile +into their midst without cessation, and, pausing only to replenish them, +opened again, rising in their excitement from behind their shelter, so +as to obtain a better aim. + +Three times did the tribesmen win their way to within a few paces of the +wall of stones, but on each occasion the rifles of the defenders beat +them back. Then they retired sulkily, and, taking up their posts behind +boulders and scraps of cover, which existed here and there, open a +stinging fusillade upon the ravine. + +"Order the men to lie down behind the rocks!" cried Jim; "and tell them +that they are to reserve their shots until they are certain that they +can see one of the enemy. They are then to take careful aim, and pick +him off without wasting a cartridge. Let them show these tribesmen that +recklessness will not pay, and that the instant one rises from his +shelter he will be slain." + +Obedient to the orders which were repeated to them by Ali Kumar, the +native followers lay down upon their ledges, and kept a careful watch +upon the tribesmen. But all the while each held his rifle to his +shoulder, and closely scrutinizing the moonlit plain beyond, endeavoured +to discover the whereabouts of lurking tribesmen. Then, taking careful +aim, and waiting till the man he covered rose to empty his weapon in the +direction of the ravine, he pressed his trigger gently and sent his +bullets home. Not once, but many times, did the defenders pick off one +of the enemy, and, when an hour had passed, quite twenty had paid the +penalty for their boldness. + +"Their volleys seem to be getting heavier," remarked Jim, some twenty +minutes later, when a perfect storm of slugs whistled and shrieked +through the entrance of the ravine, striking against the rocks on either +side to glance off them and ricochet into space with a characteristic +note to which an old soldier would have been quite accustomed. Others +struck the hastily built wall of stones, and, smashing to pieces there, +sent a shower of fragments in all directions. Indeed, so heavy and +well-aimed was the tribesmen's fusillade, that a number of the small +garrison were wounded, but only to a slight extent, thanks to the nature +of the missiles used. + +"Yes, it is certainly becoming heavier, and I should not be surprised if +they made another rush before very long. Sing out to the men to be +prepared, Ali, and tell them that on this occasion I shall not give the +command to open fire until they are considerably closer, for they will +have had their warning, and will most likely come on in open order, in +which case we could not hope to inflict much loss, for the light is +uncertain, and makes accurate aiming difficult. But they are bound to +come together within a few yards of this, and that is the moment we must +select for blazing into them." + +"The advice is good," was Ali's answer. "These men who have so rashly +attacked us are burning to avenge their defeat, and they will not rest +until they have slain us, or we have chastised them so severely that +they recognize the hopelessness of their cause. Therefore, if ten, if +twenty, fell to the earth, shot down by our bullets as they rush to the +attack, the remainder would not pause, would not hesitate for a moment, +but would come on at their fastest pace. It is a clever plan, therefore, +to wait until they are within easy range and packed close together, for, +seeing that our guns are silent when they had expected them to open +heavily upon them, they will, perchance, imagine that we have retired, +and have prepared another ambush for them. I should advise, master, that +you order the men at once to lie down, for they are now having little +success, as the tribesmen have been warned by the death of their +comrades, and are careful not to expose themselves." + +"You can do as you suggest, Ali, and I feel sure that our silence will +make them wonder. Perhaps they will hold a council of war, and then come +on warily, imagining that we have retreated to our old barricade. Call +to our followers, and explain the situation to them. Then let them know +that they are on no account to make a sound until I give the signal by +firing my rifle." + +Ali at once turned to the natives, who had so gallantly supported their +young English leader, and hastily communicated Jim's words to them. Then +all knelt, or lay at full length behind the cover each one had +selected, and remained there, eyes fixed upon the plain beyond and upon +the figures of the tribesmen which flitted hither and thither, now +rushing from one thorn-bush to another, and now creeping along some +shallow trench cunningly scooped from the sand with their hands, to +reach a site which seemed more favourable. It was evident that all had +taken the lesson to heart, and had felt the bullets of the defenders, +for up to a little while ago they had, in the manner of Eastern people, +recklessly and defiantly exposed themselves, standing fully erect to +discharge their weapons. But as many of these bold men had fallen, shot +through the head or chest, the remainder began to learn that the sight +of a shoulder or of a head peering from behind a boulder was the signal +for the instant snap of a rifle and the swish of a bullet close at hand. +And now their crafty sheik had had time to recover his self-possession, +and from his position in the centre of his men, sent messengers crawling +to right and left with instructions for the next attack. + +"I fancy I can see something moving over there," said Jim, some ten +minutes later, as he stood behind the barricade, silently looking out +upon the plain. "Is it the moonlight which alters objects or are those +thorn-bushes getting slowly nearer to us? Look! There is a large one out +there in the very centre, and I declare that, five minutes ago, it was +twenty paces or more from the rock close beside which it now stands." + +He stared anxiously over the sandy waste, and pointed with his finger to +indicate the bush to which he wished to draw Ali's attention, quite +forgetting that he himself, together with all the defenders, were +shrouded in the inky darkness with which the entrance of the ravine was +clad. But Ali's eyes were as sharp as a ferret's, and long residence +amongst the natives had given him powers of sight far more acute than +those usually possessed by more civilized people. A glance into the open +showed him the large bush, and instantly his attention became riveted +upon it. + +"It moves!" he whispered breathlessly. "See, master, a moment ago it was +beside the rock of which you spoke, and now it stands in front of it, so +that I can scarcely see its outline. And--look! There are others to +right and left which are creeping forward. It is a ruse, a cunning plan +to get close to us before making the final rush. Each one of those +thorn-bushes conceals one or more of the tribesmen, all with their eyes +fixed upon the central bush, and all slowly, steadily, but insensibly, +drawing nearer. Soon they will have approached as close as they deem +possible, and then casting the cover aside, they will spring to their +feet, and come rushing upon us. What shall we do?" + +For the first time since the tribesmen had attacked Ali showed some +symptoms of fear. His lips trembled involuntarily as he asked Jim the +question, and unconsciously he grasped the lad by the arm. + +"What shall we do, Ali? Why? What else but watch them carefully, and +send our volleys swishing into them when they do rise for their attack? +I've been thinking the matter out, and I feel sure that the plan we have +agreed upon is a wise one. For ten minutes not a shot has been fired +from our side, and though they have certainly been listening with all +their ears, they have not heard a sound. But still they creep forward, +only half suspecting at present that we have withdrawn. Soon, however, +they will begin to think that, if we are still here, we are blind, for +we could not fail to have discovered the moving bushes. That will set +them wondering, and it will never cross their minds that we have chosen +to prepare another surprise for them. They will be quite sure that all +their trouble in creeping forward in this way has been useless, and they +will rise to their feet and advance towards the ravine, fully expecting +to find us gone. But we will teach them to be more sensible. Now is our +time to give them a blow from which they will never recover. Cheer up, +Ali! Things are not half so desperate as they seem." + +Jim's words had the desired effect upon his native follower, for the +latter at once straightened himself, and, standing erect behind the +barricade, looked out upon the enemy with far more determination and +courage than he had shown before. As for Jim, though he leant there +apparently unmoved and unconcerned, he was far from feeling as sanguine +as he had expressed himself, for there was no doubt that he and his +little band of followers were in an extremely precarious situation, from +which they could not hope to escape without severe and desperate +fighting. Indeed, when he considered the odds, and remembered the fierce +shouts with which the enemy had previously attacked, he was bound to +confess to himself that the position was almost without hope. Could he +and these few men, well armed though they were, expect for the third +time to beat back a crew of fanatical tribesmen who were bent upon +slaying them, and who, taught to think that they were the only true +believers, considered that death earned in slaying an infidel was well +earned indeed? Against such men effectual resistance was difficult, and, +unless reinforcements were at hand, or great success attained at the +beginning, could not possibly be continued for very long. + +"But we'll do it," said Jim doggedly, to himself. "I've come out to +this country for a certain purpose, and have done no harm to these +people. Indeed, I was prepared to be the best of friends with them. But +they have thought fit to attack me in the hope of obtaining loot, and +must just take the consequences." + +With that his lips closed firmly together, and, lifting his rifle once +more, he felt softly at the lock to see that all was in readiness. + +"Nothing but the magazine this time," he murmured. "We must sweep them +away, and mow them down before they can get within reach of us." + +By now the line of moving bushes had drawn sensibly nearer, and as each +man of the garrison kept his eyes fixed upon them, he was able to +observe figures crawling behind them. To those of Jim's followers who +lay upon the ledges above, the whole plan was now quite evident, for +from their elevated position they could easily see over the tops of the +bushes, and could even count the number of the enemy. In such +circumstances the temptation to select some individual, to raise the +rifle ever so quietly to the shoulder, and gently to press the trigger +when certain of the aim, was great indeed. Breathlessly, with +fast-beating hearts, and hands glued to the stocks of their weapons, +they stared out from the darkness into the space lit up by the rays of +the moon, and longed for the order to fire, for to lie motionless, +without attempting to defend themselves when they knew that men were +there hungering for their lives, was a sore trial to all of them. +Impetuous and excitable by nature, they would, had they been alone, at +once have emptied their magazines, and then either fled down the ravine, +or died fighting where they were. But they had confidence in their young +leader, who had already shown his fitness to command them, and, in spite +of their longing to begin the engagement, remained in absolute silence. + +"They have stopped!" whispered Jim some few minutes later, noticing that +the line of thorn-bushes had come to a halt. "Look! There is a man +creeping from the right-hand side towards the centre, and another is +following him. They are going to have a talk, and decide upon some +action." + +"Others are coming from the left, master," added Ali, catching him by +the sleeve; "and now someone has risen from behind the bush which stands +in the middle. It is the sheik, for I know him by his great height. He +is pointing towards us, and talking to the others." + +Eagerly did Jim and his followers watch the scene going on before them; +and as they looked, first one, and then all, of the leafy screens which +the tribesmen had carried before them with such craft and trouble were +tossed aside with disgust, and those who were hiding behind them rose to +their feet, giving vent to exclamations of annoyance and anger. + +"Once more these dogs have made fools of us!" cried the sheik, shaking +his fist towards the gorge. "First they poured their bullets into us +from the farther end, and then, when we advanced for the second time, +expecting to find them there, they lay hiding like foxes close in front +of us. And now, when after infinite care and caution we have, as we +thought, come within such easy reach of them that a few moments would +have seen us triumphant, we discover that they are gone, that they have +melted into the air. It is hard to fight with such men, and were it not +for the losses we have suffered, I should counsel that we retire." + +"And what then?" shouted one of his followers indignantly. "Do you ask +us to return to our wives and children and admit defeat? We cannot do +it. They would not receive us, but would drive us out with laughter and +jeers. Think for a moment. Our trouble may not be thrown away, for +seeing that victory was certain to fall to us, it may well be that these +insolent people have fled for their lives. Even now they may be +returning to the coast as quickly as their beasts will take them, +leaving their camels and their baggage to us. Be not down-hearted, for +whether they have fled or remain to fight, our numbers are great, and +make success certain in the end." + +The man who had spoken strode some paces to the front, and turned as he +harangued his brethren. Then he went to the sheik and spoke quietly in +his ear. + +"Abdullah Rishmar is right," cried the latter, after a few minutes. +"Rather than despair we should be filled with exultation, for it is +evident that the enemy has taken flight. We have discussed the matter, +and are still of opinion that the best plan will be to move forward, and +when we reach the farther end of the ravine, rush down upon the zareba. +Then if we find, as seems probable, that the infidel has fled, we will +return to our homes, and to-morrow, at the first streak of daylight, our +fleetest camels shall convey a band of fighting men in pursuit. We know +the lowlands well, and by nightfall should come up with those whom we +seek. Then punishment shall be meted out for their insolence. As for +those who are dead, does not Allah reward the true believer who falls in +taking part in such a cause?" + +At the old man's words the tribesmen gave vent to a loud shout, and, +gathering together, ran swiftly towards the ravine. + +"Another minute and we shall let them have it," said Jim quietly. "Call +gently to all the men to make ready." + +Raising his rifle to his shoulder, he aimed for the centre of the mass +of struggling humanity, and pressed the trigger. An instant later a line +of flame flashed from behind the barricade and from the ledges on either +side. So rapidly did the men open and close the breeches of their +weapons, that the volley seemed to be an endless one. Here and there it +would stop for a few seconds, as the magazine was emptied, but within a +very short while it broke out again, spurting into the darkness, till +the opening of the ravine was almost as light as the plain outside. At +the first discharge the tribesmen had stood aghast, thunderstruck at the +audacity of their enemies. Then rage took hold of them, and they came +on, this time in silence, their eyes blazing with hate, and their minds +made up to kill their opponents, whatever happened. Surging forward, in +spite of their losses, they reached the rocky entrance of the gorge, and +became almost wedged. Then a few, breaking from their comrades, dashed +at the barricade, and at once joined in a fierce hand-to-hand contest +with Jim and the six men who stood beside him. To the last moment Jim +kept on firing, and then, when there was no cartridge left in his +weapon, he grasped it by the barrel, and leaping, in his excitement upon +the wall of stones, dashed it down upon the heads of the attackers. +Indeed, he seemed to be endowed with extraordinary strength, for he +swung his rifle as if it had been a roll of paper, and brought it down +with a force which could not be broken. Ali Kumar did his utmost to +support his young leader, while the five remaining men, tossing their +guns to one side, drew their swords and threw themselves upon the +tribesmen with a fury equal to their own. + +And all the while the men who were stationed on the ledges above kept up +a terrible fire, sending their bullets swishing into the huddled masses +of the enemy. But in spite of all the efforts of the garrison, it +seemed at first as though the enemy would prove victorious, for nothing +seemed able to check them. In another place, indeed, they would have +been successful, without a doubt, but here their very numbers hampered +them, and prevented more than a few from closing with the defenders at +one moment. Had Jim and the natives who were with him given way, the +tide of tribesmen would have surged over the barricade, and not a man +would have lived to tell the tale. But they clung to their position with +desperate bravery, and finally drove their assailants back. + +"Now for the magazines!" shouted Jim. "Fill them up, and open again!" + +Though they could not understand a word, his men saw his meaning at a +glance, for he turned upon them, and flinging the lock of his rifle +open, began to slip cartridges into it. Then, waiting until they, too, +were ready, he brought his weapon to his shoulder, and once more the +line of fire spurted from behind the barricade. A minute later Jim +sprang over the breastwork, and rushed forward. But his intention was +not to throw himself upon the assailants, but to commit an act of +bravery; for suddenly one of the men posted upon the ledge upon his +right had risen to aim at the enemy, and overbalancing himself, had come +crashing to the ground, where he lay within a few paces of the wall of +stones, at the mercy of the enemy. With an agile leap Jim was beside him +almost as soon as he touched the ground, and catching him by the arm, +dragged him towards his friends. Then, tossing his weapon to Ali, who +looked on speechless with astonishment, he caught the native up in his +arms, and scrambled back amongst his comrades with him. The whole had +been the work of a few moments only, and was completed before the +tribesmen could take advantage of the opportunity so suddenly presented +to them. It proved, indeed, a turning-point in the conflict, for, filled +with exultation at their young leader's bravery, the defenders set up a +shout which set the rocks ringing, and then dashed forward to the +attack, Jim joining them. Filled with consternation as these men, who +seemed more than mortal, closed with them, the tribesmen turned about +with one accord, and bolted into the plain, leaving their opponents +proud masters of the scene. + +"And now let us see who is hurt," said Jim breathlessly, sitting upon a +boulder to rest for a few moments after the fray. "Line the men up, Ali, +and tell me if any are killed." + +"We have had great fortune," answered the native headman. "I have +already been amongst the following, and I find that two only are killed, +the one being Rigba Hamah, who fell from the cliff above, and the second +Ali Tumbi, who fell at the last assault. As for wounds, we all have one +or more to show, but they are nothing, and will be well in a week." + +"Then I'll ask you to tie up my arm," said Jim quietly. "I fancy that a +slug has ploughed a big hole through it." + +Leading his master into the light, Ali at once examined his wound, and +gave a cry of consternation when he saw the condition of the arm, for it +was red with blood, while a stream was gushing from a ragged hole close +above the elbow. + +"How long is it since you received this?" he asked sharply. "It must +have been some time ago, for you have lost much blood. Look at the +condition of your clothing." + +"A slug struck me as the tribesmen advanced for the last time," answered +Jim faintly. "I scarcely felt it in the excitement of the moment, but it +smarts now. Give me something to drink, for I feel dizzy." + +Running across to the cliff, down the steep slope of which a tiny +stream trickled, Ali quickly procured a handful of water, and at once +poured it down Jim's throat. + +"Ah, that's better; and now I feel less likely to make a fool of myself +and faint," said the latter gratefully. "Now tie it up for me like a +good fellow, and let us see what our next step is to be." + +"We shall return to the zareba, master, and spend what is left of the +night in peace," replied Ali with assurance. "The tribesmen are +thoroughly beaten, and will not venture to advance again until we have +withdrawn. Then they will collect their dead and wounded, and when the +morning comes they will slink away into the plain and hide. This has +been an evil time for them, and they will remember it for many a day to +come." + +"I think you are right," Jim agreed, "and I propose that you shout out +to them that we will not interfere with them if they like to send in for +the bodies. Tell them that we will retire to the pass below the ravine, +and that they are on no account to attempt to approach us, or we will +hunt them up to-morrow and burn their camp. When you have done that, we +shall get back to the zareba, leaving three of our men as sentries until +they can be relieved by those who have remained behind." + +Accordingly, when Ali had seen to the comfort of his leader, he strode +out into the plain, and shouted to the tribesmen, giving them Jim's +message. Then the gallant band, who had fought so well in the gorge, +retired, and within an hour were with their friends again. + + + + +CHAPTER XI + +A MARCH INTO THE DESERT + + +"And so you have been behaving like a young hero?" said Tom Dixon, on +the following morning, surveying Jim as he rose from his blanket. "You +were tired out, so I allowed you to sleep on undisturbed while Ali and I +had a long chat. Seriously, though, old chap, you have done nobly, and +have again risen high in the estimation of our following. After this +they will do anything for you, and will be just as keen as you are to +bring the expedition to a successful issue. But tell me about the fight. +I can only get a garbled account from Ali, who tells me that you +defeated the whole tribe, and caused them enormous loss. But that cannot +be the case. He must have been romancing, though I am bound to confess +that we heard very heavy firing, which might easily have accounted for +large numbers of killed and wounded." + +"Ali Kumar was quite right," replied Jim quietly. "We did defeat the +whole lot of the tribesmen, and I believe they will only be too glad to +leave us alone in the future. You see, it was like this----" + +Then Jim set to work to give his companion the details, leaving out his +own share in the matter, for he was not a boastful lad. + +"And now tell me how things went with you," he continued. "I was so done +up when we got back to the zareba last night that I felt I could not +listen. It was sufficient for me to find that you were safe, and that +you had lost none of the beasts or baggage." + +"We did not even see an enemy," said Tom with disgust. "Though we kept a +very bright look-out, and even on one occasion blazed into the darkness, +thinking that the sheik and his men were upon us, not a soul really came +near the place. But we heard the firing from the gorge, and it made me +feel so anxious that I very nearly came up to join you. If it hadn't +been that our safety depends to such an extent upon our camels and +food-supply, I should certainly have done so, and you would not have +blamed me, for it is clear that you had a desperate time of it. However, +all's well that ends well. And now for our next move. Will you go ahead, +or will you retire for a time, till this fight has blown over?" + +"I shall push on without a pause," answered Jim. "You see, news of this +row is certain to fly to the Mullah's ears, and if we were to retire he +would prevent any attempt in the future, by setting a watch at the +ravine, and forbidding us to pass through. Then we should have to wait +till the troops come this way, and by then anything may have happened to +father. No, I mean to go right on, and my first act will be to ride to +the camp from which these tribesmen came, and order them to give me any +news they may have. Then I shall tell them that they are to keep quiet +about their fight with us, or we will punish them on our return. Of +course it will be a piece of bounce on my part, but now is the time to +practise that sort of thing." + +"You are right not to allow this quarrel to frighten you," answered Tom +heartily, "and I think it quite likely that you may get important +information from our enemies. Then, too, now is the time to take +advantage of your victory. While the tribesmen are humbled, you will get +more from them than at any other time, for they will hope to allay your +anger by helping you. But we shall never be able to trust them, and from +this moment our precautions against surprise at night must be doubled." + +Long did Jim and his friend talk the matter over, and then Tom went to +one of the bales which was carried upon the back of a camel, and, +opening it, produced a bundle of surgical dressings and a few +instruments. With these and a tin pannikin of cool water he proceeded to +dress Jim's wound, and ended by placing the arm in a sling. + +"There," he said, when he had finished, "you bore it like a Briton, and +will soon be well. Luckily it is only a flesh-wound. Had the slug struck +the bone on its way through, it might have been a case of amputation, +and then where would have been your expedition? And now, if you feel +capable of the exertion, we shall break up the camp and get through the +pass. Best do it now, before the sheik and his following pluck up their +courage again." + +Accordingly, the zareba was soon astir, and the men bustling about their +animals. Then, with a dozen of the best shots riding well in advance, +and the remainder hovering in rear and on the flanks, the column set out +for the pass, and went trailing up the steep slope of the hill. In due +time they entered the ravine. Here they found but few traces of the +conflict, for the tribesmen had taken advantage of the permission +extended to them, and had removed their dead. + +An hour later they were in the plain, and that night they halted at some +wells distant about ten miles. Here Ali Kumar came to Jim to announce +that a messenger wished to have speech with him. + +"He comes from the tribe who suffered defeat at our hands," he said, +"and has news of importance." + +"Bring him along, then," said Jim, "and tell off a man to keep an eye +upon him. He might become unpleasant." + +A few moments later Ali ushered forward a native, whose head-gear +proclaimed him to be one of the tribe who had received such a defeat on +the previous evening. Coming up to Jim, he salaamed deeply and most +humbly, and even trembled, so great was his fear. + +"What do you want?" asked Jim sharply, Tom interpreting his words. "Have +you been told to ask for mercy from us?" + +"That is the case," answered the man. "The sheik bade me come hither and +say that he regrets deeply that his men attacked you, and that they +would never have done so had it not been for the words of one who was in +your service, and who has now fled. He asks for forgiveness, and will +promise never to molest you again." + +"That is not enough," replied Jim sternly. "Why should we not march on +his camp and loot it?" + +"We are in your hands," the man said trembling; "but if you will +overlook our fault, we shall give you news which will help you." + +"What is it, then?" + +"The man who betrayed you told us that you were in search of a white +prisoner of the Mullah's. I am charged to tell you that he is now some +thirty miles to the south of the Hoad, and that if you press through, +you may rescue him, for many of the fighting men are away." + +"Can we trust the fellow?" asked Jim doubtfully, turning to Tom. +"Perhaps it is a trap, into which they hope we shall walk blindly." + +"I hardly think so, old chap. You have given these beggars such a +licking that they are in terror of their lives, and I believe they are +telling you the truth. I should instruct him to say to the sheik that +you will harm him no further at present, but that if you find he has +been playing with you, you will punish him on your return." + +"That is good advice, Tom, and I'll leave it to you to speak to him. +Then let us talk over the preparations to be made before entering upon +this desert march." + +Accordingly, Tom repeated his words to the tribesman, warning him in +stern tones that the slightest treachery would be severely punished. + +"Now return to your sheik," he continued, "and be careful that in future +you remain peaceful, for the British troops will be this way before very +long, and will treat you far more severely than we have done, unless you +can prove that you are friendly." + +With many salaams and repeated thanks, the man withdrew; and then Tom +and Jim called Ali Kumar to join them in consultation. + +"The question of water seems to me to be the most important," said Jim, +opening the conversation. "How are we to contrive to carry sufficient to +last for one hundred and fifty miles?" + +"We'll ask Ali," replied Tom. "You see, I've never been in this part +before, and, though I have done a deal of spying in Aden, I've never +joined in one of these expeditions. This is, in fact, all strange to +me." + +"I have crossed the Hoad on several occasions, master," interposed Ali, +"and can give you my help. Once beyond the desert, I can do nothing, for +I shall then be in strange country. Indeed, no caravan has ever +penetrated so far, for the land beyond belongs to the Mullah. As to +water, you have tanks with you, which should prove sufficient. But a +guard must be set upon their contents, and the allowance for man and +beast strictly dealt out. Again, five days is said to be the shortest +time in which the march can be accomplished, but I think that we shall +do well to press on more hastily. The camels are all in the best of +condition, and can well stand the fatigue. Then again, the following and +baggage are comparatively small, so that our movements should be +correspondingly rapid. When we reach the other side, we can rest for a +time, while we send out scouts to gather news." + +"Excellent!" exclaimed Jim. "And now, when should we start?" + +"I vote that we march on at once to the very edge of the desert," said +Tom. "If we find wells there, we can fill our tanks, and get a good +start." + +"Bohotle is an advance post held by troops in the pay of the Sirkal," +remarked Ali Kumar, "and it is situated on the fringe of the sandy waste +which stretches into the interior up to the pasture country ruled over +by the Mullah. There is water in plenty there, and also at a spot +directly before us. I therefore counsel you to keep straight on. Seven +hours' marching will bring you to the place of which I speak, and then +all preparations can be made for the crossing." + +Following the advice given by the native headman, Jim at once gave +orders for the camp to be broken up, and by nightfall had the +satisfaction of finding himself amidst a clump of palms and mimosa, +which marked the position of the wells, and from which one looked out +directly upon a wide-spreading sea of sand, a dreary waste, which went +on and on to the horizon without a break, and without so much as a patch +of green to relieve it. And here, as the caravan halted, and the men +began to make a zareba, Jim had the pleasure of watching the most +gorgeous sunset he had ever seen. + +"It is a wonderful sight," said Tom, as he stood by his side. "It seems +as if these parts, where nature appears to come to a sudden end, were +given something out of the way to make up for their loss; for the sun +rises and falls over the desert with such beautiful effect, that people +who have travelled the world over declare it is the finest sight of all. +Then, too, mirages are not infrequent, though what is their cause is +more than I can say. But come along. Watching that beautiful sky does +not relieve one's hunger, and I can tell you I am sharp set." + +Returning to their camp, Jim and his friend were soon seated in front of +a fire of thorn-wood, which blazed and crackled brightly, sending out a +heat which was grateful, for the nights at this season of the year were +decidedly cold. A native follower then appeared with a pan and some fat, +and ten minutes later Jim was busily frying some juicy slices of meat +cut from a deer which Tom had shot during the day. When they were +finished to his satisfaction, Jim removed them to a plate by means of a +fork, which, with a spoon and a knife, he carried in the form of an +ordinary pocket-knife, as every sensible campaigner does. Meanwhile Tom +had had the tea in hand, and before many minutes had passed both were +seated at an excellent repast, which they enjoyed all the more for the +fact that it was partaken of while squatting upon the bare earth, and +from dishes and mugs of common enamelled tin. + +"And now for bed," said Jim, two hours later, when Tom had finished his +smoke and they had had a chat. "Let us hope for a fine day, and a good +start." + +"And luck on the other side, old chap. Good-night. It's my first watch. +Turn in now, and I'll wake you in good time." + +Soon the camp was hushed in sleep, save for the crisp, low sound of a +sandalled foot plodding up and down upon the sand. A few hours later the +sentries were relieved, and Jim took his turn, it having been arranged +that he and Tom, together with Ali Kumar, should help one another to +keep an eye upon their following during the hours of darkness. + +Early on the following day the camp was astir, and an hour later they +set out upon their long and hazardous march. Four days of hot and tiring +work took them in safety to the farther side, where, worn out with their +exertions, they formed a zareba, and called a long halt, to rest both +animals and men. And now began the most difficult and dangerous part of +Jim's undertaking. + +"Thirty miles from here the Mullah and his men are said to be encamped," +he remarked thoughtfully to Tom, as the two stood looking towards the +interior of the fertile country which they had just reached. "I keep +wondering whether we should push straight on, or remain where we are. I +mean, whether we should post our men at this spot and go forward alone." + +"But surely you will want every follower," cried Tom. "Careful as we +have been to keep our movements a secret, it is almost impossible to +expect that the Mullah will remain for long in ignorance. Then, as soon +as he hears of us, out will come his cut-throats to visit us and eat up +the whole convoy, if they are able." + +"Exactly so, Tom, and it is because his men will come, and in large +numbers, too, that I suggest that we should find a spot for our +followers, and make a raid into the country alone. If we were +discovered, we should make a bolt for it, and trust to rejoin our camp +before we were caught. On the other hand, suppose we push on in a body. +Unless we have the fortune to come upon another spot like the ravine, +certain defeat will stare us in the face, for the Mullah has thousands +of men." + +"What a long-headed beggar you are to be sure!" exclaimed Tom, smacking +him heartily upon the back. "You seem to get to the bottom of all these +difficulties at once, and what you have said is, I feel sure, as wise a +course as we could carry out. But what about a spot in which to make the +camp? It must be a strong one, or it will be useless. Again, it must be +within reasonable distance, for otherwise we should never reach it." + +"The difficulty is great, but it is not beyond our powers," said a voice +at his elbow, as Ali Kumar joined them. "I have already told you that I +have once before crossed the Hoad, but that I have never penetrated the +country beyond. I will now explain for what reason. It happened that I, +with my father and my father's tribe, had suffered much at the hands of +some neighbours of ours, who were far stronger than we were. For years +they had harried our flocks, slain our men, and carried off the women +and children. So that at last we decided to migrate and to place the +desert between ourselves and our enemies. Carefully did we make our +preparations, and then we set out upon the journey. Alas, master, it +proved disastrous, for our beasts were in poor condition, and few in +numbers. Then fortune was against us, for we stumbled into a storm of +sand, which lasted for a day, and left us well-nigh dead. But we +struggled on, hoping for the best. One by one our camels fell by the +way, and soon men, too, joined them. At last, to make our troubles more +than we could bear, the beasts, in their mad desire for water, tore open +the sacks of goat-skin in which we carried our precious supply, and let +the contents rush out upon the sand, where it disappeared at once, +licked up by the parched land. From that moment all order was lost, and +within a very few hours we had scattered, some in their madness +returning, and all wandering from their path, their tongues lolling from +their blackened lips, and their limbs staggering beneath them. + +"With three of my comrades I struggled forward till I saw a patch of +green before me. At first I thought that it was a mirage, risen to cheat +me into hope. But it was real--a glorious sight!--and, together with +those who were with me, I ran towards it. There was water there, master, +and food, and when, after resting, we searched the place, we found that +it bore no traces of a camp, and that in all probability none but wild +beasts had ever visited it. Three days later we pushed on to the fertile +land of the Mullah, but there my comrades were killed, I alone escaping. +In fear and terror I returned to the oasis, and from there Allah helped +me to trudge across the desert and reach that portion of the land which +skirts the sea. My journeying may be of use to you now, master, for the +green spot of which I speak lies some ten miles only within the Hoad, +and it is wide enough to give grazing to all your beasts. Of food you +have enough in store of the kind that is sealed in tins, and therefore +cannot fear starvation, while of water there is abundance. Moreover, it +occurs to me that a strong zareba might be made in the heart of the +trees, for there is wood to be had, and do we not carry ample wire with +hooks upon it to surround the whole place?" + +"It sounds the very thing," cried Jim excitedly, having listened with +great interest to all that Ali had to say. "If it is so close to the +edge of the Mullah's country, it should prove an excellent base from +which to set out on small spying expeditions. Then, if we do as you +suggest, we ought to make it so strong that we could safely retreat to +it when things become warm, and even defy the Mullah and his men. Yes, +it is a good thing, I am sure, and I vote that we make for it at once." + +Having discussed the matter with Tom--for, though nominally in charge of +the expedition, he never neglected to call upon his friend for help--Jim +decided to wait till the following morning, and then to raise the camp +and search for the oasis of which Ali had spoken. Accordingly, at the +first sign of dawn, all were afoot and marching to the west, in which +direction the wells were situated. At length they sighted a grove of +shady trees, and hailed it with a shout of joy. An hour later their +zareba was formed, and Jim and his friend were closely inspecting the +surroundings. + +"It will be even more suitable than I had hoped," said Jim in delight. +"Look at those trees, and see how they will help us." + +"Yes--er--well, I confess that I cannot follow you," was the puzzled +response. "We might hide in the trees--perhaps that's what you mean?" + +"Partly, Tom; but I thought that they were placed in just the position +to be of service to us. Look at the outside row. By cutting down a few +we could have a square formed by the trunks, and giving a large clearing +in the centre where the water is. Then we have only to connect the trees +by means of barbed wire, and we have a fort into which the Mullah's men +would find it a job to rush. Once our entanglement was completed, we +could rig up some kind of a blockhouse inside, so that we should have +plenty of cover, while as for the camels and horses, they of course must +take their chance, though the long range of our rifles should make it +possible to keep the enemy at a respectful distance, from which their +old muzzle-loaders could not reach us." + +"You're a wonder!" gasped Tom. "It seems to me that you are a born +soldier." + +"Not a bit of it," was the modest reply. "But, you see, my father was +always telling me about the fights in which he had taken part. They were +usually against natives, in some part of this continent, and there was +always a ruse of this sort, some dodge by which he and his men held the +larger numbers of the enemy at bay. That's how it is that I have an eye +which seems to take in the possibilities of a place, and I put it down +to my father and his yarns that I was able to make defence practicable +away back at the ravine. But, seriously, what do you think of the +dodge?" + +"It is the best thing you have yet thought out, Jim, and should prove of +enormous advantage to us; for, knowing that we have a haven to retreat +to, we shall go about our work of tracking the Mullah far more +fearlessly, though I tell you that, in any case, it is going to be a +risky game." + +Pacing backwards and forwards amongst the trees, Jim and his companion +soon marked out the site of their fort. Then they called for an axe, and +cut a wide slit at the base of each trunk which they had decided was to +be removed, giving orders that the men were to set to at the work on the +following morning. That done, they went well beyond the trees, but +finding nothing but a weary sandy waste, and no cover that could be of +the slightest use to an enemy, they returned to the zareba, and selected +a site close beside the well, and almost in the centre of the square +which they had marked off for the fort. On this a rough circle was +drawn, and calling Ali to his side, Jim gave directions that the trees, +when felled on the morrow, were to be dragged there, and arranged to as +to form a blockhouse. + +"We want a raised platform," he said, as he walked over the spot once +more, and deepened the line in the earth by means of his toe. "If we set +our fellows to throw up a mound round the edge of this circle, and then +pile the logs there, morticing them roughly together, we shall have a +fine blockhouse, from which we shall be able to command the surrounding +desert for many yards. I reckon that our rifles carry a good mile, and +very likely even more than that; so that in the daytime we can make it +impossible for the enemy to approach, unless in overwhelming numbers. If +they come in a huge army, we shall lie behind our cover and blaze at +them from a position of safety, and as we have been careful to bring a +large store of ammunition, we need have no fears that it will become +suddenly expended. I should think, too, that a watch-tower of some sort +would be useful." + +"Then why not make one of these trees serve the purpose?" asked Tom, +staring aloft at the green top of a palm which overhung the party. "It +happens to occupy the very centre of your circle, and can easily be +pegged so as to make ascent possible." + +"A grand idea!" exclaimed Jim, "and that, too, shall be carried out. But +now about the camels and ponies. We want a zareba into which we can +drive them at night, and in case of attack." + +"Then do the same for them as for ourselves," said Tom. "Look here, old +boy, you ought to take particular pains to keep them well away from the +water, or our supply may be fouled and rendered unfit for our +consumption. Why not dig out a place for them, throwing the earth +removed into a wall, which will protect them? Then, if you place the +zareba over there, a trench from the wells will carry the water to them, +so that their wants can be supplied." + +Tom pointed to a spot within thirty yards, where the ground fell +slightly, and where numerous big palms grew, offering shade for the +animals. + +"It would be an easy matter to do as suggested," interposed Ali Kumar, +interrupting his masters. "I have seen such an arrangement before, and +will see that the trench is dug, and a small wooden gate put at the +head, so that a certain quantity can be allowed to run through at any +time. Otherwise you would have the zareba filled with water, and the +animals would quickly die. As to our being able to do all this, I can +promise that the end of the week shall see the work completed, for the +men will have little to do now that we are in camp, and when the beasts +are driven out to graze, and sentries posted, the others will have their +hours free, and will devote them to getting the camp into a state of +defence." + +"And while they are at work we shall make excursions into the Mullah's +country," remarked Jim. "We'll just wait until the wire is stretched and +the blockhouse begun, for it would not do to have the enemy coming down +upon us before we were ready. Then we'll take the best camels and set +out. Who knows but that we may have the luck to rescue my father without +much trouble, and in a week we may even be marching for the coast once +more?" + +He spoke in the most hopeful manner, for the good fortune with which +they had hitherto met had raised his spirits to the highest, so much so +that complete success seemed even now in sight. But Jim had not yet +encountered the terrible Mullah, he whose name was a byword in Northern +Africa, and whose cruelties and whose cunning were talked about in every +part of the civilized world. Had he had personal experience of him, his +ideas would have undergone a change, for this leader of the Somali +fanatics was not likely to sit down tamely and submit to the theft of a +slave. Why should he indeed, when he openly boasted that he was ready to +meet all the troops which the British Government could bring against +him? It was out of the question to imagine for a moment that he who had +so recently defeated a British column would dream of allowing this small +expedition to escape his clutches, if he obtained news of its coming. +Why, the guns and ammunition Jim and his following possessed would alone +have been a prize, while the death of all who took part in this +audacious enterprise would elevate the Mullah still higher in the +estimation of the savage tribesmen who lived in these parts. Yes, had +Jim been able to see into this matter as clearly as he was able to +observe the strongest position for defence, he might have been less +sanguine, indeed he might have trembled at the thought of all the danger +before him. But he was blissfully ignorant, and went on with his plans +of rescue, without allowing his mind to dwell unduly upon the prospect +of difficulties which might yet have to be encountered. Would his +determination have been altered had he known that at that very moment +the Mullah was listening to the tale of a scout who had witnessed the +march of the column on the previous day? We doubt it, for Jim was not +the lad to give in till convinced that he was beaten. But, as it was, he +knew nothing, and went on with his preparations with a mind which was +free from uneasiness. + +"We have all had a hard day," he said, "so I propose we turn in early +to-night. Then we can be up with the lark, and set to at the work we +have before us." + +Scarcely had day dawned when all were awake, and guards having been +posted to watch the grazing beasts, the remainder took spades and axes, +which had been included in the baggage of the column, and, stripping to +the waist, began to cut down the trees which Jim and Tom had marked on +the previous day. Then, while some dragged the logs to the centre, +others unrolled the barbed wire, and began to form an entanglement. A +tiny doorway was left, so that the garrison could enter at will, but it +was protected inside by a semicircle of the wire, so that should one of +the enemy happen to rush in, he would still have an impenetrable barrier +before him. + +When the entanglement was completed to his satisfaction, Jim set the men +to work to throw up the platform for the blockhouse, and, before +darkness fell, saw it completed. + +"And now for a zareba for the animals," he cried gaily, on the following +morning. "Not till that is done can I leave the camp." + +With Tom beside him to aid him with his advice, he directed the men how +to proceed with the work, and, by way of encouraging them, seized a +spade himself, and began to delve with all his might. For hours together +all laboured, but, thanks to the fact that the soil was light and easily +turned, the task proved easier than it might have been. Indeed, by +nightfall the animals were safely enclosed, and an entanglement of wire +surrounded them, so that even if the enemy managed to rush up to them, +they could not cause them to stampede. A trench had been cut from the +wells to this zareba, within which a long trough had been constructed of +mud, so arranged that it could be filled to the brim at the will of +those who lived in the blockhouse, while the contents would drain slowly +away and soak into the soil outside. Standing in the centre of the +miniature fort which he had caused to be erected, Jim looked about him +on that evening with feelings of pride and satisfaction. + +"I never could have thought it possible," he murmured to himself. "When +we started from the farther side of the Hoad, it often troubled me to +think what we should do to protect ourselves once we reached the +Mullah's country, but I never dreamt that we should have the luck to +fall in with this oasis. Why, we could live here for a month, or longer, +and stand a siege without much fear; for, with these logs to protect us, +we ought to be able to keep the plain outside clear of the enemy during +the daytime, while our animals could graze in the large square of barbed +wire which we have made. Then, as soon as they had eaten the grass +there, we could send our fellows out to cut more during the night. Yes, +we are in clover here, and can now take measures to rescue father. Tom, +I want to ask you a question," he continued to his friend. + +"Well, what is it, old boy?" + +"How about leaving the camp? Will it be sufficient if Ali remains in +charge?" + +"I think not," Tom answered with decision. "Now that we are so close to +the Mullah, we must take it for granted that an attack, sooner or later, +is inevitable. That being the case, it would be fatal to leave our +natives to themselves, for, if deprived of a leader, they would be like +sheep, and would quickly be overcome. I know what you are worrying +about. You want to know who is to stay behind?" + +"That is it," responded Jim. "You see, I have had the best of it up to +this, and it seems unfair to ask you to sit down here while I have all +the excitement and adventure." + +"Not a bit of it!" exclaimed Tom eagerly. "You must remember that this +is your expedition, and that the rescue of your father is of the utmost +importance. If we are successful in that, we shall have obtained plenty +of information concerning the Mullah, so that we shall both be +satisfied. There! Don't consider me any more, but just act as you think +best." + +"I'm glad to know that you think in that way, Tom," answered Jim. "And +now, as you are agreeable to the arrangement, I will ask you to take +charge of the camp while I go off on a scouting expedition. I propose to +take Ali Kumar alone, and to strike at once for the enemy's country." + + + + +CHAPTER XII + +IN TOUCH WITH THE MULLAH + + +Scarcely had the sun risen above the sandy horizon when Jim and Ali +Kumar rode from the oasis mounted upon two of the fleetest camels which +the expedition possessed. They carried upon their saddles sufficient +food and water to last them for a week, while each had a rifle and +abundance of ammunition. Turning their faces toward the south, they +urged their beasts into a long swinging trot, and sailed away over the +desert with the cheers of their comrades ringing in their ears. + +"Before we return I hope to have obtained full news of my father," said +Jim, as they swept along. "If I find that he is only slightly guarded, I +shall take advantage of some dark night and try to reach him, and if we +get him to the camp, the Mullah may do as he likes, but I defy him to +capture us, for our position there is remarkably strong." + +"During the daytime the attempt will be hopeless," answered Ali Kumar +thoughtfully. "But, master, I tremble to think of the consequences +during the night, for we are few, and they would be many. Creeping up to +us, they would rush upon us before we were prepared, and then nothing +could save the expedition." + +"We shall see about that," exclaimed Jim doggedly. "It seems to me that +if we were to light big fires round our square, we ought to be able to +keep the enemy out. But I agree with you, it would be a hard matter, and +could not be accomplished without fighting. And now for ourselves. Are +we likely to strike the Mullah's camp if we push on in this direction?" + +"I cannot say for certain," responded Ali. "But you will remember that +the tribesmen informed us that the white prisoner was some thirty miles +south of the Hoad. If that is the case, we should be nearer the Mullah +by nightfall. By that time it will be advisable to find some spot in +which we can safely hide. Then, on the following day, we can sally out, +and, pretending to be peaceful peasants, try to ascertain news of your +father." + +"It sounds a good plan, Ali, but you must recollect that I am ignorant +of the language. That being the case, it may be necessary for me to +remain hidden while you go out, though when the time for rescue comes, I +insist upon taking a full share in the matter." + +An hour after they had set out from the oasis the two riders entered +upon a stretch of country which differed vastly from that which they had +just left, for it was thickly clad with a carpet of fresh green, and was +dotted everywhere with bushes and trees, and in parts with huge masses +of foliage which showed the position of a forest. But nowhere was there +a habitation visible, and not a native was to be seen. Half a mile +farther on, however, was a large pool of water, from which the rays of +the sun were reflected with dazzling brilliancy; and to this they at +once rode, following one of the many paths that had been worn through +the bush in all directions by wild animals. + +"Half an hour's halt here, and then on we go," said Jim. "How thankful I +am that this is the cool season, and that the heat of the sun is not too +great to prevent our marching during the day." + +"It is fortunate, master," answered Ali, "for less than three months +hence the journey which we have already accomplished would have had to +satisfy us until nightfall. Then only could we have ventured to start +forward again, for at the time of noon the glare and strength of the sun +are so great that even a native prefers the shade, and loves to lie +there and sleep. But now we need have no fears of sunstroke, and can +ride on. Our beasts are in the finest condition, and we can rely upon +them to carry us the remaining thirty miles with the utmost ease. +To-morrow, if necessary, they will bear us back again with the same +certainty, for these are picked animals, and are worth some thirty of +the common kind. But I shall prepare food, so that we may eat now and +then pass on without halting." + +Taking the rough bits from the mouths of the camels, Ali led them to the +water and allowed them to drink. Then he picketed them in the centre of +a patch of luxuriant grass, and left them there to graze to their +hearts' content, while he returned to help Jim with the meal. Already +the latter had a cheery fire burning, and was toasting two large juicy +steaks of deer-flesh over it. When they were ready, and the water +boiling, both sat down beside the embers, there being no ceremony +between master and man. Indeed, looking at them there, a stranger would +have been troubled to tell the difference between these two Somali +natives, for both had dusky features and dark hair, while their gestures +were apparently the same. A closer inspection, however, would have shown +him that the younger of the two could find no comfort in the squatting +attitude of which the natives are fond, and preferred to lie upon the +ground reclining upon his elbow. Then, again, he ate more daintily, and +drank from his tin mug as if he had been accustomed to better things. +But what was remarkable about the two was the fact that each possessed a +rifle of modern workmanship, while Jim had a pair of revolvers, the butt +of one of which peeped from beneath his clothing. + +Their meal finished, Ali took from a pouch which dangled about his neck +a pinch of tobacco, and securing it in the hollow of his hand, proceeded +to roll a cigarette. Surely this was a strange thing for a native in +this wild part of the country to do! True, many followers of the Mullah +indulged in the smoking habit, but none knew of the cigarette. Ali, +however, had learnt the art at Berbera, and, indeed, behaved more like a +civilized individual than any native that Jim had as yet seen. + +"I am a Christian and can sit at meat with my master, when he wills," he +had said some days before. "Therefore, should it fall out that you and I +ride away together, there will be no trouble on that score, though with +any other of your followers difficulties would arise, for they could not +eat with you, while to drink from the same vessel would be an insult to +their religion." + +Having finished his cigarette, Ali sprang to his feet, and soon they +were on their way again. Riding across an undulating country, they at +length reached a part which was studded with hills, and upon ascending +to the summit of one of these, both came suddenly to a halt, and uttered +a cry of satisfaction. + +"Back, master!" cried Ali in alarm, a second later. "Dismount from your +camel, and cause him to kneel, then creep forward with me, and lie full +length among the bushes, for, were we to ascend to the sky-line, our +figures would be seen at once. There, look!" he continued a moment +later, as they threw themselves upon the grass and stared into the +valley beyond. "You can see the mud huts which the Mullah's followers +occupy, and there are his herds." + +Stretching his arm before him, Ali pointed down the farther slope of the +hill into a long winding depression, down the centre of which ran a +broad stream of water. Following his finger, Jim saw some hundreds of +low mud hovels, nestling close to the bank of the river, and so clear +was the atmosphere that he was able to distinguish numerous figures +moving about, while herds of camels, sheep, and horses were visible +everywhere. + +"What is that?" he suddenly asked, pointing in his turn to a dark mass +in the centre of the valley. "It looks to me as though there were +horsemen there, but I shall soon tell you, for I have brought my glasses +with me." + +Hastily withdrawing his field-glasses from the case, he raised them to +his eyes and looked long and carefully towards the object which he had +discovered. + +"It is the Mullah's army," he said in an excited whisper, as if he +feared that the ordinary tones of his voice would be overheard at that +distance, and so alarm the enemy. "I can see a host of horsemen, and +more than three times as many men on foot. And--yes, there is someone +riding in front of them, who must be the Mullah." + +The sight at which he gazed filled Jim with a feeling of excitement, for +now, at last, he was within touch of his goal. There, below him, was the +man to whom his father was a slave, and there, careering up the valley, +were a portion of the following who might even then be on their way to +attack the foolhardy Englishman who had come in quest of the prisoner. +Could Jim have read the thoughts of that tall man who so proudly rode +his charger in front of the gathering of warriors below, he would have +learned something that intimately concerned himself. As he sat his +horse there before his following, his face was turned in the direction +from which Jim and Ali had come, and his mind was engaged with the news +which had come to his ears two or three days before. + +"An insolent Englishman has dared to cross the Hoad," he was murmuring +to himself. "His purpose, as told me by the spy, is to rescue one of my +beggarly prisoners. Let him beware. Before many hours have passed I will +slay his whole following, and he, too, shall find himself a slave." + +Turning his horse with a touch of his heel, the Mullah held his hand +above his head and arrested the progress of his following. Then spurring +close up to them, he gave them their orders, and stood by as they +marched away. + +"I wonder where they are bound for?" said Jim, as he watched the +movement through his glasses. "Their heads were turned towards the +north, and it looks as though they were bent upon a journey which would +take some time, for camels laden with baggage are accompanying them, +while some followers are driving a small herd of sheep and cattle. I +hope it does not mean that they have discovered our camp, and are +marching to attack it." + +"I cannot say, master," answered Ali thoughtfully. "But their movement +looks suspicious. However, should they have gained news of our coming, +it will be only as I have expected all along, for how could we hope to +enter the country of this man without being discovered, when spies +abound, and when news may even have been sent from Berbera? Besides, +what of the traitor who induced the tribesmen to attack us? He had fled, +so said their messenger, but where or how he did not mention. Perhaps he +took advantage of the confusion to steal a camel, and with that to help +him, crossed the Hoad, knowing that he would be welcome to the Mullah. +If that is the case, we have trouble before us, and perhaps it would be +better for us to retire at once, so as to rejoin our companions." + +"I think not," answered Jim promptly. "If those fellows down there are +bound for our camp, we can do no possible good by returning to our +friends, for we should only make a small addition to their numbers. No, +when we set out for this part, we did so with the full knowledge that +the camp in the oasis might have to defend itself at any moment. We +placed my comrade in charge, trusting to him to keep the enemy out, and +we must not allow this to break our faith in him and our followers. Let +us leave them to do their work while we complete ours. When you come to +think of it, the movement of those men below is probably the best thing +that could have happened, that is, supposing they are not successful in +their attack, as I firmly believe will be the case; for, knowing that +his followers have gone to intercept us, the Mullah will never suspect +that two of our expedition have detached themselves from the main body, +and are already in touch with his camp. He and those of his men who +remain with him will have no fear of a surprise of any sort, and will +therefore neglect all precautions. What could be more advantageous to +our cause?" + +"It is a fine argument," replied Ali Kumar, after a long pause, "and I +believe you have seen this matter in the right light. As you say, to +lose faith now in our friends would be foolish. If they are attacked, as +I think is more than probable, they must trust to themselves, and live +or fall according to their ability. Meanwhile we have a chance which may +never occur again. Therefore, master, while you keep your glasses fixed +upon the Mullah's following, I shall leave you for a time and search +for a hiding-place. When I have found it I shall return, and then we +shall make our way down to the camels." + +Accordingly Ali turned and descended the hill, leaving Jim stretched out +upon the summit, with his eyes fixed upon the distant warriors. In half +an hour the Mullah's expedition had disappeared behind an elevation, and +Jim at once turned his glasses upon the solitary horseman who had +watched them depart. He saw him put his horse into a furious gallop, and +head him towards the collection of mud hovels. Then he watched as the +rider pulled in his animal, and threw himself from the saddle. At this +moment a native ran out and took the reins from him, while the Mullah +strode into the midst of the camp. Though he was often hidden for a +considerable time by some clump of huts, Jim was able to follow him as +he advanced by watching for him as he crossed the open spaces. At last +he reached a house of considerable proportions, above the flat roof of +which a tattered banner blew out in the tropical breeze, showing a +groundwork of brilliant red, with figures worked upon it in darker +colours. A spear seemed to form the supporting post. + +"He's gone in," said Jim, watching the figure of the Mullah with the +utmost eagerness. "I must make a careful note of the position of his +house, for I might have to find my way there some day. Indeed, if father +is there--and I see no other way of rescuing him--I shall choose a dark +night, and creep into the mud hut into which the Mullah has disappeared. +Then I'll put a pistol to his head, and give him the choice of death or +the loss of his slave. But I should have to be very careful of +treachery, and in any case it would be a desperate game to play. +However, we shall see. Having come so far, I do not mean to turn back +before I have made every effort, and if I fail after all, why, I'll +return to Berbera, join the British troops, and march in this direction +again in their company." + +For long Jim lay full-length among the grass with which this hill was +thickly clad, and gazed down into the valley which formed the home and +hiding-place of the Mullah and his adherents. Every now and again he +would catch sight of some figure moving along the bank of the river, or +passing down the only street of which the village boasted. Instantly, up +would go his glasses to his eyes, and he would focus them upon the +object, hoping that this might prove to be the white prisoner, his +father. But in every case the figure proved to be some dusky warrior, +trudging along with his spear over one shoulder, and his hide-shield +dangling on his other arm, or one of the many wives with which these +Somali fighting men were blessed, walking down to the water to replenish +her household stock. Full as Jim's thoughts were of other things, he +could not help remarking the graceful carriage of these people. With +erect figures, and arms swinging easily at their sides, these women bore +upon their heads a tall earthen jar, which they balanced there with as +much ease as the average individual contrives to retain his hat. + +Later, a movement about the central dwelling from which the flag flew +attracted his attention, and looking closely in that direction, he saw +four armed men suddenly emerge from the shadow of the walls into the +road in front, where they formed up in line. Four others at once placed +themselves in front of their comrades, and having saluted one another in +ceremonious fashion, as people of the East are accustomed to do, they +separated, the first party disappearing down the street, while the +second filed into their positions about the Mullah's residence. But of +the latter there was never a sign; he remained in the seclusion of his +mud hut, his thoughts, no doubt, fixed upon that tiny camp belonging to +the insolent Englishman, which he hoped to hear, in the course of a few +hours, had fallen a prey to his followers. + +"I must be careful to remember about those guards," murmured Jim +thoughtfully, "for should it become necessary for me to visit the house, +they might interrupt our interview and spoil my chances. But we shall +see; perhaps Ali will have good news for me." + +For three hours he lay on the summit of the hill, keeping a careful +watch on the Mullah's camp, and wondering all the while what had +happened to his native headman, and why his return was so long delayed. + +"I hope nothing has happened to him," he said at last, in anxious tones. +"It would be a serious matter if he were captured, for it would let the +Mullah know that there were spies close at hand. But I can't think what +has happened to him, for amongst the following below there must be a +huge number of strange men collected together, and Ali's clever enough +to pass himself as one of these. Besides----Hallo! Who's that?" + +Happening to turn his head to look at the two camels which were grazing +some two hundred yards in the rear, Jim suddenly caught sight of a +figure running towards him, and waving an arm to attract his attention. +Grasping his rifle, and shooting a cartridge into the breech, he at once +retired from the summit of the hill, taking care to creep on all-fours +through the grass until well away from the sky-line. Then he started to +his feet, and running forward until close to a large mass of rock, he +knelt behind it, and, raising his weapon to his shoulder, covered the +man who was approaching. + +"Very likely it is Ali," he said to himself; "but should it happen to be +anyone else, I shall be quite ready for him." + +A minute later any doubts which he might have had were dispelled, for, +topping a rise which intervened between himself and Jim, the stranger +showed clearly against the distant horizon. + +"Ali!" cried Jim, in tones of relief; and at once rising from his seat, +he hastened towards him with his rifle over his shoulder, and his mind +filled with alarm at the evident excitement under which his follower +laboured. + +"What is it? What has happened, Ali?" he demanded. "Have you been +discovered? And if so, are you being followed? In that case we had +better get the camels ready at once, so that we may ride for our lives, +for to attempt to remain here would be madness." + +"No, do not touch our animals, but sit down and listen," answered Ali +breathlessly, throwing himself upon the ground, as if he were exhausted, +and lying there panting so hard that he seemed unable to speak. At +length, however, he took a sip of water from the gourd which dangled at +his waist, and seeming to revive at once, sat up and gazed at his +master. + +"All is well," he said, "and I have not been discovered. But I have seen +things which have caused me to tremble with alarm, and which sent me +back to you at my fastest pace to warn you." + +"What is it, then," asked Jim anxiously, unable to guess what could have +happened to his follower. "Come, tell me at once, Ali." + +Leaning forward, he placed his hand upon the native's shoulder and shook +him gently so as to hasten him, for the sight of Ali's excitement had +filled him with a vague feeling of alarm. + +"Listen, then, master, and I shall tell you what happened to me after I +left you upon the summit of the hill. But first let us climb to our +position again, and take our posts there, for I warn you that if we are +to escape from this place alive, we must be ever watchful, and keep our +eyes constantly fixed upon the valley below." + +This wise precaution was immediately carried out. Then Ali turned +towards Jim and continued his story. + +"When I left you," he said, "I placed my rifle beside a boulder, for I +knew that it would at once arouse the cupidity and suspicion of any whom +I might meet. Then I descended the hill, and taking advantage of a long +stretch of thick undergrowth which ran towards the village, I reached +its outskirts without having seen a single stranger. Then I watched for +an hour as the people walked to and fro, and happening to see two women +who were busily engaged in crushing corn for their bread, I crept into +the house behind them, and sat in the doorway listening to their +conversation. From what they said I gathered that the Mullah can collect +as many as sixty thousand men to march behind his banner, but that the +greater portion are at present living peaceful lives in their own +particular portion of the country. However, as soon as the British +troops advance, the call to arms will be sounded, and all will hasten to +join the Mullah. A little while later, one of the women began to speak +of the expedition which started out this morning, and from her I learned +that it has undoubtedly gone in search of our camp. But guns are scarce, +and it seems that the band only has about fifty with it. That the Mullah +had warning of our approach was evident, for one of the women stated +that her husband was the scout who had observed our arrival on this +side of the Hoad. + +"Though I listened to their chatter for long, I learned nothing more of +importance, for they conversed about their children and their homes. And +so, carefully looking down the street, and observing that large numbers +were about, I slipped in amongst them, feeling confident that my +presence would not be noticed. Soon I was in their market, and following +the lead of others of the men who were about, I purchased some fruit, +haggling over the price, as is customary. Then, as I wandered from the +stalls into the street again, I saw the white prisoner coming towards +me." + +"The white prisoner! My father!" almost shouted Jim, his pulses +throbbing with the news. "Are you sure that it was he? What did he look +like? Was he ill, and overcome by his miserable condition?" + +He clutched Ali eagerly by the arm and poured the questions upon him so +rapidly that the latter could not answer, but lay there gazing at him +stolidly, as if astounded at his excitement. + +"Gently! Speak quietly, master," he replied. "The questions which you +ask are unnecessary, for there is but one prisoner, one white slave +owned by the Mullah; assuredly, this one whom I saw is your father, and +that he is ill and downcast is only to be expected. Indeed, so heavy are +his cares, and so great the labour demanded of him, that already he has +aged. Though but a few weeks have passed since he was cast upon this +coast, and fell into the hands of these, our enemies, yet the time has +been sufficient to make great changes in him. He is a tall man, but no +longer does he bear himself proudly, for this drudgery and the +hopelessness of life have overcome his spirit. He lacks energy, and +walks along with eyes cast down and with never a thought of his +surroundings. Indeed, it is clear that his mind is forever bent upon +escape, and that when he chances to look to right or left he does so +with the hope that something shall be there to help him--some friend +who, pitying his condition, has come prepared to stretch out a hand, and +aid him to reach his countrymen once more. As he passed me by, and +looked at me vacantly, ignorant of the fact that I was in reality a +comrade of his son who had marched all this way and had encountered so +many dangers in the hope of rescuing him, it went to my heart to notice +the deep lines that care had set upon his face, and the whiteness of his +hair. Yes, master, no longer is it grey at the temples alone." + +"Poor father!" murmured Jim sorrowfully, his pity raised to the highest +at Ali's words. "Poor dad! What a change in his condition!" + +For more than a minute there was silence. + +"Go on!" at last said Jim, in more resolute tones. "It was a blow to +hear that there is such a change in my father, and that he was so +downcast. But after considering the matter, I am bound to confess that +it is only to be expected. I must congratulate myself upon the fact that +you have seen him alive, for we might have arrived at the Mullah's camp +to find him dead, worn out by his sufferings. What if his hair is grey? +Other men have lost their colour in a night under some great strain, but +they have recovered it to some extent later on. Father will do the same. +Once free, he will become the same jolly fellow I have always known +him." + +Tears stood in Jim's eyes as he spoke, for he was deeply moved at the +thought of his father's condition, but with an effort he steadied +himself, and signalled to Ali to proceed by raising his hand, for he +could not trust himself to speak. + +"Be happy, master. It matters nothing, whatever the colour of the hair, +so long as life is there," answered Ali, in reassuring tones. "But let +me proceed. Had I dared to do so, I would have signed to the prisoner +and endeavoured to meet him in some out-of-the-way spot, but I saw that +such an act would have been madness, for as he approached, I noticed +first one, and then a second, armed warrior lounging amidst the throng, +but keeping a careful eye all the while upon their charge. Even when my +eyes and the prisoner's met, I could do nothing but turn hastily away +and gaze at the passers-by on the opposite side. Then, little by little, +I moved in the direction taken by your father, hoping to discover the +house in which he dwelt, and have speech with him. But the attempt was +doomed to disappointment in the last respect, for his guards kept ever +at his side. However, I had the good fortune to find where he slept. It +is that tumble-down dwelling which stands behind the central one from +which the flag hangs, and some few paces away from it. See! There it is! +And before the door is an armed Somali warrior keeping watch upon the +prisoner." + +Rising to his knees, Ali leant one hand upon the ground and with the +other directed Jim's eyes to the house of which he had spoken. + +"Behind the big one, and with a man in front of the door," remarked the +latter, with his eyes glued to the glasses. "Yes, I can see it, Ali, and +feel sure that I can make my way to it in the dark. But go on with your +story." + +"Half an hour passed without my seeing the prisoner again," said Ali, +sinking into the grass once more, "so I crept away, and rejoined the +people. Then, just as I was about to make my way back to you, I +suddenly caught sight of a face which set me trembling. My knees knocked +together in my terror, and had I not clung to the post of a doorway +which stood near at hand, I should have fallen, for never before has +death been so near to me." + +He turned to Jim with flashing eyes, and with cheeks which looked pale +in spite of his dusky complexion. Indeed, glancing at his features, it +was easy to see that his fear was great, and that the face which he had +caught sight of had caused him no little uneasiness. + +"I should have fallen," he repeated, "but the doorpost held me up while +this man passed. Then I turned upon my heel, and slipping from the +village, fled hither for my life." + +"Who can it have been? Speak, man!" demanded Jim impatiently, bewildered +at his follower's words. "A strange face? Why! It cannot have been----" + +"Yes, master, it was the traitor who led the tribesmen against us," +gasped Ali. "Of a sudden I saw him coming towards me, and I trembled +lest he should recognize me; for, had he done so, that instant would +have been the signal for my death, and with my life would have gone all +your hopes, too. Our danger is now greater than ever before, and it +seems to me that we should be foolish to remain any longer." + +"And why?" demanded Jim curtly, a look of determination coming over his +face. "You are unmanned by this incident and your imagination. What if +the traitor is in the Mullah's village? Is it likely that he suspects +that we are close at hand? No! I tell you he is chuckling at the thought +that we are with our friends, and that the followers of the Mullah are +about to attack us. Pull yourself together, Ali, and be a man! Or, if +you cannot, leave me to carry out the rescue alone, for I declare that I +will not retire. To-night I shall go down to that hut and endeavour to +rescue the prisoner. If it is impossible, I shall wait for another +opportunity; but turn my face the other way and leave father to his fate +I will not, not even if our presence here is discovered." + +He spoke the words almost fiercely, and turned upon his follower with +flushed features and angry eye. + +"Well, what is it to be?" he demanded curtly. "There are the camels +below. Take one, and fly at once, if you will, for I had rather that you +did not stay if you are not ready to stand by me." + +"Master, I was a coward for the moment," answered Ali humbly. "The sight +of that traitor and my narrow escape filled me with fear, and I returned +to you feeling as though the Somali warriors were following closely upon +me, shouting for my life. But you are brave, and help me to act rightly +in this matter. Forgive me. I will stand by you, whatever the danger, +and if you persist in going into the Mullah's village to-night in the +hope of releasing the captive, I will follow you at a distance and await +you with the camels. If, by chance, you are unsuccessful, and fall into +the hands of these people, I swear that I will not leave this part till +I have done my utmost to help you. Go, then, and may God aid you in your +undertaking!" + +There was no doubt of his earnestness, for, rising to his knees once +more, he extended his hand and grasped Jim's firmly, looking steadily +into his eyes. + +"You are a man again, and will be true to your word," said Jim simply. +"Now bring up the food and water, for at sundown I shall leave for the +Mullah's camp." + + + + +CHAPTER XIII + +THE WHITE PRISONER + + +Wearily did the hours pass as Jim and his companion lay upon the summit +of the hill, gazing down into the valley below. Indeed, it seemed as +though the sun would never sink, and as though its course from east to +west was slower upon this eventful day than upon any other. At length, +however, when they were almost worn out with impatience and anxiety, the +huge golden orb sank out of their sight below a distant line of blue +hills, setting the sky aglow with every shade of the spectrum, blended +together to form one magnificent whole. Soon, too, sunset hues faded +into mist, and with a suddenness which is peculiar to these latitudes, a +pall of darkness covered the earth. Then out came the stars, twinkling +above like so many diamonds, while down below a point of fire here and +there showed where the camp was situated. + +For an hour Jim lay there busy with his thoughts, and listening to the +sounds which were distinctly borne upon his ear, in spite of the +distance which intervened between himself and the village. + +"It will take me the better part of an hour to get from here to the +neighbourhood of the hut in which father sleeps," he said, "so I shall +start now. I have thought the whole matter carefully over, and it seems +to me that I cannot do better than leave my rifle and cartridges behind +as Ali did. But I shall take a dagger with me--my hunting-knife will +answer the purpose admirably. Then if I knock up against anyone and he +proves disagreeable, I shall have a weapon at hand with which to +overcome him silently. If more than one should attack me, I shall have +to fall upon my revolvers, which I shall, of course, carry with me. Ali! +I want you." + +He called softly to his companion, who crept to his side immediately. + +"What can I do, master?" he asked. + +"I am going to start now," said Jim quietly, "and want you to accompany +me half-way. I shall then leave you with the camels and go on alone. But +it is important that we should arrange a meeting-place to which I shall +be able to find my way without fail. You have already made a trip to the +Mullah's stronghold, and may have fixed upon a likely spot." + +"That is the case," answered the native follower. "I shall come with you +now, and when within half a mile of the huts, I shall halt in a tiny +ravine. You will have no difficulty in finding your way to it on your +return, for a path leads to the entrance, where there is a well, and +then branches off to the right. Though the place is close to the enemy's +sleeping quarters, it is secluded, and will form good cover for myself +and the camels. There I shall await your coming, and that you may be +accompanied by your father is the sincere wish of your servant." + +"I trust that it will turn out like that, Ali; and if hard work and a +little boldness on my part will help towards it, why, success ought to +follow. But we shall see. Now let us be going." + +A few minutes later both were silently descending the hill, taking the +greatest pains to refrain from stumbling over boulders, or setting +smaller stones rolling down to the plain below; for there was never any +knowing when and where an enemy might be lurking, though the fact that +it was a cold night made it probable that all the Somali warriors would +be comfortably ensconced in their mud huts, enjoying the warmth to be +obtained there. Indeed, there seemed to be none but themselves abroad +that night, for they caught sight of none, and, but for the yapping of a +native cur, heard not a single sound. But that someone was awake and +alert in the Mullah's stronghold was certain, for the reflection of a +big wood-fire which burnt in front of the central building could be seen +in the sky, while the peculiar smell came pungently to their nostrils. + +"Here is the ravine," said Ali at last, when they had descended to the +plain, and had traversed a mile of the level country. "Look at the spot +closely, master. There is the well. You cannot mistake it, for the light +of the stars is reflected from the water, while here is the entrance to +the ravine of which I spoke. I shall await your coming some yards +further in, and should it fall out that you do not return, I shall make +my way back to the hill-top an hour before the day dawns. To-morrow +night I shall be here again, and if it should happen that you, too, are +made a captive, then I will find my way into the village, and seek to +help you. Ali Kumar has sworn to stand by his brave master, and he shall +do so, even though he comes by his death in keeping to his word. And now +good-bye. I wish you all success." + +"Good-bye," repeated Jim heartily, gripping his dusky comrade by the +hand. + +"I have little fear of failure, though I shall not allow that to prevent +my taking every precaution. If I should have bad luck, I know that I can +trust you to keep your promise, and I shall expect to hear from you. But +let us hope that it will not come to that. Stay quietly where you are, +and when you hear a low cough, step forward and declare yourself, for +we shall have arrived. Good-bye." + +Releasing the native's hand, Jim at once strode off into the darkness, +and in another moment was lost to view. But as he stood there at the +mouth of the ravine, listening with all his ears, the faithful Ali could +hear the sound of his muffled footsteps shuffling along over the loose +soil of which the path was composed. + +"Farewell," whispered Ali, as the sound died away. "May fortune smile +upon you, for you are a brave and loyal son, and are deserving of much +reward." + +Turning his face towards the glare of the distant camp-fire, Jim struck +off into the darkness, and was soon close to the huts which stood on the +fringe of the village. By now the moon had risen higher, and enabled him +to see his way more clearly, though, being only a small crescent, it did +not give sufficient light to show his figure at more than a few paces. +Taking advantage of this fact, he pressed on without hesitation, and, +before he had expected it, was close to the dwelling which stood in the +centre. Yes, there it was without doubt, for he could see the folds of +the red flag floating lazily in the still night breeze, beating ever and +anon against the spear-shaft which supported it, and giving rise to a +flapping sound, which, until the cause of it was clear, was decidedly +disconcerting. + +"At last!" murmured Jim. "Over there is the hut which shelters the +Mullah, while in the other sleeps his slave, my dear father. Whatever +happens, I must and will reach him and rescue him. But how?" + +The question was one which could not be answered easily, and which set +him puzzling his brains. Half an hour before it had seemed to him more +or less a simple matter to creep close to the mud dwelling beneath +which his father slept and to gain access to him by means of a doorway, +or perhaps by cutting a hole through the wall. Now, however, when the +reality was before him, and he was actually brought face to face with +the difficulty, he could not but admit that the danger and magnitude of +the task were far greater than he had ever imagined. But he was not the +lad to give way, or to be easily discouraged, particularly where his +father's life was concerned. + +"It looks rather difficult, I must admit," said Jim to himself, going on +all-fours at the same moment, and then lying flat upon his face. "It +seems to me that I cannot do better than wait here, hidden in this long +grass, until I am certain of the whereabouts of the sentries. During the +daytime I know that four keep watch over the Mullah, while one sits +before the door of the prisoner. But do they still act as sentries when +night has fallen? I should think that their number is reduced, +particularly now, when all seems at peace, and the British have not yet +entered the country. Still, it will be well to make certain of the fact, +for it would be fatal to walk into the arms of one of these Somali +warriors just as I was about to communicate with the prisoner." + +Many minutes passed as he reclined full-length in the grass, and it was +only when his stock of patience was well-nigh exhausted that he observed +a movement close to the door of the hut in which the prisoner lived. + +"A sentry," he said to himself, as a figure suddenly rose from the +ground and stood erect, with arms wide outstretched. "And evidently +sleepy, too," he added, as the native again raised his limbs and yawned +deeply, showing a profile which was clear and distinct against the +watch-fire which burnt some paces beyond. "I must keep my eyes upon him, +and see where he rests, for that is what the fellow will do, I should +fancy. He knows, or rather thinks, that there is nothing to fear, and +being tired, he will indulge in a snooze. Well, if he does so, all the +better for my hopes." + +A few moments later the native slouched across to the opposite dwelling, +the one in which the Mullah lived, and after looking about him and +conversing for a short while with a second sentry who marched at the +front, sat down deliberately against the wall, and folding his arms, +gave himself up unrestrainedly to sleep. + +"They have most likely arranged to keep watch for one another," thought +Jim. "This fellow will have a couple or more hours' rest, and then will +have to relieve his comrade. If that is the arrangement, it will suit me +very well, for the man who is on duty now will devote himself to the +Mullah, and will pay only casual attention to the prisoner's hut. I +shall wait till he has strolled round this way, and then I shall make a +dash for the door, and trust to getting in before he takes it into his +head to have a second look. Ah, here he comes!" + +The guard came sauntering round the larger of the two huts, and allowed +Jim to obtain a good view of his features, for he, too, as if he had +caught the infection from his comrade, stopped in the glare of the +firelight and yawned loudly, throwing his head back and stretching in a +manner which showed how drowsy he was. Then he went to the mud hut, and +fumbled at the door. To Jim's delight, it opened, showing that it was +not secured in any way. But the sentry had another object in view than +to test the fastenings, for, drawing it back as far as it would go, he +stepped on one side so as not to obstruct the rays of the moon, and then +peered in. Evidently he caught sight of the prisoner, for he gave vent +to a guttural murmur of approval, and then closed the door to with a +jar. Then he slouched away, carrying his spear over his shoulder, with +his shield dangling to it by a length of twisted leather. + +"Now is my chance," murmured Jim. "I'll give him a moment to get round +the corner, and then I'll make a dart for the hut. Here goes!" + +Turning his eyes for one second to the figure of the sleeping man, he +sprang to his feet, and crept softly across the ground. An open space +was before him, but he did not hesitate, and, pressing on, was before +the door of the prison in half a dozen strides. A moment sufficed to +unlatch it, and swinging it back, he crawled in on all-fours, closing it +after him with the greatest caution. + +"And now for the prisoner," he said. "I must be careful how I awake him, +for in his astonishment he might unwittingly give the alarm and ruin all +my plans. But first, where is he?" + +Kneeling upon the floor of hard-beaten clay, he stared into the darkness +in which the interior of the dwelling was buried, endeavouring to make +out the figure of the prisoner. And all the while, though he fought to +steady himself, and struggled to keep his limbs from trembling, his +heart would beat against his ribs with such force, and with such a +resounding noise, that it threatened to betray him. And who could blame +him for being so excited, for being so unnerved that he was almost +incapable of any movement, and knelt there as if carved in stone? Who, +indeed, with such interests at stake? Had he not toiled over miles and +miles of sandy desert and sun-baked ground to reach this spot? Was not +this almost the summit of his hopes and his ambitions? Here he was, +after long marching and infinite toil, in reach of his prize at last, +within sight of the end of his arduous task, and, wonder of wonders, the +thought of it all had so excited him, so unmanned him, indeed, that for +more than a minute he was helpless, a mere child in the heart of the +enemy's camp. But the change did not last for long; for of a sudden his +eyes fell upon a huddled figure lying in the corner, and with a thrill +he realized that it was the white prisoner. + +"Father! father!" he murmured, with lips which would tremble in spite of +himself. "I am here--Jim! Your son--come to rescue you! Wake up, and +talk to me." + +But there was no answer to his words save a deep snore, and the sound of +heavy breathing, which showed that the white prisoner was still fast +asleep. A moment later, however, Jim had crawled to his side, and taking +the very necessary precaution to place a finger upon the sleeper's lips, +shook him gently with his other hand. + +"Wake up, father," he whispered, placing his lips close to his ear. "It +is Jim. Don't you know me?" + +"Who's that? What's the matter?" asked the prisoner, suddenly sitting up +and speaking as if bewildered. "I swear that I heard someone talking in +English. But no, it cannot be the case. I've dreamt the same thing time +and again, until my heart is sick at the thought. No, I am a slave to +these brutes, and shall remain so till the end of my days." + +Strange! The voice seemed harsher than that to which Jim was accustomed. +But, no doubt, hardship had altered it. + +"Don't try to sleep any more," he whispered eagerly. "The voice is real. +I am here--Jim! Can't you tell?" + +The prisoner, who had again thrown himself upon the floor, shot up into +a sitting position as if he had been struck, and sat there staring at +the figure beside him, as if unable to believe his ears. + +"It's true, then?" he said huskily. "But who are you? Jim? Who's Jim? I +know of none of that name, save an old shipmate who sailed a trip or two +to the 'shiny' with me. Who is it, then? But anyway I reckon that it is +a friend." + +At the words a dreadful fear fell upon Jim, and crawling closer to the +prisoner, he stared eagerly into his face, endeavouring to make out in +the obscurity of the hut what were the features. As if to help him in +his trouble, a few stray rays of the moon managed at that moment to +penetrate a chink between the door and its post, and, falling upon the +white stranger, allowed a closer scrutiny than would otherwise have been +possible. To describe the disappointment, the dismay, which Jim felt +would be impossible; for, after all his care, after all his labours and +trials, he saw that a hideous error had been made, and that the white +prisoner was not the Colonel Hubbard who was reported to have escaped +the wreck in the Gulf of Aden. + +"Not my father?" murmured Jim brokenly, feeling crushed by the weight of +the blow. "I have marched miles to win this meeting, and came here this +night in the hope that I was about to release my father from prison. And +now I find that you are a stranger. The disappointment is almost too +hard to bear." + +"And where have you come from, may I ask?" whispered the stranger. "As +yet I, too, am bewildered, and it is as much as I can do to understand +that at last I am listening to another Englishman. Why, man, it seems +years since I heard the language, though in reality it's a matter of a +week or so only. But you say you have come here to rescue. Where from, +then? I cannot make head or tail of this affair. But steady! As you +value your life, keep your words low, for our guards have sharp ears, +and sharper and more ready spears." + +For some minutes Jim could make no reply to the man's questions, for he +felt stunned with the blow, indeed, so dazed and bewildered that he +might have been totally unconscious, so still did he lie. His breath +came in gasps and catches, and it was with difficulty that he could +repress the tears which welled to his eyes, and made frantic efforts to +overflow. + +"Not my father?" he repeated at length. "But who are you?" + +"An unlucky dog who happened to be thrown ashore after a wreck in the +Gulf of Aden," was the answer. "For three years have I been a prisoner +to this fiend who goes by the name of the 'Mad' Mullah." + +"Then, do you know of another?" asked Jim eagerly, seizing the stranger +by the arm, and bringing his face so close to his that they almost +touched. "Tell me at once! Quick, I cannot wait!" + +In his anxiety to hear the news, Jim shook the stranger and whispered +the question fiercely in his ear, feeling as though his own life and +happiness depended upon the answer. + +"Hush! Steady, man! You will have our guard rushing upon us if you are +not careful. There! What is that? I can hear the man outside coming to +make his usual inspection. We are discovered, and shall be killed." + +For the space of a few seconds both sat upon the mud floor, staring at +the wicket and listening attentively. As they did so, the shuffling +sound made by a man walking with sandals upon his feet could be heard +approaching, and instantly Jim realized that this must be the sentry who +was doing duty for himself and for his comrades. + +"Lie down just here, and pretend to be asleep," he whispered quickly. +"He will do as he did before, and will throw open the door so as to +obtain a clear view of the interior. But the light of the moon will only +fall just where you are, while the remainder of the hut will be in +darkness. I'll get over into the corner, and level my revolver at his +head. If he discovers me, I shall shoot, and you had better be ready to +join me at once. In the confusion we shall make a bolt for the +hiding-place in which I have a follower and two camels. Do you +understand? Quick with your answer!" + +The white prisoner gave a rapid response in the affirmative, and at once +lay down in the attitude of sleep, whilst Jim leaped across the hut into +the darkest corner. Then gently drawing a revolver from beneath his +waistcloth, he shuffled a few inches to the left until he could get a +partial view of the doorway, at which he at once presented his weapon. + +Almost immediately the sound of the latch was heard, seeming to break +upon the stillness with startling loudness. Then the twisted leather +hinges creaked, while the foot of the door scraped over the ground, +allowing a flood of moonlight to pour into the room. In the centre of +the brilliant patch could be seen the dark shadow of the sentry, +slanting across the floor until it fell upon the sleeper, and hung over +him. But a moment later the man stepped on one side, and then there was +silence once more as he peered in. Sitting there, in his dark corner, +Jim could hear the man's heavy breathing, and kept his revolver steadily +levelled, knowing that if he were to be discovered it would be during +the next few seconds. Breathlessly he waited, not daring to move a +finger, but feeling all the while as though the man's eyes were +searching every nook and cranny of the hut, and had fixed themselves +upon him. Indeed, so firmly was he convinced of this that he began to +stretch a little farther to one side till the head of the sentry came +into view. And there he remained in his strained position, the muzzle of +his weapon covering the intruder, and his finger on the trigger, ready +to press it and send the death-dealing bullet home. An age seemed to +pass before the Somali warrior ended his scrutiny of the hut, and it was +with a feeling of indescribable relief that Jim saw his head withdrawn, +and heard the rasping of the wicket again as it closed. As if +fascinated, he watched the patch of moonlight diminish, and then sat +there with the moisture pouring from his forehead, listening to the +sounds outside. + +[Illustration: JIM KEPT HIS REVOLVER STEADILY LEVELLED.] + +"A narrow squeak, I think," said a voice from the farther end. "That +beggar seemed to be suspicious, and as I lay there watching him through +a half-closed eye, I felt sure that he was about to enter. Had he done +so, and you had not fired, I should have been upon his back in a moment, +and you could have trusted me to bring him to the ground with a broken +neck, for that is a trick of which these Somali people are very fond. +Come over and join me, and I will go on with my tale." + +Creeping across the floor, Jim took the precaution first of replacing +his revolver, for in the darkness there was the danger always of an +accidental explosion, which would have been a very serious matter. Then +he seated himself close beside the stranger, and together they conversed +in whispers. + +"Answer my questions," said Jim eagerly, "then you can tell all about +yourself." + +"Make your mind easy," was the answer, "for I have good news for you. +But first, say who you are." + +"Jim Hubbard, son of Colonel Hubbard, wrecked on the Somali coast a +matter of six weeks ago." + +"And a gallant young fellow!" was the energetic response. + +"Your father, I am glad to say, is alive, and at this moment within +three hundred paces of you. Like myself, he is a slave to the Mullah, +but being new to the work, he has not yet lost his independence and +spirit, and a week ago, hearing news the facts of which never reached my +ears, he made a desperate attempt at escape, but was discovered and +recaptured. I have been a prisoner so long that I can speak the language +perfectly, and have many friends amongst the natives, and from them I +learnt that the colonel had made a desperate resistance, and had been +wounded. But the injury is not severe, though it prevents him from +walking, and has given him a blessed release from slavery, for the time +being at least." + +Jim listened to the news with feelings of the deepest gratitude, and +when the stranger had finished, sat there without answering a word, +thinking the whole matter out. + +"A few minutes ago I felt like a baby," he said. "The disappointment was +so great that, if I had been a girl, I should have cried. But the +information which you have just given me raises my spirits again, and I +feel that, after all, things are about to turn out as I wished. Can you +lead me to my father? If you can, we must go at once and rescue him. +Then we shall rejoin my follower, and when the morning dawns we shall be +miles away amongst our friends, ready and willing to make a fight for +it, should we be followed." + +"And you'll take me with you?" asked the prisoner. "Just think of it for +a moment! I'm John Margetson, third mate aboard an ocean-going steamer, +and no great person at any time. In the search for your father chance +has brought you to my side, and I tell you candidly to leave me where I +am, and go on with the business you have in hand, for if you include me +in your party your risks will be doubled. For think, in another quarter +of an hour that sentry outside will poke his ugly head into the hut +again, and then the cat will be out of the bag. On the other hand, I can +tell you where your father lies, and can describe the position so +accurately that you will be able to find him without further help." + +The stranger caught Jim by the hand, and whispered the words eagerly +into his ear, repeating them in his unselfish attempt to persuade this +lad to leave him to his fate. + +"Do you think I am a coward?" asked Jim quietly. "Should I be worthy to +be called the son of my father if I left you in the lurch? Ask yourself +that question, and then give me the answer, though, whatever it is, I +tell you that if you will come I will gladly take you with me, and +should never forgive myself if I were to leave you behind." + +"Spoken like a man!" exclaimed John Margetson. "I wanted to put the case +before you clearly, but you cannot tell what your answer meant to me, +for I have endured three years of hopeless slavery. For all that time I +have been the butt of every man, woman, and child who owed allegiance to +the Mullah, and whenever his adherents met with a reverse, I have gone +in terror of my life. I have been threatened, beaten, starved, until +life has become at times such a misery that, but for the fact that at +the worst it is dear to every man, and that our religion forbids it, I +would have thrown myself into the river yonder and ended my wretched +existence. Rescue me from my captors. Take me back to my old life, to my +old friends and associates, and I shall be your debtor till the end of +my days. I shall, indeed." + +There was no doubt of John Margetson's earnestness, for his voice +trembled as he spoke, and his lips twitched so violently that he could +scarcely form the words. + +"I know what you feel," responded Jim soothingly. "Help me to find my +father, and then all that I may have done for you will have been amply +repaid. And now let us discuss our plans." + +For some twenty minutes the two sat side by side with their heads close +together, whispering in the darkness, and then separated, for the +shuffling step of the sentry was again heard. But on this occasion he +seemed to be satisfied with a casual inspection, and barely troubled to +do more than place the wicket ajar and peep in. The sight of the +prisoner's legs, upon which a patch of light fell, made his mind easy, +and he at once retired, and, striding to the front of the larger +building, walked to and fro within a few paces of the log-fire which +blazed there. Then he shivered, and, drawing his blanket closer about +him, thrust the haft of his spear into the blaze and stirred the embers +till the flames leapt high into the air. And all the while the second +warrior sat propped against the opposite hut, a blanket drawn tightly +about him, and his chin resting upon his breast. There was no doubt that +he was fast asleep, for his snores proclaimed the fact, while he made no +movement, though Jim and his companion stared at him through the open +door for the space of five minutes. As soon as they were satisfied of +this, they went out and pushed the wicket to. Then John Margetson +stepped to the front to lead the way, and at once began to cross the +open space which surrounded the dwellings, Jim falling silently behind +him. Like ghosts they flitted across the ground, and, hastening from the +moonlit area, dived into the deepest shadows that could be found. A +hundred yards farther on both came to a sudden halt, and crouched in the +darkness, listening apprehensively. + +What was that? A shrill cry of alarm suddenly rent the air, and was +followed by another. Then there was a loud report of a gun, and +instantly, it seemed, the village hummed and buzzed with life. Doors +flew open, and men came rushing out with arms in their hands, each one +shouting to the other to ask what the trouble was, till the air was +alive with their voices. Then, as a sudden silence settled over the +Mullah's camp, for the space of a few seconds, a tall man was seen to be +standing beside the flagstaff upon the roof of the central house. His +hand was uplifted as if he were about to speak, and instantly all turned +their heads in his direction and ceased their clamour. + +"Awake!" shouted the man. "The prisoner has escaped, and is even now +within our reach. I, the Mullah, order you to arm and separate in +parties. To the one who returns with the infidel I will give a great +reward." + +At once all the men of the village ran back to their houses, and within +five minutes there was silence once more, save for the pattering of many +feet, as the warriors left the camp in search of their prisoner. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV + +HEMMED IN BY THE ENEMY + + +Nothing but misfortune seemed to be in store for Jim Hubbard upon this +eventful evening. First, he had experienced the bitter disappointment of +learning that the white prisoner at whose rescue he had aimed, and for +whose sake he had marched so many miles, was, after all, not the one +whom he had hoped to find. But the news that his father was actually +alive and within a few yards of him had revived his flagging energy, and +with his new-found friend, John Margetson, he had set out for the +purpose of reaching him, only to hear suddenly that wild shout, to +crouch there in the shadow cast by a large square hut and watch that +tall uncouth figure standing on the roof beside the flag in the light of +the flames from the watch-fire below. It was a bitter blow, and in his +anger and desperation Jim even levelled his revolver at the Mullah, and +would have fired in the hope of slaying him. But he had beside him a man +whom long-suffering had taught to be cautious, and instantly a gentle +but firm grasp was laid upon his arm, and his companion whispered in his +ear. + +"You are mad!" he said fiercely. "Drop your weapon, and lie down close +against the foot of this wall. We are not discovered yet, and may even +escape if we make use of our wits." + +"But how?" asked Jim. "Already the place is alive with search parties, +who will run over every inch of the ground, and are certain to fall +upon us. I tell you that our chances are ended, and that we shall never +get away from here. But I admit that it would have been a foolish act to +fire at the Mullah. I was in a temper, and felt that if I could only +kill him I should be satisfied. However, we shall do as you say, and +wait to see how things turn out." + +Throwing themselves upon the ground, with their heads close together, +they lay so still that they might have been logs of wood. Around them, +and stretching away from the wall for the space of some five feet, was a +dense shadow cast by the roof. But there it ended abruptly in a sharp +clear line, from which point the ground was lit by the rays of the moon. +And across this, hurrying hither and thither, and searching every +corner, went parties of fully armed Somali warriors, each numbering from +six to a dozen. Like hounds in search of a fox, they thrust their bodies +into every crevice, prodding walls and ground with their spears, and +drawing the covers blank, turned away with a snarl of rage, to proceed +with the hunt elsewhere. + +"If we can only manage to give them the slip here, there will be still +some chance of safety," whispered Jim, with his eyes fixed upon the +search-parties. "Put yourself into their position, and ask yourself what +would be the natural act of any prisoner who was attempting to escape." + +"He would be a fool to stay here," was the emphatic answer. "It would be +sheer suicide to remain in the Mullah's village, and, were I flying for +my life alone, I should have turned away to the open country, and +endeavoured to place miles of plain between myself and my enemies." + +"Just so," replied Jim coolly, seeming to become more collected as the +danger increased, "and, as one of the Mullah's followers, I should +leave the search of the village to the women and children and the stray +curs with which it is infested, and, mounting my fastest horse, should +gallop so as to get beyond the prisoner and head him. That is what these +fellows will do, and we must consider ourselves fortunate in that we are +where we are. Let us move along to the corner, and then, if a party +approaches, we can slip round to the other side." + +"Why not try the roof?" suggested his companion eagerly. "It's as flat +as a pancake, and has a ridge all round it, which will effectually hide +us. I quite agree with you that, desperate though our position seems, we +are far safer here than we should have been had we ventured beyond the +village. Come, let us get up on the top, for I can see a group of +Somalis coming this way." + +In a moment both were on their feet and endeavouring to get a grip of +the coping of the roof. But, though they stood upon their toes, and even +leapt into the air, they found, to their disappointment, that it was +still well beyond their reach. + +"Then we must try another way," whispered Jim. "Are you fairly strong in +the arms?" + +"I ought to be," was the answer, "for I have had three years of slavery. +What do you propose?" + +"Up on to my back! Quick! That's it. Now lean against the wall, and +steady yourself while I straighten to my full height. Can you reach +now?" + +Without wasting a moment, for time was of the utmost value to them, Jim +placed his hand against the side of the dwelling and rounded his +shoulders. Grasping his meaning, his companion leapt upon him with one +agile spring, having the fortune to alight on the very centre of his +back. Then, gingerly advancing his sandalled feet, he placed them on +either side of Jim's head, and leant forward till his hands came in +contact with the wall. He was a big man, and weighed some twelve stone +or more, but though Jim groaned under the burden, and at any other time +would have found it a difficult matter to raise himself to the erect +position, he now stood upright with scarcely an effort, fear lending +strength to his muscles. + +"Got it! I've a grip of the coping, and can hang on here until you are +up," whispered John Margetson. "But hurry up!" + +Stepping back from the wall so as to obtain a little run, and yet +carefully keeping within the shadow, Jim leapt forward, and then sprang +high in the air, grasping at the dim figure of his companion with both +hands. As he dangled there, with fingers clasping his comrade's limbs, +he could almost feel the man's sinews crack with the strain, and +wondered whether the weight would be too much for him, whether his grasp +would be torn from the coping above, and with what sort of crash they +would tumble to the ground. Then, as nothing happened, he drew his legs +up, and obtained a grip of his living rope. Another hoist, and his hand +closed upon his comrade's hair; but, unheeding the pain it must have +given, his fingers gripped it, and he pulled without remorse, and +tugged, till, little by little, he won his way upwards. Another moment, +and the arm was within his reach, then the wrist, and with one last, +almost superhuman effort, he found himself clambering over the low +parapet. To turn and help his comrade was his next duty, and then both +threw themselves upon the hard-beaten mud, breathless with their +struggles, but glowing with excitement and the feeling of success. + +"Look out! Here they come!" whispered Margetson at this moment. + +Taking a hasty look over the parapet, Jim saw some ten men hurrying +towards the building, and at once flattened himself upon the roof, +squeezing as close to it as he could. Then his hand stole down to his +revolver, and he drew it silently. Scarcely had he done so when +footsteps and voices were heard below, and, though he dared not look, he +was well aware that the very shadow which had proved their hiding-place +but a few seconds before was now undergoing a thorough search, from +which they could not have hoped to escape had they not climbed to the +roof. + +"Ah, what is this?" asked one of the Somali warriors, suddenly stooping +and picking something up. "I have found a knife, which I am sure did not +belong to our prisoner. Here, let me get into the light and look at it." + +Following their comrade, the others at once left the shadow and went +into the open, where they pressed about him, and gave vent to +exclamations of anger and astonishment, for the prize which had been +found was Jim's hunting-knife, which must have slipped from his belt +during his efforts to reach his position above. Fortunately for him, +however, he did not know more than a word of what was being said, and +certainly did not grasp the meaning. But his friend did, and trembled as +he lay. + +"I tell you that someone else has had a hand in his escape," cried the +first speaker again. "I have been to the coast, and I say that this is a +knife which has but lately come from the country of the infidel. Have we +not heard already that one of them is bound hither for the rescue of one +of our slaves?" + +"That is the case," was the excited answer. + +"Then this man has arrived, and released the prisoner to-night. They +fled here in the darkness, and then, at the alarm, hastened off into the +country, where they will be captured to a certainty by our brothers." + +"And what if they have not done as you so wisely guess?" sneered one of +the group. "Look at the question for yourself, and remember the short +time which elapsed between their leaving the hut and the raising of the +alarm. This dagger tells us that another has been here to lend a hand, +but it does not state that the men are fled to the hills. More likely +they are within hearing at this moment. Perhaps even lying upon the top +of the house against the wall of which the find was made. Let us search +there." + +He started towards the dwelling, intent on carrying out his purpose, but +at that moment the arrival of another dusky warrior arrested him, while +a harsh voice took up the question. + +"You are too clever for this tribe," said the new-comer, in tones which +Jim at once recognized as belonging to the man who had shouted from the +roof of the central building--in fact, no other person than the Mullah. +"In your foolishness you would send my followers climbing like cats to +the roofs, when, had you any sense, you would know at a glance that +desperate men would scoff at such shelter. Hiding up there, forsooth! +Why, you will tell us soon that they are in my house!" + +At this sally all laughed merrily at the expense of the man who had +suggested that the roof should be searched, and he at once slunk away to +the back of his comrades, where he stood biting his lips with anger and +annoyance. + +"But show me this weapon," continued the Mullah haughtily. "Ah, it is +English made, and shows without a doubt that there is a spy in our camp, +or, rather, that there was but a few minutes ago. The impudent infidel +must be captured, but take care of him, as you value my good will and +your lives, for I have need of prisoners. One day they will prove +useful, for when these dogs advance against us, we will show them their +brothers, and then slay them before their eyes, just to let them see +that we have power to do as we will, and have no fear of them. Then, +with Allah to aid us, we will scatter the enemy. But we are wasting +time. Off, all of you, and search farther afield for your man." + +He stood there in the moonlight watching as they departed, and shouted +out to them a second warning to protect the captives from harm. + +"Yes," he murmured to himself, as the last of the warriors departed, +"keep them alive, and I shall make use of them. If we conquer the +British forces, I can keep or slay them at my will. If otherwise, and we +fall into their hands, I can still treat for my own life by using these +white slaves as hostages, and giving them up to their fellows in +exchange for my own liberty. It is in such ways that I show my power to +lead these ignorant men. For I think of more than the needs of the +passing hour, and, knowing that the time for action arrives, I prepare a +loophole of escape for myself, which I shall use when all my followers +are slain. And then----" + +Deep in thought, the Mullah walked away to his own hut, and disappeared +into the interior. Not till then did John Margetson allow himself to +break the silence, for all this while he had been flattened upon the +roof, scarcely daring to move, and yet drinking in the words of his +pursuers. Now, however, there was little fear of being overheard, and at +once shifting his position, he crept close to Jim's side, and narrated +all that had passed. + +"Jove! What a narrow squeak!" exclaimed the latter. "Of course, I could +not make head or tail of their jabber, but I knew that it referred to +us, and I can tell you that my heart went into my mouth, for at any +moment I expected to have them up here. But all's well that ends +well,--only this matter hasn't finished yet. What are we to do now? It +seems to me that we have a little breathing-space, and that we had +better make the best of it to hunt about and ascertain what our +surroundings are like, for this may not prove a very good hiding-place +once the day dawns." + +"We shall certainly be seen if we remain," answered his comrade, with +conviction. "I know every inch of the spot, and to-morrow, when the +Mullah goes upon the roof of his dwelling to pray before the eyes of all +his followers, he will catch sight of us, and capture will be our +reward. But I can see no other way out of the difficulty." + +"Who lives below us?" asked Jim suddenly. + +"Not a soul. The hut, as you can see, is a very large one, and in it are +stored bags of dates and native wine for the use of the Mullah and his +special favourites when on the march. There are a few weapons also, of +the usual muzzle-loading variety, and occasionally powder and shot, too. +This I know, for I have been working here as a slave, and have carried +the things to their places." + +"How does one enter?" asked Jim again. + +"There is a door, such as the other huts have, and on the farther side a +roughly constructed hole in the roof, through which the smoke from the +fire below passed. I suppose it was the residence of a native chief +before the Mullah came this way, and that he liked a little comfort. +Now, of course, no wood is burnt, and the aperture is covered with a +strip of hide. But why do you ask these questions? It would be madness +to go into the place." + +"Then what are we to do? Suggest some better plan which gives a +reasonable hope of escape." + +Jim turned upon his companion curtly, and demanded an answer with no +little impatience, for now was the time for action. To hesitate was to +become a prisoner. + +"Well, what have you to propose? Shall we leave this place, and make a +dash for the open?" + +"It would be useless," was the emphatic answer, given with a vigorous +shake of the head. "I know the ways of these Somali warriors too well, +and I am as certain that we should fall into their hands as I am that we +are here. Why, a hare could not hope to get through their lines, for now +they are arranged three or four deep, and if we crept past the first and +went on our way, the second, or a later one, would spy us out, and come +galloping after us. No, the attempt would be hopeless, for the country +is alive with their horse and foot." + +"Then is there any other way? Would the river help us?" + +"Had we a boat it might, but without that we should soon fall victims to +the alligators which abound." + +"How often is this hut visited?" asked Jim quietly. + +"Perhaps once a week, and then not for a month. This is a reserve store, +and it is only when the Mullah is about to give a feast to his followers +that there is need to draw upon the contents." + +"Then let us take our place amongst the stores," said Jim coolly. "There +we shall find food and drink sufficient to keep life in us, and there, +it seems to me, we can repose with some amount of safety. After all, the +idea is a good one, for it offers some chance of a hiding-place." + +For long John Margetson lay at his side, considering the question ere +he ventured a reply. Then he turned slowly to Jim, and stretching out +his hand in the darkness, pinched the latter sharply upon the arm. + +"George!" he whispered, in tones of mingled delight and amazement. "You +are a regular general. You ought to have been a scout, or something of +that sort, for you are as cute and as slim as they make 'em. At any +rate, you have spied out the only path for us. I've looked at the matter +from every point of view. I admit that I've said to myself that you are +evidently a youngster with the usual impetuosity of your age, and that +your schemes were not to be listened to with much attention. Then I've +tried to find a better plan, and have failed miserably. At last I have +come back to this dodge of yours, and, hang me, it's just the thing. +It's the cheek of it, the impudence, if I may call it so, which will +help towards its success, for who amongst these Somalis would dream that +we had elected to remain in hiding amongst them? Yes, it's the very +boldness of it all that will make us safe, and--look here, I haven't a +ghost of an idea what your age is, or what you're like, for I've only +seen you in this moonlight, but after this you must take the helm. +You'll act as skipper, while I take my old place as mate. Tell me, what +are you? A young chap with a budding moustache, and heaps of go; or a +lad with scarcely a hair on his face?" + +"The second," answered Jim, blushing at his youthful looks, even though +there was no fear of observation. "A few weeks ago I was one of the +senior fellows at a public school, but now--well, I feel years older. +But what about this hut? If we're going to retire to the interior, the +sooner we do so the better." + +"Then we'll disappear at once. Come along, but be very careful to keep +below the level of the parapet, for here we are in shadow, while if we +stood above the edge, our figures would at once be outlined by the +moon." + +Bearing this warning in mind, the two slowly crept round the edge of the +roof, not daring to take the shorter cut and cross directly to the other +side, for to have done so would have been fatal, the centre of the +enclosing parapet being brightly illuminated. Arrived at the farther +corner, Margetson halted for a few seconds, while he removed the skin +covering. Then he began to wriggle his way through the hole, and in due +time disappeared in the dark depths below. + +"Hold on," whispered Jim, who was on the point of following, and, +indeed, had already allowed his legs to dangle through the opening. +"What if someone happens to notice that the covering has been removed?" + +"Ah, that would be awkward, lad. It's fixed by pegs, and we cannot very +well fasten them from the inside, though we could easily burst them open +if we wished to do so." + +"Then how's the door held?" asked Jim, lying down full length, and +thrusting his head through the aperture. + +"Just latched, that's all. No one would dare to meddle with the Mullah's +goods, you see. It would mean certain death." + +"Very well," responded Jim. "I'll fix this thing up here, and then slip +over the wall. The drop's nothing, and I shall not be seen if I choose a +moment when a cloud is passing over the moon. Hurry up, for there's one +about to cross it now, and it won't do to be kept waiting." + +Fumbling about in the darkness, it was not long before he had contrived +to cover the opening in the roof, and to peg the skin down securely. +Then he waited, with his eyes upon the disc above, and when it was +clouded by a dense mass of vapour, he looked to see that no one was near +at hand, and then clambered over the parapet and dropped noiselessly +upon the soil below. The door was standing open, and as he entered +Margetson closed it carefully behind him. Then they buried themselves in +the darkness of the interior, carefully picking their way amidst the +bundles and bales which were stored there. + +"We shall be as cosy as possible," remarked John Margetson, indulging +for the first time in a laugh. "Take care where you tread, for otherwise +you will be tumbling into one of these bags of dates, or kicking against +a skin of wine. Why, man, this is just the place for us, for we have +food at hand, and can dine like gentlemen, with wine to wash the stuff +down. An alderman could not hope for more. But supposing these ruffians +find us out!" + +"You said that we were not to be injured," answered Jim, "and therefore +we have very little to fear. Let us make the most of our good fortune, +and be content. What we have now to think about is not the possibility +of capture, though we should do well to bear that in mind and take all +due precautions, but our action in the future. How are we to get away +from here when the scent and search are less keen, and how can we manage +to take my father with us? There, you have enough to keep you awake all +night." + +"It's likely to prove a puzzling question, my lad, and at present I can +see no more daylight through it than I can--well, through these walls. +And talking of light, how are we to keep in touch with the outside +world, and learn what is happening? To attempt to leave these snug +quarters and slip out into the village would be suicidal policy. It +would not help us in the slightest, and would lead to certain +discovery." + +"Then we must have a peephole," responded Jim promptly. "Perhaps there +is one already in this hut. Let us look round, and watch for a ray of +moonlight. It is more than likely that we shall find something to suit +our purpose between the roof and the walls." + +Accordingly, both crept round the confines of the building in search of +a chink, and very soon came to the conclusion that there would be little +difficulty in overhearing any conversation that might take place in the +immediate neighbourhood. Then they made a tour of the place, and +satisfied themselves of the position of the various bales and bags. + +"We'll set to work as soon as there is a ray of light," said Jim's +companion, "and rig up a kind of cabin amongst all this stuff. If we're +careful to move only those which lie out of sight of the door, we are +not likely to be discovered. Then, too, it ought to be possible to leave +a hole here and there through which we could fire at the beggars. But I +am forgetting. You are the only one in possession of a weapon." + +"I've two, and you are welcome to one of them. But what of the +muzzle-loaders which you stated were kept here? If they have not been +removed, we might press them into our service, and rig up a regular +battery." + +"It's the very thing I meant," was the answer. "With half a dozen we +could make these beggars sit up, and unless they managed to rush us, or +bring the hut about our ears, we could keep them at their distance. But +what do you say to a bite at something? I own that I am precious hungry, +for this excitement has given me an appetite; and then you must +recollect that the diet of a slave is never noted for its liberality." + +"I'll join you willingly," answered Jim with promptness. "Let us borrow +a few of the Mullah's dates." + +"Yes, and wash them down with some of his best wine," laughed his +comrade. + +Nothing loth, and, indeed, in the highest spirits at their unexpected +good fortune, both at once went in search of a bag, and quickly secured +a handful of dates apiece. Then they retired to a point as far from the +door as possible, and sat down in comfort, John Margetson dragging a +skin of wine to their feet. + +Their meal finished, each indulged in a draught of the fluid, and found +that it braced them up in a marvellous manner. + +"You need not fear the consequences," said Jim's companion. "This wine +is made from the fat removed from sheeps' tails, and is notorious for +nothing more than for its taste. To the natives it is a great luxury, +though to a stranger, I fancy, it is anything but appetizing." + +"It has a most horrid flavour," answered Jim, "but beggars must not be +choosers. We have much to be thankful for, and particularly for these +skins of wine, for they will keep us from thirst. And now tell me more +about yourself, and of your life with these followers of the Mullah." + +Making themselves comfortable upon the floor of the hut, the two sat +close together and passed the remaining hours of the night in +conversation, taking the precaution, however, to lower their tones till +they were little above a whisper. Then, as the interior of the dwelling +became lighter, and they could see their surroundings, they set to work +in earnest to build a hiding-place. Fortunately there was ample material +at hand, and as it lay at their feet, the task was soon completed. A +search also quickly brought to light a dozen old guns, which had +probably been made by some dishonest European for the special purpose of +being sold to the Mullah. But, bad as they were, they were too valuable +to be tossed aside with contempt. Therefore, having discovered a small +store of powder and shot, the fugitives loaded them at once, cramming +the weapons to the muzzle with slugs. + +"That will do capitally," said Jim, surveying the work when it was +finished. "These beggars can come right into the hut without suspecting +that we are here, for this place shelters us. If they happen to find us, +we shall give them a warm reception with the guns, though at any other +time I should be sorry to be called upon to fire them, for they look as +though they would burst at the slightest provocation." + +"Beggars cannot be choosers," replied his comrade, with a laugh, +repeating the words which Jim had used but a short while before. "If the +enemy comes here with the intention of molesting us, I should fire fifty +of the muzzle-loaders, and chance a burst with the greatest calmness. +But we're ready for them now; and as we have a moment to look round, +permit me to see what my young comrade is like. Up to this you have been +more or less of a mystery, for since the morning dawned I have been too +occupied to take stock of you." + +Catching Jim by the arms, John Margetson turned him round till the two +stood face to face, and then treated him to a long and curious stare. + +"Yes," he said at last, finding that Jim returned his gaze without a +sign of flinching, "a bold, high-mettled lad, filled with a feeling of +duty. Shake hands!" + +The request came so suddenly that Jim started, but the next second he +clasped his companion warmly by the fingers, showing equal eagerness to +return his good feeling. + +"Straight and true, and sturdy to the backbone," continued Margetson. "I +admire you, and I thank you for what you have done for me. Had it not +been for you, I should still have been in my prison, a spiritless slave, +doomed to lifelong serfdom. But now I am free--free, I tell you; and now +that my liberty is regained, no one shall wrest it from me. I live to +escape with you, to reach friends and old England again; or I die +fighting for my life, my own master at the end." + +He ended his impassioned words with another squeeze of Jim's hand, and +then, as if to hide the evident excitement under which he laboured, +turned towards the door, and, applying his eye to a crevice, stared out +into the open. As for Jim, he was deeply impressed by his friend's +speech, and followed him thoughtfully with his gaze. Then he, too, took +post at an aperture, and sought to discover what was going on outside. + +And meanwhile, what of Ali Kumar, and what of the numerous +search-parties which had raced into the plain? Then, too, what fortune +had befallen the troop of horsemen which had ridden from the village in +search of Jim's camp? + + + + +CHAPTER XV + +A CLEVER RUSE + + +While Jim Hubbard and his friend John Margetson are hiding in the +store-hut, let us return for a few moments to the coast-line. + +The reader will remember that a Somali levy had been raised and +officered by Englishmen drawn from the various line regiments, and that +this force had many months before marched into the interior by way of +Bohotle, and, dividing into two portions, had left its baggage, its +reserve ammunition and its camels, in charge of the smaller half. He +will recollect also that the cunning Mullah, aided by information given +by his spies, contrived to elude the larger force, and gloating over a +victory which he already counted as his, had thrown himself upon Captain +McNeill's zareba. Not once, but on three successive occasions was his +frantic onslaught stemmed by the few men gathered in the zareba. So +heavy, indeed, were the losses amongst the Mullah's following, that +their enthusiasm and fanatical hate had changed to dismay and secret +admiration for these men whose officers were spoken of as "infidel +dogs." + +Following upon their defeat at the hands of Captain McNeill and his tiny +garrison, the Mullah's horde was split into pieces and scattered in all +directions by the larger half. + +But in Somaliland a holy man has enormous powers of persuasion, and the +reader has already learned that the Mullah rapidly gathered his +following together again. Then came the action with Colonel Swayne at +Erego, where the Somali soldiers, who were enlisted by the "Sirkal," +turned tail and bolted, leaving their comrades to their fate. From that +moment adherents had flocked to the Mullah's banner, and their +depredations becoming serious, an expedition was decided upon. Of this +General Manning was given the command, while the force itself was to +consist of Indian troops and of men from the West Coast of Africa. + +Stores, rifles, ammunition, and every article that could be thought of, +or that was likely to prove of value in the coming march were collected +at Aden and then sent over to Berbera. And here, when Jim and his +following passed through the town, gigantic preparations were afoot. +Already the troops had begun to collect, and the garrison at Bohotle, +which had been in residence for some months, and which was suffering +severely from malaria and from lack of supplies, had been relieved and +replaced by fresh men, while plenty of stores and ammunition for six +months had been brought up. + +This advance post having been placed in a condition of readiness, the +eyes of those who were responsible for the movements of the troops were +turned in other directions, for it is not always wise to concentrate +one's forces. A division of the fighting strength which is about to +invade an enemy's country often disconcerts the adversary, for then he, +too, must split his followers, and send some to watch and oppose one +half of the invaders, while the remainder marches to lie in wait for the +other. If this precaution were not taken, it would be a simple matter +for a well-mounted body of men to make a wide detour, and carefully +timing their arrival and attack, to fall upon the enemy in the rear, +while their comrades engaged with them in the front. + +Thus was Ladysmith relieved; for when Lord Roberts, with a hastily +collected force, invaded the Orange River Colony, the Boer forces, which +up to then had been concentrated about the heights of Colenso and the +beleaguered camp, were compelled to divide, one portion hastening across +the Drakensberg Mountains to join with others about Bloemfontein, while +the remainder, seeing their hopeless condition, fled before the repeated +and gallant attacks of General Buller, leaving the flag of old England +still proudly waving upon the Town Hall of Ladysmith. + +With this thought of a diversion in view, another base was looked for, +and Obbia, in the Italian Protectorate, was selected, the consent of +that nation having readily been obtained. Then an arrangement was come +to with the Abyssinians that they should also march upon the Mullah, +getting in behind him, if possible, so that, should he take alarm and +raise his camp with the intention of escaping farther into the interior +until the storm had blown over, there might still be good hope of +forcing him to fight, and of capturing him and a goodly portion of his +men. + +Many weeks had been spent in making these arrangements, and so uncertain +was the mind of those who had control of the expedition, that at times +it seemed likely that it would be abandoned for a space. When Jim and +his friend left Berbera, the news of an immediate advance was in the +air, but this was contradicted a few days later. Then it was bruited +abroad again, and while he and his followers were resisting the attack +of the tribesmen at the ravine, the information became public property +that within a short space of time the forces would actually advance. + + * * * * * + +As the daylight increased, Jim and his friend went from side to side of +the store-hut, and taking advantage of the piled-up date-bags, quickly +arranged a convenient look-out, from which they could gather news of +their surroundings. Some few inches of space had been left between the +roof and the supporting walls, whether for the sake of ventilation, or +because it was the custom of the builders of the country, it would be +impossible to state. But there it was, and, by means of a pile of bags, +the two Englishmen found a convenient way of reaching it. + +"We'll keep watch from here all day," said Jim, peering through the +opening; "then there will be no fear of a sudden surprise, while we can +make up for our long vigil by a good sleep at night." + +"I agree with you, my lad," was the answer. "We are in a fix here, and +unless we keep our wits and our eyes sharply about us, we shall +certainly fall into the Mullah's hands. But here comes the sun, and with +it the life of the village will begin." + +As he spoke, the street which passed from end to end of the Mullah's +stronghold was flooded with the rays of the morning sun, the edge of +which could be discerned rising in golden splendour over the crests of +the distant hills. Scarcely had it struck upon the huts and sent long +shadows slanting across the ground, when doors opened in all directions +as if by magic, and out into the clear, sparkling air came the +villagers. Children rolled from the dwellings, and began their chatter +and play, while a few minutes later the wives appeared, some with jars +upon their heads, which they carried towards the river, while others +proceeded to light fires before their huts, so as to make ready for the +morning meal. + +"And now we can expect to see the men-folk," whispered John Margetson. +"How well do I know their movements, for was not I the first to be +abroad during the past three years? It was the duty of a slave, and I +carried it out without failing, for, otherwise, harsh treatment was my +reward. If you watch, you will see the warriors do not trouble +themselves to work. The few who have failed to take part in last night's +search will presently appear, strolling from their huts, and will then +exert themselves so far as to lounge about the street. There is sure to +be much talk about my escape, so they will collect together in groups. +Only then, and when they are about to meet with enemies, will you see +them roused to any energy. They will shout to one another, and discuss +the question till a quarrel seems imminent. But their anger will quickly +subside, and soon, when the Mullah has shaken the sleep from his eyes, +and climbs aloft beneath the flagstaff, they will all turn and salaam to +him, as becomes the followers of such a holy man. Then each will produce +his strip of carpet, and, turning to the east, will follow the movements +of their leader as he kneels and prays to Allah. + +"It is a weird and wonderful sight, and their murmured 'Allah, Allah,' +will enchant your ears, for the faith and devotion of these Somali +warriors is very great. An infidel is an odious sight to their eyes, and +were it not that the Mullah might obtain value for my life, I should +long ago have ceased to exist. Often has this holy man condescended to +approach me, and endeavour to change my religion. When persuasion was of +no avail, he used threats, and even went so far as to starve me; but, +thank God, though I was only a poor heart-broken slave, with never a +white friend to rely upon, I remained resolute, and steadfastly kept to +the teaching of my childhood. And through all these weary months, that +alone has been my comfort. It has given me hope when all seemed +hopeless, and has taught me to look forward to this day. But here they +come." + +As he finished speaking, the crowd of native women and children which +now filled the village street was added to by the appearance of some +hundred Somali warriors, who emerged in ones and twos from their +dwellings, all fully armed, for none of these men dreamed of lying down +to sleep, or even of walking about in the daylight, without his weapons. +Staring at them through his peephole, Jim had a better opportunity of +observing them than had ever occurred before, and could not but admire +their height, their fine physique, and their sturdy and independent +appearance. + +Of those who lounged before him, very few possessed firearms, and these +were obviously of a poor and obsolete kind. The remainder bore shields +and spears, while double-handed swords were thrust in their +waist-cloths. A few, even, carried bows and arrows. + +"They are of the Midgan tribe, which have joined the Mullah almost to a +man," said Jim's friend. "Should it ever fall out that you are wounded +by one of their missiles, be careful to withdraw the arrow at once, and +ask a comrade to apply his lips to the puncture, for it is reported that +the tips are poisoned. But your revolver should keep them at a distance, +while against a rifle their curious weapons should be absolutely +useless." + +It was at once evident that the exciting incident of the previous +evening had had its effect upon the warriors, for, as John Margetson had +predicted, they gathered together in clumps, and began an animated +conversation. Then, at the suggestion of one of their number, they +suddenly started off to search the village and its surroundings again. +Fortunately, however, for the fugitives, no rain had fallen for many +days, and though the mass of men congregated just outside the store-hut +where Jim's knife had been found, even the sharpest eyes failed to +discover a trace of them, and it never occurred to the warriors that +those whom they sought so eagerly were even then listening to their +words with bated breath. + +"Look at the man in the centre," whispered Margetson, touching Jim upon +the sleeve. "By the sound of his voice that is the scoundrel who +suggested that this place should be searched. But he is evidently afraid +to air his opinions again, and let us hope that the snubbing which the +Mullah gave him will keep him from further investigations. Now his head +is turned this way, and it is evident that he has still some fondness +for his own ideas." + +"I confess," answered Jim, "that I do not like the appearance of the +fellow. There is no doubt that he is still suspicious, and I should not +be surprised if he came here quietly to see whether or not he was right. +If he does, he will have himself to thank for anything that may happen +to him, for we are not going to allow one man's curiosity to ruin our +hopes." + +"No; nor shall fifty capture us without a struggle, my lad. Recollect +what I said about my liberty. My mind is fully made up to obtain it at +any price. But there they go, and all the better, say I, for it is an +uncanny and an uncomfortable feeling to watch a crew of desperate men, +such as they are, knowing all the while that they are searching for +one's self." + +Satisfied that no good was to be obtained by remaining on the spot where +the tell-tale knife had been discovered, the Somali warriors went off to +another portion of the village, and, having peered into every likely and +unlikely place, returned to discuss the question once more. In the +middle of their conversation, however, the figure of the Mullah suddenly +appeared beside the flagstaff, and instantly each man, woman, and child +in the village turned and salaamed deeply to him. Then they scattered to +their various houses, and returning to any suitable position from which +their eyes could be fixed upon their leader, while they faced the east, +they discarded their sandals and reverently knelt down on their mats. +For long did the Mullah remain upon his knees, and when he had finished +his devotions, he rose slowly to his feet, stepped from the carpet, +donned his shoes, and then salaamed deeply. A moment later he faced +about, and lifting his hand for silence, just as he had done on the +previous night, he began to speak to his followers. + +"There is no news of these infidel dogs," he cried, "but they are as +surely in our hands as are those others who have formed their zareba in +the desert. Soon I hope to see those who left us last night returning, +and meanwhile I command all who have not a duty to do here to leave the +village and go to aid them in their search. As for the other prisoner, +that one who commanded men belonging to the British Government, and who +is spoken of in his own language as a colonel, he must be removed from +the hut in which he now lies and be brought closer, so that he may be +placed under a stronger guard. Not that there is any fear of his +release, for we have taken action so early that the plans of these +impudent people who have come to release him have been altogether +upset." + +In accordance with the orders which they had received, the Somalis who +still remained in the village gulped down a hasty meal, and then +mounting their ponies, set off to join their comrades. Some twenty or +more remained behind and watched them depart, then, while four of them +mounted guard over the Mullah's residence, the others proceeded down the +street, and halted before a hovel which stood at the farther end. + +"They are going to fetch their prisoner," whispered Jim, keeping his +eyes fixed upon them. "Perhaps I shall be able to see him, even though +to rescue him now is impossible. Ah, they have opened the door, and some +have gone in." + +"Your father is certainly there, my lad," answered his companion. "And +you must not be surprised if you find him changed to a certain extent, +for he has had a hard life of it. As I told you, he has never lost his +spirit, and, careless whether he lives or dies, has never permitted any +one of his guards to ill-treat him. Once, even, when I happened to meet +him in the street when carrying a message for the Mullah, he stopped to +converse with me, at which the warrior who was keeping watch upon him +called him an infidel and a dog, and prodded him with his spear to +induce him to move on. Your father was upon him in an instant, and +tearing the spear from his hand, snapped the shaft across his knee, and +belaboured the man till he bellowed. Never have I seen these people so +angered. Indeed, had it not been for the Mullah, who seemed always at +hand at such times to guard his possessions, they would have torn him +limb from limb, to revenge the insult. It was grand to see how the +prisoner faced them, spear-shaft in hand, smiling disdainfully at their +anger, and almost inviting them to come on to the attack. By such doings +he has created a feeling of terror amongst his guards, and now, whenever +he is abroad, not one, but five men follow him, ready to throw +themselves upon him and bear him to the ground, should he make an +attack upon them. Here they come, and you can see for yourself the truth +of what I say." + +As he spoke those who had entered reappeared with their white prisoner. +Then the whole group retraced their footsteps, and marched up the centre +of the street. Soon they were so close to the store-hut that the +features of every man were visible, and with a thrill of joy Jim caught +sight of his father's face. It was thinner and more bronzed than usual, +and perhaps the hair was a trifle whiter, but the prisoner still wore +that air of resolution to which his son was accustomed. Catching sight +of the Mullah, who had again ascended to the roof of his house, Colonel +Hubbard called to him in commanding tones, and would have addressed him, +had it not been for the men who marched by his side. Hustling him +forward, and surrounding him with a hedge of spear-points, they forced +him towards a circular building, which seemed scarcely large enough to +contain a human being, and motioned to him to enter. + +Longingly did Jim watch his father pass, limping slightly from the wound +which he had received. Had he dared he would have called out to him, or +made some sign so that the prisoner should know that help was at hand. +But he knew that to do so would be worse than madness. + +Having carried out their orders, the group of Somali warriors separated, +and all walked away, save one, who squatted down with his spear beside +him and his sword on the ground at his feet, evidently having been told +off as sentry. A little later one of his comrades approached, bearing a +gun in his hand, which he handed over to him, together with a horn of +powder, and a goat-skin bag containing slugs. + +"That shows that they are afraid of your father," whispered John +Margetson, who, like Jim, had watched the whole scene in silence. "No +doubt that man has been given orders to fire a gun on the slightest +suspicion of an attempt at escape, so that the others may come to his +help. But, remembering the Mullah's words, no injury will be done to +their prisoner if it can possibly be avoided." + +"I've been thinking about that, too," was the thoughtful answer, "and I +cannot say that my mind is over comfortable on the subject, for +supposing the Mullah were to hear to-morrow that my friend, Tom Dixon, +and the followers who accompanied us from the coast, had beaten off the +attack of his warriors, causing them heavy loss, in his anger he might +instantly give an order to have the prisoner killed. I have had little +experience of these native people, but everyone tells me that they are +fanatical to a degree, and that their hatred of a Christian is +extraordinary. In these circumstances, it seems to me that, in spite of +the Mullah's express orders to the contrary, no white man is at the +present moment sure of his life while a captive in his stronghold." + +"Hum! Yes, perhaps there is some truth in what you say," replied +Margetson slowly. "But however great the anger of the Mullah might be on +hearing of defeat, I know the rascal too well to imagine for a moment +that he would allow a rash and hasty impulse to prompt him to seek +revenge at once by slaying your father, for to do so would be to ruin +his hopes of a hostage in case he himself were captured. He is a +cunning, long-headed fellow, otherwise he would never have attained to +his present position of prominence. Why, at first, when he started his +depredations, he was laughed at by the majority of Somalis as a madman +who would quickly come to an untimely end. But by giving out that he was +a holy man, this Mahomed Abdullah gained many friends, and with these +to help him, and aided by an unscrupulous nature, he punished those who +had formerly jeered at him so severely as to compel them, too, to join +his ranks. And thus, little by little, and because his journeyings to +Mecca have taught him more knowledge of the world and more cunning than +are possessed by his ignorant brethren, he has steadily increased his +power over them. But not for an instant has he allowed himself to +neglect to take precautions for his own individual safety. If his +followers are successful, well and good, for his power at once +increases. On the other hand, if the day goes against him, this crafty +rogue will not grieve for the fate of his adherents, will not care how +many are killed, so long as he is sure of his own safety; for with a +white prisoner or more to offer in exchange, he thinks that his liberty +will be assured, and then what is to prevent him from again carrying his +banner far and wide through the country, and raising another band?" + +"I can see your argument clearly," answered Jim, "but tell me this. +However desirous the Mullah may be of keeping his prisoner alive, how +can he guarantee that his followers may not, in their rage at being +defeated, disobey his orders?" + +"It is a danger which must be faced, my lad, and which I admit is to be +feared." + +"That being the case, the sooner we are out of this the better for all +of us!" exclaimed Jim with decision. "It seems to me that we have now an +opportunity which may never occur again, for we know that very few of +the Somalis are in the village at the present moment. If the others have +not returned by nightfall, I propose to slip out, and by hook or by +crook to enter that hut opposite." + +"But you would not attempt to escape?" whispered John Margetson, in +alarm. "Listen to me, my lad, and do not misunderstand my caution. As I +have said before, I owe you a debt, and as a first instalment towards +repaying it I will help you in this matter to the utmost, but think of +the circumstances for a moment. We know that the country outside is +alive with Somali warriors in search of ourselves. It would be madness, +therefore, to seek to leave the village when we have already decided +that here we are in comparative safety." + +"I have thought of it in that way," responded Jim quietly, his decision +unchanged by his friend's argument. "And I quite agree that this is the +only haven for us just now. But why should we two make use of it alone, +whilst father remains over there in the hands of the Mullah, and in +greater danger of his life? It has occurred to me that a method might be +found for transferring him to this place, and that is what I propose to +do to-night." + +Some minutes passed before his comrade ventured to reply, but it was +evident that his thoughts were fully occupied with the question, for +though he still remained on his parapet of date-bags, and still looked +through his peephole, his eyes stared vacantly at the village street, +the sentry who paced up and down in front of the prisoner's hut, and the +broad strip of flashing silver beyond, which showed where the river +flowed. Suddenly, however, his attention was riveted upon the river, and +shifting his position so as to obtain a better view, he looked long and +earnestly at it, as though he had made an important discovery. Indeed, +so apparent was this that Jim, too, followed his gaze, only to be +disappointed, for the surface of the water was disturbed by nothing but +a gentle ripple here and here as the breeze played upon it and ruffled +it, or where the current washed against a sunken boulder and caused an +eddy. + +"What is it?" he asked in some astonishment. "Something caught your eye, +but what it is I cannot imagine." + +"Then I shall tell you. You say that your father must join us here, and +while agreeing with that, I placed myself for the space of a few seconds +in the sandals of these Somali people. When they awake to-morrow, to +find their captive gone, what questions will they ask themselves, what +direction will they think he has taken? They know that it cannot be that +which leads towards the desert, for their comrades are watching out +there, and would certainly have laid hands upon him. Then, where else +could he have gone? Unless we bait a clever trap for them, they will at +once come to the only conclusion, namely, that he still is here in +hiding. Then they will begin to search every house in the village, and +our game will be up." + +"That never occurred to me," said Jim, feeling as though his hopes had +received a blow. "But what trap could we prepare? How could we put them +off the scent? I cannot see in what way the river can help us." + +"But I can," was the ready answer, given in a voice of confidence. +"There are small dug-out canoes and rafts drawn up upon the banks, and +it seems to me that, were we to take one of them and ferry it across to +the opposite side and land there, stamping our feet in the mud so as to +leave obvious tracks, the enemy would at once take it for certain that +their prisoner and those who had helped him to escape had flown in that +direction. When the hue and cry is raised in the morning, someone is +sure to observe that a boat is missing, and a moment's search will show +it drawn up on the opposite bank. That, I feel sure, will be sufficient +evidence for the Mullah and his friends, and orders will be given for +instant pursuit." + +"Yes, and in addition, those who have been sent towards the desert will +be called in again, and commanded to join their comrades," whispered Jim +in tones of exultation. "It is, undoubtedly, a splendid plan, and we +will carry it out, or rather, I will do so, for one will be sufficient +for the job. Having crossed the river, I shall swim back again to this +side, and then creep towards the hut. If possible, I will cut a hole +through the wall at the back, but if the sentry is too alert, as may +very well be the case, I shall floor him, and then go in through the +door. What do you think of the plan?" + +"Capital! It will do excellently, my lad. I was about to say that we +should divide the work, but it seems to me that one of us had best +remain here to keep watch, and besides, if both of us were abroad, the +risk of discovery would be greater. We shall take it as settled, +therefore, that you slip out to-night." + +"One minute, before we leave the matter," said Jim, a thought suddenly +occurring to him. "We must not be too sure of success, you know, for +there is no doubt that these fellows are thoroughly aroused. Supposing, +for instance, that I were discovered, and the alarm given. In that case +I should make a bolt for it, and should not dare to return to this hut, +for to do so would be to betray your whereabouts. I should run for the +ravine in which Ali was to await me, and from there I should make an +attempt to reach you both when things had settled down a little." + +"Very well, then, we shall take it as agreed, that if you do not return, +I am to wait here until you do. It will be lonely work, but not more so +than I have had to put up with for the past three years. And now the +best thing that we can do is to take it in turn to get some sleep, for +we have had very little of late." + +Accordingly, when they had again regaled themselves with dates and wine, +Jim lay down, and was soon fast asleep. Three hours later Margetson took +his place, and he again was aroused after a similar lapse of time. + +"Time to be moving, my lad," said John Margetson, in a low voice, +shaking Jim by the shoulder, shortly after evening had fallen. "It has +been dark for an hour, and by the time you are ready the village will +have settled, for these folk here keep early hours. Up you get, and make +ready." + +In a moment Jim was on his feet once more, and had begun his +preparations for what would, in all probability, turn out to be the most +daring part of his undertaking. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI + +THE LAST DARING ATTEMPT + + +Standing in the centre of the store-hut, surrounded by darkness which +was so dense that neither could see the other, Jim and his friend +conversed for a little in low whispers. Then Jim divested himself of all +but his waistcloth, and tucking into this the folds of linen which +usually encircled his head, in case he should be delayed, and should be +exposed to the rays of the sun on the morrow, he declared himself ready +to set out. + +"It's a good thing to get rid of all those winding sheets," he said, as +he let the cotton garment drop to the ground, "for they make a man +visible at night when otherwise he would pass unseen. Then, again, by +discarding them, I shall have less to carry when crossing the river, and +shall dry all the quicker afterwards. And that reminds me that I must +carefully leave my revolvers and ammunition on this side, for, unless I +do so, they will be drenched with water, and become useless." + +"It's a risky thing to go without your weapons, my lad," said John +Margetson, "and if you take my advice, you will tie them to the top of +your head, where they will be out of reach of the water." + +"Thank you, that is a better idea," answered Jim. "I shall take one of +them with me, and leave the other with you as I have promised, dividing +the ammunition between us. Here it is, and there are the cartridges. +Have you got them safely?" + +Responding in the affirmative, Margetson took one of the revolvers from +him, and then placed the reserve ammunition in a fold of his garments. + +"I'm ready now," said Jim quietly. "We quite understand one another, do +we not? If all goes well, I return here with father; if not, I make a +bolt for it, so as not to betray your hiding-place. Later on I shall +return to the rescue." + +"That is the arrangement," was the answer. + +"Then good-bye," whispered Jim, extending his hand in the darkness. + +"Good-bye, lad, good-bye, and may you have the success you deserve!" + +A cordial handshake was exchanged, and then the two went to the door. +The latch was gently lifted, and the wicket pushed open just far enough +to allow Jim to squeeze through. Another minute and he was outside, +standing there in the darkness, listening as the door was closed. + +"Good-bye," he heard his comrade again whisper, and immediately after +came the low sound of woodwork meeting and a gentle fall of the latch as +it dropped into its old position. But Jim made no movement as yet. +Standing there beside the wall, he peered into the darkness which +surrounded him, and listened attentively for some five minutes, so as to +make sure that no one was near at hand. Then he fell upon his hands and +knees and made a complete circle of the building, halting at each corner +to listen again. But nothing occurred to disturb his peace of mind, for +all in the village seemed to have retired to rest. Even the dogs with +which all native streets are infested had disappeared for the time, and +only the gentle murmur of distant voices told him that the place was +inhabited at all. Happening to cast his eyes towards the central hut, a +dim solitary figure trudging disconsolately up and down attracted his +attention, while still farther to the left, and enveloped in a large +blanket, a second sentry squatted in front of the prisoner's door. + +"One on duty at each house," said Jim to himself. "It would be a +difficult matter to get rid of the man who is watching father, and if it +can possibly be arranged, I shall make my way in at the back, for the +other sentry being so near, he would almost certainly hear the struggle +and give the alarm. Hullo! Who's that?" + +As he spoke his eyes suddenly fell upon another figure of gigantic +proportions, and a few moments' closer observation assured him of the +fact that it was the Mullah pacing the narrow roof of his house. Up and +down he went restlessly, muttering to himself as if he were ill at ease. +Then with one long look round he disappeared, and soon there was no one +to be seen but the men on watch. + +"And now comes my time," said Jim to himself. "I'll slink away from here +in the opposite direction from those fellows, and carry out the first +part of my undertaking. The night is very dark, and suitable for the +work. But it is very still, and the fall of a paddle in the water, the +mere splash of a hand as one lifts it to swim, will be heard a long +distance away. That being the case, I must float across, propelling +myself by kicking out with my legs beneath the surface. Now here goes!" + +Leaving the dense band of darkness, which seemed to cling to the walls +of the store-house, he crept stealthily away into the night, and, taking +a narrow passage which ran behind the huts, quickly placed some hundred +yards between himself and the Mullah's dwelling. Then, having waited +again to listen, he turned at right angles and made his way across the +wide open street towards the river-bank. As he walked, feeling his way +carefully before him, for the darkness was great, the ground shelved +away, at first by degrees, and then more suddenly, till, happening to +pause for a moment, he heard the gentle wash of water just in front of +him. + +"The river," he said to himself; "and now for a boat. There are several +lying hereabouts, and I ought to have no difficulty in finding one." + +Again he went on his knees in the mud and mire, and groped his way along +by the water's edge. Soon his hand came into contact with some object, +and running his fingers along it, he speedily satisfied himself that it +was one of the native craft. In fact, it was a dug-out canoe, patched +here and there with scraps of goat-skin, and provided with some +half-dozen paddles of native workmanship, which lay on the bottom. + +"I've an idea," said Jim suddenly, pausing beside the craft as a thought +occurred to him. "We arranged that I should take one of these boats +over, but from that it would appear that very few had had a hand in the +rescue of the prisoner. Now, why should I not take half a dozen? Tie +them by their head-ropes together, and then ferry the whole lot across. +When I reach the other side, I'll detach one of the half-dozen, and run +it up against the bank so securely that it will not be carried away by +the river; then I'll land and stamp about in the mud till the whole +place is marked by footprints. When that is done, I'll go elsewhere till +I've got rid of all the craft, and then I'll return and go on with the +other portion of my work. Yes, it sounds to me very plausible, for when +they discover that their prisoner is gone, the Somalis will catch sight +of six stranded boats far sooner than they will of one, and, what is of +far more importance, they will think that quite a force of men has been +in the village during the night, and will promptly despatch all their +available followers to the far side of the river. That will be good for +us, for the smaller the number we have to deal with the better." + +Groping carefully about in the darkness, Jim found that three of the +native craft lay side by side, and within a very short period he had +loosely knotted the head-ropes together. Then he crawled still farther +along the river-bank, and having discovered another, pushed it silently +into the water and embarked. To grasp a paddle and use it to pole the +boat along was a simple matter, and in this way, using every care to +avoid making a splash, he sped silently along, till a gentle grating +told him that the prow had come into contact with the stern of another +craft. Five minutes later he was returning with three canoes, allowing +the stream to float them noiselessly along beside the bank. When he +reached the spot at which he had left the others, he stepped into the +river, and, wading towards them, tied the whole six together. + +Standing upright in the central one of his half-dozen captures, he +thrust the paddle over the stern, and, working it as a ferryman often +does when sculling with a single oar, he gradually crossed the stream. +Soon the gentle sound of bending rushes fell upon his ear, and he knew +that he was at his destination. Detaching one of the head-ropes, he +pulled the canoe well on to the bank, and then trudged backwards and +forwards in the soft earth, stamping it with the imprint of his +sandalled feet in all directions. Not content with that, he walked +through a patch of long grass which fringed the bank, flattening the +blades and leaving obvious tracks. There was no need to go still +farther, for a long stretch of rocky and hard soil ran away from the +river, and upon this nothing but the hoofs of horses would have made any +impression. + +Six times in succession did he repeat the process, and then, having +satisfied himself that the signs upon the bank were ample, he embarked +again and pushed off, allowing the stream to carry him where it liked. + +"There is a white line farther down," he said to himself, peering +through the darkness; "and I remember that from the store-house we could +see a spot where the water was broken and tumbled. If possible, I shall +jam this boat among the rocks, and then it will look as if it had broken +loose from the farther bank. Ah, here we are!" + +Before starting out he had been careful to wrap his revolver and +ammunition in the long strip of calico which usually did service as a +head-covering, and this he had tied firmly in position with the weapon +at the crown of his head and the knot beneath his chin. Certain, +therefore, that there was no danger of damaging them by immersing them +in the water, he slipped over the edge of the boat at once, and, +swimming beside it, directed it towards the centre of the white line +which he had observed. Soon his hand came into contact with a large +boulder, which was covered with slippery moss, and upon the upper edge +of which was a jagged indentation. + +"Just the thing," he murmured, holding on firmly, so as not to be swept +away, for the stream at this point came down with great force and +rapidity. "I'll pull her on to this until she's fast, and then swim +ashore." + +Easy though the task seemed, it taxed his strength to the utmost, for, +caught by the mass of water which swirled about her, the native craft +proved a fractious thing to deal with. She wabbled from side to side, +and then, just as her nose was in the right position, her stern floated +out, and, being broadside on, she was borne down on to the white line of +surf, where she remained for a moment jammed against the boulders. But +Jim was not the lad to be easily beaten, and, realizing the difficulty +before him, he waited for one moment to obtain a firm foothold in the +shallow water, and then bending beneath the craft, lifted it clear from +the river. Then he gently lowered it into the position which he had +selected, and, having satisfied himself that it was securely fastened +there, he turned and began to swim with long steady strokes towards the +bank. + +"And now for the second part of the undertaking," he said breathlessly, +drawing himself gently from the river, and lying down upon the mud to +rest. "I'll keep straight up the street, in the shadow of the huts, and +when I get within sight of the one which shelters father, I shall wait a +few minutes to see whether the sentry is wakeful or not. If all is +quiet, I shall go to the back and endeavour to cut my way through the +wall." + +Accordingly, as soon as he had recovered his breath and regained his +strength, for the exertion of placing the boats in position had been by +no means light, he rose to his feet again, and slowly made his way up +the village street. Arrived within some ten yards of the building which +stood opposite to the Mullah's house, he crouched in the shadow of a +wall, and remained there, peering into the darkness. At first there was +not a soul to be seen in that direction, though when he looked a little +farther to the right the reflection of the watch-fire, which seemed to +burn continuously, caught his eye, and against it, dimly silhouetted, +and looking ghostly and unreal, was the figure of the warrior who kept +watch over his leader. He was a tall, athletic-looking man, and seemed +at the moment to be lost in reverie, for he grasped the shaft of his +long spear near its cruel metal point with both hands, and held his head +bent forward. So still did he stand, and so easy and graceful was the +poise of his muscular limbs, that Jim might well have been gazing at a +finely carved statue of a Hercules. For five minutes his eye rested upon +the man as if fascinated, and then of a sudden, as the breeze stirred +the folds of the flag which flew from the roof above, causing it to +flutter gently, the man awoke from his dream with a start, and began to +pace restlessly up and down. + +"Number one," said Jim quietly to himself; "he evidently fears no +surprise, and should give no trouble at all. And now for the other +fellow." + +Some minutes passed before he was successful in discerning the outline +of the Somali posted in front of the prisoner's door, but by turning his +eyes away from the reflection of the fire, he was at length able to make +out a huddled figure crouching upon the ground, and apparently +slumbering deeply. + +"Nothing could be better for me," murmured Jim, in tones of +satisfaction. "If he will remain like that, and the other fellow +continue to pace up and down, I ought to get into the hut without much +trouble." + +Pausing for a second or two to assure himself that his revolver was in +position, he left the shadow of the wall, and slowly, and with the +greatest caution, crept across the open space which intervened between +himself and his goal. At last he touched the wall of the hut, and at +once prepared to carry out his design. And now for the first time he +realized the loss of his hunting-knife, which he had dropped when +clambering to the top of the store-house. Without it, and in the absence +of something with which to chip a hole in the wall, he was helpless, +and at the thought a feeling of despair came over him. + +"What an idiot I am!" he murmured, while tears of vexation filled his +eyes. "I ought to have thought of this before, as any baby would have +done. But it never occurred to me, and this is the result of my +carelessness. But father shall not suffer; for if I cannot make my way +to him through here, I will do so through the door, and chance +discovery." + +With this object in view he slowly crawled round the hut towards the +place where the only entry was situated, and soon the sleeping sentry +came into view as he crouched some three or four paces in front of the +hut. + +"What is that?" Jim asked himself the question with a start of surprise, +and with a sudden feeling of reviving hope, for now again he was looking +in the direction of the watch-fires, which not only aided him in +locating the position of the sentry, but also showed something--a +glimmer upon the ground where there should have been darkness alone. + +"Was it the sword which the sentry placed beside him before he fell +asleep, or was it merely some stray piece of metal upon which the +firelight fell?" + +Lying there full length in the shadow, Jim thought the matter out, and +finally, emboldened by the fact that the man made no movement, and by +the recollection that iron was a metal of great value to the Somalis, +and was not likely to be flung carelessly about, he left his position, +and advanced stealthily like a cat about to pounce upon its prey. It was +a moment of excitement, for as he neared the man, keeping his eye fixed +all the while upon him, some alteration in the reflection of the +watch-fire caused him to turn his head, and there, stalking into the +darkness as he walked his solitary beat about the Mullah's hut, came the +warrior who kept watch there. Again his figure was silhouetted sharply, +and, in spite of his dangerous position, Jim found himself vaguely +wondering what was the man's height and age, and what kind of an athlete +he was. Indeed, so strangely does one's mind wander in the most +hazardous circumstances, that straightway Jim's thoughts carried him +back to the football field at school, and in a senseless way he began to +find a place for this brawny warrior in the team. But a moment later the +man had vanished into the reflection of the flames again, and there was +the slumbering sentry upon whose sword he had designs. Two paces +forward, and Jim's fingers lit upon the handle, and began slowly, +cautiously, to withdraw the weapon. + +The sleeper stirred, and ground his teeth, as though his dreams were not +of the sweetest, then he awoke with a start, and raised his head. But he +was quickly reassured, for again, trudging from the dim light beyond +into the darkness, came his comrade, head poised proudly in the air, and +spear resting upon his shoulder. With a grunt of satisfaction the man +behind whom Jim lay settled his head upon his breast once more, and gave +himself up to sleep without restraint. + +A minute later our hero was behind the hut, and with the weapon grasped +in both hands was attacking the wall fiercely, as though life itself +depended upon his exertions. Chip! chip! At every thrust the point of +the steel bit into the hard sun-baked clay, and sent splinters of it +flying. Another lunge, and a mass of the material detached itself and +fell to the ground, with a sound which, though not loud, caused Jim +suddenly to stop his efforts and crouch again, fearful that he had been +overheard. But a glance round the corner of the building showed him the +sentry still asleep, with his comrade continuing upon his round. + +Chip! chip! chip! Resuming his labours, Jim kept prodding at the wall +till quite a respectable amount had fallen. Then of a sudden, as he gave +a still stronger thrust, he felt the mass before him give way, and the +point of the weapon went through into the interior with a grating sound. + +Had anyone heard the noise? Was that someone stirring? Perhaps it was +the prisoner, his dear father, who had guessed that rescue was at hand; +or perhaps it was the sentry. + +Something fell upon Jim's listening ear, and instantly he suspended his +labours, and, crouching at the foot of the wall, waited to see what +would happen. + +Yes, it was undoubtedly the man who had been sleeping before the door; +for suddenly a stooping figure came shuffling round the building, +peering suspiciously into the darkness, as if something had disturbed +his rest and caused alarm. + +Would he be seen? Was it possible that by lying flat there upon the +ground he could have escaped the attention of the Somali warrior? And if +not, then how was he to act? + +Rapidly did Jim allow the thoughts to flash across his mind, and then, +before an answer could come to him, indeed long before he could collect +his scattered wits, the man suddenly caught sight of him, and, raising +himself erect, prepared to shout an alarm. There was no time for +hesitation, for had a sound escaped the lips of the sentry, flight for +the prisoner, for Jim, and for John Margetson, would have been out of +the question; their fate would have been hopelessly sealed. And +therefore, prompted by the danger, and scarcely realizing how, Jim +sprang upon the man, and, grasping him by the throat with one hand, +plunged his weapon into his chest. Twice in succession did he deliver +the blow, and then, still clutching his opponent, he fell with him to +the ground, and lay there, overcome by his feelings and by the +narrowness of his escape. + +[Illustration: JIM SPRANG UPON THE MAN.] + +"If the second man has heard the struggle, we are done for," gasped Jim. +"But perhaps he was on the farther side of the Mullah's house, and if +so, he may be unaware of the fate which has befallen his comrade. But +supposing he notices his absence and comes to find him?" + +The thought set him trembling, for he was thoroughly unhinged by the +events of the last few moments. As he reflected upon the matter, +however, and realized how much depended upon his coolness and decision, +resolution came to him at once, and straightway rising to his feet, he +tumbled the body of the dead warrior on one side, and took possession of +his blanket. Then casting its folds about him, resting the man's spear +jauntily upon his shoulder, and carrying the sword in one hand, he began +to saunter round the dwelling. A few paces brought him to the front, +where he caught sight of the second man walking slowly upon his beat, +and approaching him from the farther side. And now was the time when +Jim's courage was tested to the utmost. Had he shown any fear, or had he +turned about in the foolish endeavour to escape the attention of the +sentry, all his plans would have been upset. The impulse was there to +make him cast his blanket to the ground and fly for his life; he felt +the longing to get away from the place, to free himself from the danger, +and then, putting the temptation aside, he boldly stepped onwards, and, +arriving opposite the door, paused to look sleepily about him. + +"The night is dark, comrade, and it is lonely work tramping hither and +thither," said the tall warrior, coming to a halt some feet away from +him. "This watching is a weary trial, and my heart sickens at it. Rather +would I be abroad with my brothers in search of the runaways, or, +better, galloping upon my horse against the zareba which the insolent +invader has erected on the fringe of the desert. It maddens me to know +that our warriors are fighting there, and that at this moment they are +rushing to the attack with victory before them. And then, what loot! The +man who came hither from the farther side of the Hoad, and who was once +a follower of the infidel, has told us of the camels and horses that +accompanied the expedition, and of the rifles and ammunition. My mouth +waters at the thought that one of these guns might fall into my hands, +for with it I feel that I alone could beat back these British troops who +are to advance against us. But an evil fate has placed me here to keep +watch when there is no need for it. In these peaceful times, and when no +danger is to be feared, the old women of the village could carry out the +duties as well, and better than I. However----Hark! Listen to that! You +hear the faint and distant sound of firing which reaches us upon the +still night air. Did I not say that our comrades were even now advancing +to the attack?" + +As he spoke, Jim stood still, looking at him, and puzzling his brains to +know how to act. That the man was addressing him he fully realized, but +whether asking a question or merely making a few commonplace remarks, he +could not guess, as he did not understand the language. To have +attempted to respond would have been sheer madness, and yet what was he +to do? Happily for him, a gust of wind swept along the village street at +this instant, and, falling upon the watch-fires, sent a burst of smoke +and embers whirling in his direction. A second later a fit of coughing +took hold of him, and leaning upon his spear, he struggled with it till +the tears were forced to his eyes. Then, as if that had been sufficient +answer, he yawned loudly, and began to trudge the beat again, till the +hut hid him from the sentry. No sooner was he out of sight than he ran +to the other side, and, throwing himself upon the ground, crept to the +end of the wall and looked out across the open space which separated him +from the Mullah's residence. There was the warrior who had just +addressed him, still standing in a listening attitude; but whether he +was surprised at his comrade's action or not, it was impossible to +state. However, that his suspicions had not been aroused was quickly +evident, for, coughing and spluttering, as a second gust swept the smoke +in his direction, he, too, moved away, and had soon disappeared from +sight. + +"Now is my opportunity," thought Jim, "and I shall never have another +like it. Whilst he is behind the Mullah's house I must make a rush for +the prison, and, by George, I'll do it!" + +Darting round the angle of the wall, he undid the fastenings of the door +and slipped into the hut. He had just time to pull the door to when the +sentry came into sight again. But nothing had disturbed him, that was +apparent, for he continued his leisurely walk without a pause and +without a glance in the direction of his comrade. + +"Father! Father! Where are you? I'm here, your son, Jim, come to help +you," whispered our hero, repeating almost the same words as he had used +when making the acquaintance of John Margetson. + +There was a movement at the end of the hut, and he could hear someone +stir, but for more than a minute there was no other sound. Then a voice +broke the stillness, and a question was asked in tones with which Jim +was familiar. + +"Who is that? Did someone say 'Jim?' My boy whom I left away in old +England?" + +"Hush! Yes, I am here. Don't make a sound for your life, father! I shall +come close up to you." + +Creeping across the hard-beaten floor, Jim groped his way through the +darkness, and very soon found himself beside the prisoner. Their hands +met in a firm and loving clasp, while each kissed the other +affectionately upon the cheek. + +"My boy! My dear, dear lad!" was all that Colonel Hubbard could say for +some minutes. "Who could have thought it possible? Who would have dreamt +that such a thing could have occurred? It seems incredible, and I cannot +believe that it is true. But--yes, I am pressing your hand, and I know +by your voice that it is really you. Thank God that you have come!" + +"I'm here right enough," whispered Jim, feeling already as though a load +had been removed from his mind. "But, now about escaping. I am in +disguise, and have come here from the store-hut of the Mullah, which is +close at hand. There John Margetson and I have been hiding, and it is to +that spot that I intend to take you now." + +"John Margetson! I know him well, for we met on more than one occasion. +How comes it that you have made his acquaintance, my lad? Are you, then, +a prisoner, too?" + +"No, father, but I found my way to his hut, thinking that you were +there, and that the Mullah possessed only one white slave. It was a +bitter disappointment, but this makes up for it all. Now I hope to carry +both of you away with me to our zareba, which lies away on the fringe of +the desert." + +"Rescue us both! Zareba! I don't understand; I am bewildered!" exclaimed +Colonel Hubbard, still pressing his son's hand. "But you must tell me +all about it later on; for the present, let me know what I am to do, for +I am completely in your hands. What is this store-house? And why should +we retire to it?" + +Placing his lips close to his father's ear, Jim hurriedly whispered an +account of his recent doings, and told him how it was that the +store-house had been pressed into their service. + +"And now, father," he continued, "it only remains for us to escape from +this without observation, and reach John Margetson. If we are only +successful in that, we have arms and ammunition there which will enable +us to protect ourselves if necessary, and make a good fight for our +lives; and, in addition, I have just arranged a ruse which should send +these Somalis off to pursue us in the wrong direction. If they fall into +the trap, we shall say good-bye to this village, and make our way to the +zareba. Are you ready?" + +"Ready, ay, and willing." + + + + +CHAPTER XVII + +A DASH FOR LIBERTY + + +For some little while Jim and his father sat close beside one another +with heads touching, conversing in whispered tones, for it was necessary +that the prisoner should be instructed precisely how to act when they +were outside the hut. + +"You must tell me what I am to do clearly and concisely, my boy, for I +am entirely in your hands," whispered the colonel. "It seems strange +that I, who have always prided myself upon my resourcefulness, and who +have always been the leader when you and I have been together, should +give place to you. But, then, you see, you have all the strings in your +fingers, and know exactly which one to pull, and when to let go your +hold. Indeed, so far as I have been able to gather in these few seconds, +you have shown yourself to possess a master's mind. But come, let us be +going, for I dread that at any moment an alarm may be given, and then we +can scarcely hope to escape." + +"You understand, then, father, that you follow me closely out of the +hut, and slip to the back of it. I shall wrap the blanket about my +shoulders and march round and round, to put the other sentry at ease. +Then we shall disappear into the darkness, and I shall lead the way to +our rendezvous. It will not be long before my absence will be noticed. +Then, no doubt, the Somali sentry will discover the body of his comrade +and your flight. But they can kick up as much row as they like, for we +shall be in hiding, and even if we were discovered, we have sufficient +guns with us to make a tough fight of it." + +"Depend upon it, we will," was the colonel's hearty response. "Put a +weapon into my hand, and I will cause them to regret the day when they +first made me captive. This Mullah and his followers shall find that +their slave has strength for fighting, as well as for chopping wood and +drawing water." + +"That reminds me, father. Here is the sentry's sword. Take it, for you +may perhaps require something. I have the spear and my revolver." + +Having settled their arrangements, the two rose to their feet, and +silently crept to the door. Then Jim gently pushed it open a few inches, +and, thrusting his head out at the bottom, looked in the direction of +the Mullah's house. Striding stalwartly out of the firelight, as he had +done so often before, came the athletic watchman, his spear swinging +easily over his shoulder, and his head held well in the air. That he was +unsuspicious of the events which had happened so close at hand was +evident, for as he walked he hummed a dismal native air in the sonorous +tones common to these people, while his thoughts were undoubtedly far +away. Most likely he was still thinking of his comrades who were +attacking the infidel zareba, for he paused every now and again to +listen, and stopped his song, only to be disappointed, however, and take +to his lonely beat again with an impatient stamp of his foot. + +Now was the time for the fugitives, for the Mullah's hut suddenly cut +off the warrior's figure. The next instant Jim pushed the door open +quietly, and stepping out, stood there while his father emerged. Then, +as the colonel darted round the hut, Jim placed the blanket about his +shoulders, and, walking some distance to the left, waited for the +appearance of the sentry again. The instant he caught sight of him he +began to saunter forward, and yawned deeply again, as though he had only +just awakened from a sleep in which he had indulged on the farther side +of the building. + +Three times in succession did Jim make the complete circle, slouching +round as though the effort were too much for him. Then, as he came +opposite his father again, he tossed the blanket to one side, and, +catching him by the arm, drew him away towards the village. + +"Now for the store-hut," he said in an exultant whisper, feeling as +though all their difficulties were ended. "Come this way along the dark +side of the street, and when we halt, lie down in the shadow of the +wall, for it will be as well to see that we are not followed. After +that, all we have to do is to slip across the street, open the door, and +enter." + +"As simple as A, B, C, old boy. Lead the way, Jim, and you can rely upon +my following your orders. Now, on you go!" + +Pressing forward, Jim quickly made his way along the darkest side of the +village street, and, ere many minutes had passed, had reached a spot +which was exactly opposite to the store-hut. And here, in accordance +with the directions which he had already given, he threw himself flat +upon the ground. + +"Good!" he whispered, when some little time had passed without a sound +having disturbed the silence. "No one suspects us, so we may make ready +to cross the street." + +"Hu-s-s-sh! Keep your eyes open," came his father's voice at that moment +in warning tones, while his hand gripped Jim by the arm, and steadily, +and with every caution, pushed it in a direction which pointed to a spot +across the street and slightly to the left. Instantly Jim's eyes turned +to the place, and peering into the darkness, he quickly became aware of +the fact that a stealthy figure was moving there. + +"Was it the sentry who had suddenly discovered the absence of his +comrade and the flight of the prisoner, or was it some other native of +the village, whose suspicions had been aroused in some unforeseen +manner?" Jim asked himself the question as he lay there, but for the +moment could find no answer, for the stranger's figure was hidden almost +completely, while his features were entirely invisible. Creeping along +in the shadow of the farther wall, he soon reached a point which was +exactly opposite to the fugitives, and separated only from them by a +matter of a few yards. Then he crept slowly into the middle of the +sun-dried road, and turning, faced the store-hut, bending his head +forward as if he wished to inspect it closely. Fortunately for Jim and +his father, the man had chosen a site to which a few stray rays of the +watch-fire contrived to penetrate, and this light falling upon his face, +revealed the fact that he was not the sentry, but the native who, when +Jim's dagger was found, had suggested that the white prisoner and his +rescuer had taken refuge in the store-hut. Evidently, in spite of the +Mullah's derision, he had come at length to investigate the matter for +himself. With a start of surprise our hero recognized him. + +"Our game is up," he whispered; "that is the man who declared to his +companions that we must be hiding in the village. And now he has come to +set the question at rest, and so that he should not incur the ridicule +of his comrades, has selected this late hour in which to put in an +appearance. What can we do?" + +"Do?" murmured the colonel. "We must manage to silence the fellow, or +the whole village will be upon us. But I confess that it is almost an +impossibility, for he is bound to discover us before we can get within +reach of him. In that case, we must effectually silence him and then +escape, for otherwise he would set his comrade upon us. Hush! he is +looking in this direction." + +As he spoke the native turned round slowly, peering into the darkness in +all directions, and, as his eyes fell upon the shadow in which they were +lurking, he started backwards. Then, as if uncertain of his powers of +vision, he crept a few paces closer, and, shading his eyes with both +hands, as though they would help him to penetrate the darkness, stared +suspiciously at the two figures crouching there. A second later he had +given vent to a shout, and, turning upon his heel, fled down the street, +making the air ring with his calls. + +Jim was utterly bewildered at the turn which events had taken, but +Colonel Hubbard was a man who had faced danger in many forms, and whose +wits had been sharpened upon many a field of battle. Realizing at once +that this man would not only arouse his comrades, but would lead them in +the pursuit, he, too, was upon his feet and dashing along between the +houses before an instant had passed. Fear seemed to lend fleetness to +his feet, for though the native spy sped onward at a rapid pace, he +could not outdistance his pursuer. Indeed, the colonel seemed to come up +with him by leaps and bounds, and then with one gigantic spring to land +upon his shoulders. What followed Jim could not make out, but when +Colonel Hubbard returned he knew that they were safe. The man whom he +had followed had paid for his persistence with his life. + +Meanwhile Jim had not been idle. Grasping the fact that the store-house +could not longer afford a safe shelter, he had at once darted across the +street and hurled the door open. Then, as a figure appeared to bar his +progress, and he heard the sharp click of a gun-lock, he called a loud +warning to John Margetson, and leapt hurriedly aside. Well was it for +him that he had the presence of mind to do so, for, suddenly aroused +from the slumber into which he had fallen, Margetson had seized one of +the Mullah's weapons which lay close to his hand, and, hearing the door +burst open and the commotion outside, had discharged the contents into +the darkness. + +"Steady, old man!" shouted our hero; "it's Jim, and I've come to tell +you that we must make a bolt for it. Out you come at once!" + +To say that John Margetson was surprised at the sudden turn which events +had taken was to express the situation mildly. For half an hour after +Jim's departure he had remained in the store-hut, looking out through +the aperture between the roof and the wall; but, wearied of seeing +nothing, and having by now no small amount of confidence in the young +fellow who had so miraculously come to rescue him, he had sat down upon +a bag of dates, just to rest for a few moments. Then the heavy +atmosphere within the hut--the aroma of dried dates and the store of +wine--had overcome him, and little by little his eyelids had drooped +till he was fast asleep. Roused by the alarm and by the opening of the +door, he had started to his feet, and, rushing at once to the conclusion +that the natives had discovered his lair, he immediately opened fire, +without thought of the harm he might have done to his young companion. + +"What, you!" he exclaimed in bewilderment, appearing at the door with a +smoking weapon in his hand. "Have I hurt you? Good heavens! Don't say +that my bullet wounded you!" + +"There's nothing wrong with me; but I'm in a desperate hurry!" cried +Jim again. "Bring your gun, and come along quickly, for we haven't a +moment to lose." + +"But the prisoner, your father?" + +"He's here. I've managed to get him safely out of his cell, and now we +must fly for our lives. Ah----" + +At that moment Jim became aware of the fact that a tall figure was +rushing down upon them from the direction of the Mullah's house, and +instantly realized that it must be the sentry who for a short period of +time had claimed him as a comrade that evening. Already the man was +within a few paces of him, and, with lowered spear-point, and shield +held well forward so as to protect his body, came headlong towards them. + +"Look out!" shouted John Margetson. + +But Jim needed no warning, for, hazardous though the position was, he +had never for one moment allowed his coolness to desert him. Without +moving, therefore, from the spot upon which he stood, he turned +slightly, and whipping the revolver from his waistcloth, levelled it at +the advancing sentry. Click! Back went the lock as he gave the first +pressure upon the trigger. Snap! The hammer fell; but there was no +explosion, no bullet flew from the muzzle, for by an evil chance a +splash of the river had damped the cap. + +Undaunted, however, Jim gave vent to an exclamation of annoyance, and +then, without lowering his arm, jerked at the trigger again. Bang! This +time the hammer had fallen upon an undamaged cartridge. Jim heard the +bullet strike the man's breast, and then, ere the flash of the powder +had died down, he saw him suddenly plunge forward, with arms thrown out +before him, while spear and shield were cast high into the air. A second +later, with a clatter which could be heard all over the village, the +muscular figure of the unfortunate sentry came crashing to the ground, +where it lay motionless. + +And now the Mullah's village, which a moment before had been peacefully +slumbering, was suddenly plunged into a state of wildest turmoil. A very +pandemonium seemed to have broken loose, for in all directions doors +were flung wide open with a series of resounding bangs, while loud +voices rent the silence of the night. Then, just as had happened on a +previous evening, a tall figure suddenly appeared beside the flagstaff +which stood upon the roof of the central dwelling, and the voice of the +Mullah rang out clearly, drowning every other sound. + +"Catch them!" he shouted. "After them, every one of you! For if these +impudent dogs escape this time we shall be for ever disgraced. Follow +them, I say! Pick up their tracks, and when you have done so, I myself +will lead you." + +"Come down, then, and show us the way now!" called out one of the few +men who had been left in the village. "We can see no sign of them, +though here, in front of the store-hut, are the bodies of two of our +comrades." + +"A third is here!" shrieked another at this moment, happening to stumble +upon the sentry who lay behind the prisoner's hut. "It is Abdul Hamid, +who kept watch over our white slave. See," he continued, appearing a +moment later, dragging the body towards the watch-fire, "he is dead. +Allah has taken him, and the thrust of a sword has sent him to his end. +Where are these infidels? Lead us, you who are our ruler, and show us +that you have those powers of which you boast." + +That the incident which had so suddenly and unexpectedly aroused the +village had angered the warriors there was little doubt, for they now +came crowding round the Mullah's residence, and forgetting the humble +manner in which they were apt to address him, demanded hotly that he +should do something in the matter. + +"It is a disgrace to our manhood!" cried one of them bitterly. "If these +men, whoever they may prove to be, escape us, the tribes who live within +touch of our camp will jeer and point the finger of disdain at us, and +will speak of us as women, fit only to toil in household work, and +handle the staff with which our corn is crushed, instead of shield and +spear. Up, then, and lead us in the pursuit!" + +That the indignant words had their due effect upon the Mullah was +evident, for scarcely had the speaker ended the sentence when the door +of the central hut flew open with a crash, and the leader sprang into +the firelight, brandishing a sword above his head. + +"Ay!" he shouted. "Women we should be, and worse! Dogs, indeed, to let +these men get safely away. You have called upon me to show you how to +act, and, therefore, stand still now and listen. These are the facts, as +I see them. Our brothers are abroad between this and the desert, and it +would be a clever fugitive who could contrive to slip between their +ranks, even upon a dark night such as this is. It is clear, therefore, +that these infidels have turned their faces in another direction. To the +river, then! Run down some of you, and see whether a trace of their +flight cannot be discovered." + +At his order half a dozen of the men who surrounded him turned quickly, +and rushing to the watch-fire, each picked up a smouldering brand, and +ran off towards the river. By the time they had reached the banks the +impact of the air upon the glowing ends of the wood had fanned them into +flames, and converted them into excellent torches. Scattering with +these in their hands, they proceeded to search every foot of the +neighbourhood, and ere long came upon signs which rewarded them for +their trouble. Then a shout rang out in the air. + +"Silence!" bellowed the Mullah, who had again taken his post upon the +top of his hut. "Let every man remain quiet, so that we may hear what is +said." + +"Our father is right," shouted the man again. "He is a wise leader, +indeed, for here are sure signs of the dogs who have disturbed us. Boats +are missing from the banks, and by the aid of my torch I can see them on +the farther side. Wait while I go over to look further into the matter." + +There was a splash as the Somali plunged into the water, and then, as +all eyes were turned in that direction, he could be seen swimming +sturdily by the aid of one arm and his legs, while with the other he +held the flaring stake above his head. About him the stream flashed and +eddied, while the light was reflected from a thousand brilliant points, +and clearly showed the seething wake which he left behind him. Then, ere +he had traversed half the distance, another voice awoke the silence. + +"Ha! Here is another boat!" one of the searching party shouted. "I can +see it stuck high and dry upon the reef which crosses the river at the +foot of the village. It is stranded and empty." + +"And here are five more!" called the first, who had now reached the +opposite side, making a funnel of his hands, so that his voice should +carry the more surely; "and by their side, and for some feet on the +marshy edge of the water, the mud and grass is trampled by a hundred +feet. It is clear that this alarm was caused by more than one of the +enemy." + +For a minute there was silence as the Mullah cogitated, and then mindful +of the fact that he must not hesitate--for to do so would be to show +weakness before his followers--he once more issued his orders. + +"Few or many, we must follow, and that at once," he called. "Therefore, +I command that the greater part of you at once cross the water and +search out the tracks of these invaders. Others shall mount the fleetest +horses we possess, and gallop to their brothers with the word that they +are to leap into their saddles and come hither like the wind. Then, with +myself at their head to lead and guide them with my wisdom, we, too, +will ford the stream and take up the chase. Be sure, my men, that Allah +will aid us in this matter, as He has always done, for are we not brave +and deserving of His favour?" + +His followers were eager to obey his words, and before a quarter of an +hour had passed some fifteen of them rode down to the water's edge, and +spurring their ponies into the water, swam them boldly across. Then with +a forest of blazing torches held high above their heads, they took up +the supposed tracks of the fugitives, and followed them to the rocky and +hard ground beyond. But here their cunning and native craft were +baffled, for not a scratch, not a hoof-mark could be seen upon the +uneven surface, in spite of the fact that each one of the warriors was +trained in such matters, and possessed eyes as keen as those of a +ferret. An hour passed, and still they could make nothing of the +difficulty, and were compelled to send one of their number to the Mullah +with a message to that effect. + +"What! No further sign of them!" exclaimed the latter wrathfully, +issuing from his hut. "I will return with you and see into this +matter." + +Diving back into the darkness of his dwelling, he reappeared in a few +minutes with a flowing robe about him and a rifle of modern workmanship +in his hand. At a shout from one of the men near at hand, a pure-bred +Arab, clean of limb, and with tossing mane, was led up by a native +slave, who stood there, bridle in hand, holding the finely worked +stirrup for his lord and master. Scarcely had he arrived when the +leader, disdaining the aid so invitingly held out towards him, leapt +with a bound into the saddle. With the certainty of a practised +equestrian, his feet fell into the stirrups, while his left hand picked +up the embroidered reins. Then, waving his rifle above his head, he +plunged the cruel rowels with which his heels were armed into the flanks +of the noble animal, which at once sprang forward with a bound that +would have unseated any but an accomplished horseman. With a snort, and +a shout from the rider, they plunged recklessly into the river, and +began to swim across. It was grand to see the manner in which the Arab +thoroughbred clambered to the top of the bank beyond, and shook himself +there like a dog, while the gleam of the torches shone upon his silky +coat. It was splendid, too, to watch this Mullah, forgetful of intrigue +and of the arts by which he maintained his authority over his followers, +become a man again. Tossing the reins upon the animal's neck, he placed +a hand upon the pommel of the saddle, and then leapt lightly to the +ground. + +"A torch!" he cried sharply. "Fools! Give me one of the brands, that I +may search with my own eyes. Ha! Now follow behind me, and beware how +you tread, for I wish not to be led away by the footprints which you +yourselves have made." + +Cowed by his fierceness, the search-party promptly obeyed his orders, +falling in behind him, and following every movement he made. + +"Let me start at the beginning, and then work from the river," cried the +Mullah, striding to the edge of the water, where he sank to his ankles +in the soft mud. "Here is the groove which the prow of the boat cut as +it was run to the shore, and here, deeply impressed in the ooze, is the +sandal-mark of the man who first leapt overboard. See!" He turned, and +digging his heels into the ground, so as to lend power to his arms, he +dragged the craft still higher. "And here are the prints of those who +followed him. One, two--I count eight of them, but--what is this? Each +one is broad and long and of precisely the same pattern. It is strange +that all the infidels who landed here should be possessed of feet which +do not differ in size. We must be careful, for this enemy of ours is a +cunning one, and has already proved difficult to deal with." + +Something had awakened the suspicion of this crafty leader, for, as if a +sudden thought had come to him, he bent low, till his head and beard +almost swept the ground, and peered at the various depressions to be +seen there. Then he stalked away from the edge of the water, bearing the +torch at his feet, until he came to the broken ground beyond. He did not +venture as yet, however, to give his views to those who accompanied him, +but, satisfied that he would learn nothing more at that spot, he trudged +across to where a second boat lay drawn up on the shore. Repeating +precisely the same process as before, he passed to the third and fourth +in succession, and, finally, to the last. Only then, when there was no +longer room for doubt in his own mind, did he permit his warriors to +gain an inkling of his thoughts. But now the evidence of a ruse was so +clear that there was no fear of making a blunder, and consequently of +losing prestige amongst his men. Therefore, calling them about him with +a peremptory wave of the torch, he addressed them in deep tones, which +trembled, so great was his anger. + +"Where would you be had you not myself to guide you?" he asked, staring +each man in turn in the face. "You would be as children without a +mother, as sheep without a herd. For, had it not been for my presence +here to-night, you would have ridden your horses to this spot, and then, +unmindful of the cunning of your enemies, would have galloped away into +the country beyond, bent on hopeless pursuit. Listen! The dogs who came +hither to-night, and disturbed the peace of our village, escaped by +another way, leaving a trap behind them, in the hope that it would put +you aside and give them a longer start. As I have said, had it not been +for me, you would ere now have been gone on a useless mission, having +fallen victims to this ruse." + +"A ruse?" shouted his followers, pressing closer in their eagerness. "We +are not blind; but in this we cannot follow your thoughts, and cannot +agree with all that you say." + +"Fools! Did I not declare that without your leader you are lost? Come +with me, and I will show you the truth of my words." + +Grasping the nearest man by the shoulder, with such fierceness that he +would have started back had not a hand detained him, the Mullah dragged +him across the turf towards the spot where one of the native craft lay +stranded. From there he proceeded to the others in turn, followed +closely all the while by the remainder of the party. + +"Have you no eyes?" he demanded impatiently, directing their attention +to the various footprints. "Measure the marks in your minds, and tell +me, if you can, that they do not resemble one another. Look! The sandal +upon the right foot of the infidel who planned this trap had had a +portion of its inner edge cut away by some jagged stone, and the mud +tells us of it as surely as could the owner. Then search about, and you +will find that every print of the right foot, whether here or at the +other landing-places, bears the same impression." + +Following the directions of their leader, the warriors ferreted about +beside the river, like so many dogs hunting for rats; and then, +convinced of the wisdom of the Mullah, they returned to his side, +feeling more than ever that he was, indeed, a mighty man. + +"It is wonderful!" exclaimed one of them humbly. "You say truly that, +had it not been for you, we should have entered upon a chase which would +have been fruitless. Tell us, you who are our father, what is the +reading that you gather from these signs. For my part, I could have +sworn by Allah that no fewer than a hundred of the enemy had landed +here." + +"A hundred! I read it that one alone came here, and having settled the +boats in their various positions, swam back again to the village. Then, +when the trap was ready, by which he hoped to smother his trail and +throw dust in our eyes, he made the attempt which has proved successful. +But he shall repent. By Allah! whom we all worship, and whose slaves we +are, this dog of an infidel shall suffer. Here are my orders. Cross once +more to the village, and then ride hard to join your comrades. Tell them +that the fugitives are in their direction, and bid them capture them +alive. When the day dawns, I shall expect to see my warriors riding back +triumphant." + +Once more the Mullah treated each one in the party to a stern and +critical inspection, and then, striding to where his Arab charger stood +shivering in the cold night air, he vaulted into the saddle without +touching the stirrup, and in a moment was plunging into the river again. +With his rifle grasped in his left hand, and the reins hooked over the +barrel, he forded the stream with the aid of the light cast by the +flaming torch which he still retained. Half a minute sufficed for him to +reach the opposite shore, when, turning in his saddle to take one +backward glance at his followers, he tossed the brand into the river and +spurred his animal on. A few paces brought him to his own dwelling, +which was surrounded by a host of excited women, who were still ignorant +of the cause of the uproar, and were fearful for their lives. But he +thrust them aside haughtily, and springing nimbly to the ground, +disappeared from view. A flickering light, however, showed that he did +not seek repose, but was even then busily making preparations for the +pursuit which was to be carried out on the morrow. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII + +IN THE GOLD MINE + + +While the Mullah is busy in the interior of his hut, making preparations +for the following of the fugitives, should his men have failed to +capture them before the morning dawns, let us go back to the three +Englishmen, whom we last saw before the store-house of the village. From +the moment when Colonel Hubbard had pursued the inquisitive Somali, and +had brought him down in his tracks, events had happened with bewildering +rapidity, and indeed Jim, when he had brought the sentry to the ground, +seemed for some moments to be stunned. + +Luckily, however, the others were fully alive to the danger in which +they stood, and well knew that delay would be fatal. + +"Rouse yourself! Quick! We must fly!" cried the colonel, in accents of +alarm. + +"Yes, pull yourself together, for you are the only one who can lead us," +said John Margetson, grasping his young companion by the shoulder to +emphasize his words. "Which way do we go, and where do we fly to?" + +At first the words had fallen upon Jim's ears indistinctly, and as if +far away. But the rough shaking he received, the reminder that the +safety of all the party depended upon himself, aroused him effectually, +and with a start he was himself again. + +"Follow me to the ravine! This way!" he cried; and turning upon his +heel, at once sped down the village street, with his comrades close +behind him. When they reached the open, they swerved sharply to the +left, and soon struck upon the rough path which Jim had used when coming +to rescue his father. Without pause, without even turning his head to +see if the others were following, Jim kept on at his fastest pace, being +spurred to even greater exertions by the shouts and turmoil which he +heard behind him. Not till he had put at least three-quarters of a mile +between himself and the Mullah's village did he venture to come to a +halt, and then it was to throw himself full length upon the grass, with +which the countryside was thickly clad, and lie there breathing heavily, +for the long sprint had told upon him severely. A short space of time, +however, enabled all three to regain their breath once more, and then +they discussed the situation in low tones. + +"What is the move now?" asked the colonel shortly, in the tones of a man +who demands only what is absolutely necessary, and expects to receive a +concise reply. + +"That depends, father. The ravine in which I left one of my followers +with a couple of camels is situated barely a quarter of a mile away, and +if it has proved sufficient to shelter him, it will also afford us a +safe hiding-place. The question is, has he been discovered; and, if he +has, then what shall our action be?" + +"H'm! I understand from what you whispered to me when I was still a +prisoner that the Somali natives are stationed away in this direction," +said the colonel slowly, "and that another force has been despatched to +attack your zareba. That being the case, we cannot hope to move during +the daytime, and our only chance of safety is this ravine of which you +speak. Therefore, I say, lead us to it at once, and should it prove to +be occupied by the enemy, then let us go back on our trail, and while +the Mullah and his following are hastening this way in pursuit, let us +take post in the store-hut again. A few short moments will suffice to +place it in a condition of defence. You tell me that there are +muzzle-loaders there, and that there is an ample supply of ammunition, +and of food and drink. Well and good; our movements are perfectly clear, +and there can be no doubt of the course we must take. Failing the +ravine, we'll look round as desperate men do who are cornered, and like +rats who have no chance of escape; we will make for a spot in which we +can die fighting, and which will give us an ample opportunity of making +the enemy pay dear for their hatred of us." + +"Yes, father," chimed in Jim, catching his enthusiasm. "Should it turn +out that we are compelled to do as you say, I have a little plan by +which we could do even more harm to these warriors; for once safely in +the hut, and our defences prepared, we could set fire to the remainder +of the buildings, and with a few handfuls of gunpowder, which could be +easily spared, blow down any of the surrounding walls which would be +likely to offer covert to the enemy. But the ravine is our object now, +and I propose that we make our way there quietly and without undue +hurry, for were we to run towards it at any great pace, we should, as +likely as not, come suddenly upon one or more of the scouts who are +posted in this direction. That would be worse than finding that the +ravine was already occupied, for a shout would bring scores of the +Somalis about us, and we should be hemmed in in the open. Therefore, let +us take it easy. If only we can choose a defensible site in the ravine, +and finally reach the zareba, we need have little fear, for at any +moment one or other of the forces about to march upon the Mullah may +arrive upon the scene." + +"Put shortly and clearly, like a soldier!" exclaimed the colonel. "Lead +on, my boy, for until we are out of this country you are in command. Not +for one instant will I permit myself to interfere in your task. Carry it +through by yourself, and thereby show your independence and your +manliness. But when in a tight corner and uncertain how to act, do not +fail to take counsel with those whose age and experience may prove of +help, for that is the action of every astute leader." + +By now, all were sufficiently rested and had regained their breath, and +therefore were in a position to take the path once more. Springing to +their feet, they stood for the space of a few seconds to listen to the +distant sounds which still came from the village, and to others which +could be heard away in the open country towards which they were making. +Then they pressed onward in single file, each one with his hand upon his +weapon, his eyes peering into the darkness on every side, and his ears +listening attentively for any noise which might betray the approach of +an enemy. + +They had not gone many yards before Jim suddenly became aware of the +fact that a couple of dim figures were advancing from the opposite +direction, and instantly, without venturing to utter a word of warning, +he stopped abruptly, and catching his father and John Margetson by the +arms, pushed them to the right until they were in the centre of a clump +of thorn-bushes, which grew thickly on either side. Neither of his +companions needed an explanation of such conduct, for they, too, had +caught sight of the strangers, and at once, obeying their leader's +directions, crouched in the undergrowth, Jim and Margetson covering the +strangers. And now as they watched, the soft call of an owl was heard, +and, to the astonishment of Jim, it was repeated by the two men at whom +they were looking. Again the sound broke upon the stillness, coming from +a distance, and then, with the silence of ghosts, some fifteen natives +filed into view, half a dozen being mounted upon ponies. + +"That is evidently their signal," whispered the colonel, "and we must be +careful to remember it, for it may yet be of use to us. But--hush! They +are talking." + +By now the group of warriors had halted upon the path within a few paces +of the fugitives, and, little dreaming that the men they sought were so +close at hand, began to discuss the situation in animated tones. + +[Illustration: THE WARRIORS HAD HALTED UPON THE PATH WITHIN A FEW PACES +OF THE FUGITIVES.] + +"We are bewildered," said one of them, "for some minutes ago a comrade +reached us from the village, telling us that the other white prisoner +had escaped, and had flown beyond the river. But how can that be, for we +know that the zareba away in the desert is still surrounded, and there +can have been no one to help the slave? And yet this man of whom I speak +reports that there is evidence that at least a hundred crossed to the +village on the farther side of the water, and then went their way again +in a southerly direction. The orders are that we at once return, and +make ready to pursue them." + +"It is strange, indeed," chimed in a second. "As I stood at my post, +thinking that nothing would occur to disturb the silence, I heard the +report of a gun, and realized that the enemy was at work again. But I, +too, cannot understand how there can be men abroad to harm us. Perhaps +this is a mistake, and we shall do well to pause ere we draw in our +lines, for it may fall out that this is only a ruse, and that the +escaping prisoner is even now making his way in this direction." + +"Hark!" cried a third at this moment. "I think the sound of a galloping +horseman just now fell upon my ears. Stand still, brothers, and be +silent while I signal to him. If it is not answered, we shall know that +it is this infidel for whom we are waiting; and then----" + +"Ah!" + +Each one of the group gave vent to a guttural exclamation, which denoted +the delight he would feel should his long watch prove successful in the +end. Then all waited in silence, while the man who had last spoken did +as he had suggested. It was weird to hear that low cooing noise +vibrating upon the midnight air, and still more wonderful to note how +accurately the cry of the owl was reproduced. Twice in succession was it +sent out from the throat of the warrior, and then as they listened, +hoping against hope that it would not be repeated from the stranger, the +distant splash and clatter of hoofs striking upon the path and upon the +springy turf at its side ceased suddenly, and a wailing cry came shrilly +in response. Then once more the galloping hoofs could be heard and very +soon a horseman dashed up to the party. Not till he was almost upon +them, and ran the danger of riding them down, did he attempt to pull in +his steed, for the Somali loves a brilliant equestrian, and rather than +save pain and distress to the animal he rides, prefers to pull upon its +mouth until the bit cuts into the flesh, and the poor beast is dragged +upon its quarters. + +"The order is reversed," cried the horseman, flinging his reins upon the +neck of his mount and springing to the ground. "Our father, the Mullah, +has with his great wisdom discovered a ruse, cunningly planned by the +enemy. He finds that they have not fled beyond the river, but in this +direction. He commands, therefore, that you set a careful watch, and +bring the captives to him by dawn. If you are not successful, he +himself will come out in the daylight and lead you. Those are his +orders." + +"And we will see that they are carried out at once," cried one of the +group. "Listen, comrades. It is useless for us to wait here expecting +these infidels, for they would never dare to come by the path. It is in +the bush that we shall find them, and in all probability nearer to the +village than we are now. Let us separate from here, therefore, and ride +away to right and left." + +The remainder of the natives hastily expressed their approval, and as +time was of much importance, and they could not afford to indulge in +delay, they at once parted with one another, and melted into the +darkness as silently as they had come. + +"Things look brighter for us," said John Margetson, in a whisper, +hastily interpreting all that had passed. "These men declare that it is +useless watching the path along which we came, and that is a fact which +will serve our purpose admirably, for, if I remember rightly, the ravine +has its opening close beside a turn in the road, and it, too, should +escape observation. Lead on, Jim, and let us make a run for this +hiding-place." + +Springing to their feet, the trio emerged from the thorn-bushes, and +taking the beaten track again, pressed on at a rapid pace, for, now that +it was certain that their ruse had been discovered, it was of great +importance to them to find a lair at an early moment. Otherwise, however +carefully they hid themselves in the undergrowth, the search-parties +would be certain to discover them at the first streak of daylight, and +then their fate would be settled. Having traversed a few hundred yards, +Jim, who was again leading the party, broke into a walk, and began to +study carefully the left-hand edge of the road. Then he suddenly turned +away on to the grass, and striding forward, halted, as the pale glimmer +of water caught his eye. + +"The well which lies at the entrance to the ravine," he explained in a +whisper. "We pass it by and then sweep round to the right until we are +out of sight of the path. Then I shall give the signal arranged upon +between Ali and myself. Follow closely, and be ready to come to a stop +at any moment." + +He pressed forward, and gradually inclining towards his right till he +judged that the path would no longer be visible had it been daytime, he +stopped and gave vent to a low cough. Again he repeated the signal, and +waited in silence for the answer. So long an interval elapsed that at +last it appeared as if Ali Kumar must have been forced to leave his +post, or as if he had fallen into the hands of the enemy. But just as +Jim was about to repeat the signal for the third time, there was a cough +close at hand, and someone seemed to start from the darkness and stand +beside him. + +"I am here, master, and rejoice at your return," was said in a voice +which was undoubtedly that of Ali Kumar. "Speak! Are you unhurt, and +sound in wind and limb? And is one of the two who accompany you the +Mullah's white slave, the father for whose rescue you yearned?" + +"I am strong and well, and my father is here, Ali. In addition, I have +brought with me a second prisoner, the one whom you saw when you went to +the village, and whom you took to be the colonel. But we have no time to +chatter here, for the Mullah's followers are hotly in chase. It is a +relief to find that you are still in the ravine, for it shows that it +has escaped the search of the enemy. Take us farther into it, and show +us a spot where we can defend ourselves, for you may be sure that these +Somali people will go over the road again, and hunt each corner of the +land as if they were dogs." + +"We have a grand hiding-place, master," was the answer, "though I cannot +say that the ravine will escape a further search. However, there is that +within these walls of earth which will aid us, should we be discovered, +and from which we should be able to drive away every follower that this +tyrant possesses. But, come, follow closely, and do not hesitate to hold +out your hands on either side, for the path is rugged and dangerous, and +in the dark it may well happen that one of you might strike his head +against a rock, or tumble and break a limb." + +"Right! Push on like a good fellow! We'll look to ourselves." + +Ali at once turned about, and pushed on into the ravine at a swift pace, +which taxed the efforts of those who came after him. Striking to the +right, he soon came to a part which was shrouded in even denser +darkness, and then began to mount slightly, following a track which +seemed to cut its way along the side of the tiny valley. + +"Have a care, my masters," he whispered suddenly, turning round when he +had traversed some forty yards of this path. "At this point our road +bends abruptly to the left, and comes to an end at the entrance to an +ancient mine, which your servant discovered by the merest chance. It is +faced outside with hewn blocks of stone, and from that point runs back +for some little way, widening as it does so. Then it divides, and +numerous galleries pass away into the hill, but how far I dare not say, +for I would not explore one of them to save my life. The opening is +close at hand, and when we reach it, I warn you to bend low, for the +archway is of no great height and would injure men of your stature." + +This news was a surprise indeed, and in other circumstances would have +almost taken their breath away. But the excitement of the past few +hours, the numerous incidents which had been crowded into their lives +whilst in the Mullah's village, had left but little room for wonder. +With scarcely a murmur, therefore, at the strange tidings which they had +just heard, they demanded to be led on again, and followed the native, +with only one thought in their minds--the longing to find themselves in +some hiding-place, some haven in which they could take refuge, and, if +necessary, defend themselves against attack. + +Pressing swiftly forward, Ali Kumar swung to the left, and ere long came +to a halt for the second time. + +"We are here, my masters," he said. "Take heed of my words." + +Once more he advanced into the inky darkness, Jim and his two companions +following without hesitation. It was soon evident to all that they had +entered some underground chamber, for each felt a rough archway of hewn +stones above his head, while his surroundings suddenly became even +denser and less visible. Then the pungent smell of smouldering logs fell +upon their nostrils, and in the distance they saw the faint glimmer of a +fire. At the same time they noticed that camels were in the place, for +the irregular outlines of two of these animals could be seen upon the +floor away on the right, while, closer at hand, was a large pile of +newly cut grass with which to feed them. + +Striking across the large entrance-hall of the mine, Ali strode to the +fire and seized a brand, then he raised it above his head, and bade his +followers look about them. + +"I have seen places like this elsewhere," he remarked, "and a hunter +whom I accompanied from the coast informed me that they were the work +of an ancient people who lived and throve hundreds of years ago. They +discovered by their wisdom that gold lay hid among the hills and rocks, +and straightway set their slaves and captives to labour in the mines. +But these races of which my master spoke must have died out, and become +almost forgotten, though the tribes who live in Africa still have +legends which tell of their existence." + +"He speaks the truth," said Colonel Hubbard, going to the fire and +helping himself to a piece of flaring timber, with which the better to +inspect his surroundings. "I, too, have seen such works as these +elsewhere in the continent of Africa, and so greatly has my curiosity +and interest been aroused that I have explored some of the mines, and +have gone to the trouble of hunting up literature upon the subject. It +is currently reported, on the strength of an old legend, that Queen +Sheba herself set sail from a point on the northern coast of Africa, not +far removed from Berbera, and made her historic journey to the court of +Solomon. No doubt her wealth was derived from mines like these, and it +is even possible that as soon as this country is opened up, others may +become rich from the same source, for an expert, who accompanied me when +searching the old workings of which I have spoken, assured me that many +of them were still capable of producing gold. But I must not forget that +we are fugitives, and that even now the Mullah's followers are hunting +for us. The question arises as to whether we should remain here or push +on for Jim's zareba. I shall not venture to offer my opinion until I +have heard him speak, for this is his adventure, and it is my wish that +he should carry it through to the end." + +"And mine, too, colonel!" exclaimed John Margetson. + +"What you say is fair and right, for our young friend has shown most +admirable coolness and a ready wit. We must remember that it was he who +thought of entering the country on your behalf, and that he has already +been the leader of a small following. To deprive him of that post at +this moment would be mean indeed, and would cast a slur upon him. For +myself, I have the utmost faith in his decision." + +At the words Jim flushed red with pleasure, for there was no doubt that +they were said in earnest. + +"It is more than kind of you both," he began, after a short pause, +during which he looked sharply about him. "As you have left this matter +to me, I will settle it, if possible, but I ask you to correct me should +you consider my decision unwise or unreasonable. When I consider that +the surrounding country is overrun by enemies, and that to venture from +this curious place would mean capture, I say at once that we should be +fools even to dream of quitting such a spot. Why, look at it! That low +and narrow arch is just the position which four desperate men should be +able to defend so long as food and drink lasted, and it is my advice +that we at once make plans to keep watch at the entrance, in case of +discovery. Our future actions absolutely depend upon the existence of +sufficient supplies." + +"Then you may call it certain that we have flesh and water to last us +for a month," interposed Ali Kumar. "Look there, master! There we have a +store of food, while yonder, in the corner of this great chamber, is a +pool of clear spring water, into which a stream drains from the hillside +continually, while the overflow disappears through a crevice in the +floor." + +Turning suddenly upon his heel, the native shikari pointed to the two +sleeping camels, and then away to one side of the entrance-hall. Looking +in that direction, and by the aid of the torches, Jim and his comrades +at once caught the reflection from the surface of a large pool of water, +while a moment later, as they stood there listening, the gentle splash +of a falling stream came to their ears. + +"Good!" said Jim, in tones of pleasure. "I reckon that, if we were to +slay one of the beasts, we could cut the flesh into strips, as the Boers +and Red Indians do, and cure it by placing it outside in the sun, or by +drying it over a smoky fire. Yes, in my opinion, that absolutely settles +the question. Our game is to stick to this place through thick and thin, +and resist all attacks; and meanwhile two of our number can easily be +spared to explore some of these workings which I see lead from this +hall. Indeed, the more I think of it, the more certain am I that Ali's +find will prove to be the very thing for us; for, supposing the Mullah +and his men rush the entrance, we can still retire into one of the +tunnels, and make things hot for them." + +"I fully agree with you, my boy," said Colonel Hubbard heartily. "So +long as powder and shot last, we four men--for I count you equal to +ourselves in strength and pluck--should be able to keep the enemy out. +Then, if things get too hot for us, we shall retire, with food, and +water too, if we can carry it, into the old workings and defy the +Mullah's army. Indeed I doubt whether one of them would have the courage +to pursue us underground, for these natives are superstitious fellows, +and fear all kinds of imaginary things. Had it not been for that, they +or their ancestors would have quickly investigated these mines, and +would have turned them to account. But for generations they have been +little better than savages, and have been pleased with an existence +which has been spent partly in agricultural pursuits, and partly in +raids upon their neighbours. And now, how are we to defend the +position?" + +"I've an idea," cried John Margetson, suddenly snatching the torch from +the colonel's hand and advancing to the entrance. "But, first of all, I +should like to know from Ali the condition of affairs outside, for I +confess that, though I have been for three years a slave to the Mullah, +I have never been in this ravine. Indeed, amongst the Somalis, it is +scarcely known, and I doubt whether a single one of them has ventured +into it; for it is considered to be haunted, and that is quite +sufficient to keep all inquisitive people away. But answer my question, +Ali, like a good fellow." + +"The valley is a narrow one, and, indeed, when looked into from the +hills above, is more like a deep pit with steeply sloping sides. A well +stands at the opening, which is but a few yards in breadth. But, farther +in, the walls give back quickly, and then slowly approach again, till a +sharp angle is formed, in which this mine is situated. In the old days, +of which my master's father has spoken, a paved road led down the centre +of the ravine, and ascended easily to this entrance, and by that, no +doubt, the slaves were wont to come to their work. But the store of +water in this chamber has cut its way through the floor, and, issuing +upon this stone, has, in course of time, cut a deep and wide furrow +across it to its bed beyond, from which it flows to the well beside the +village path. For that reason, my masters, I led you by a track which +ascended the slope of the hill." + +"Then my plan should be of service to us," said John Margetson, who had +closely followed Ali's explanation. "It seems to me that when the +morning comes, and we have daylight to help us, we shall have an +uninterrupted view of the whole ravine from this low-arched entrance of +the mine, and shall be able to cover every foot of it with our rifles. +But we must remember that these Somalis possess many firearms, and if +they happen to discover us, and can get rid of their fears of the +supernatural, they will lie upon the slopes about us and pour in their +fire with certain aim, for the range will be a close one. Only then +should we learn that to lie at the entrance would be impossible, for it +would cost us our lives. Do you follow me, my friends?" + +"Quite easily!" exclaimed the colonel. "Had you had the training of a +soldier, you could not have seen the danger more clearly. I am waiting +impatiently to hear how you propose to get over the difficulty, which, +there is no doubt, is a very real one." + +"Then listen, colonel. My idea is a very simple one, and had I not +thought of it, you or your son would quickly have done so. Since life to +us would be impossible, even though we were to lie flat upon the floor, +my suggestion is that we set to work with what implements we have and +dig a trench of sufficient depth just within the opening to allow us to +obtain shelter. The earth which we remove can be thrown up in front, so +that the hole need not be more than three feet in depth." + +"It seems a splendid proposal," cried Jim, who had been listening +attentively. "I notice that the floor here is also paved with slabs of +stone, but the earth beneath is soft, and quite loose, as you will see +for yourself if you look at this large patch here, where the covering +has been removed. That being the case, the sword which I took from the +sentry who was watching over father's prison should be sufficient to +thoroughly turn it up, and the remainder of the work can be finished +with our hands. If we were to set to at it now, the job would be +finished by daylight, and then all would be in readiness in case of +attack." + +For some little time the fugitives stood thoughtfully considering the +question, and then, taking care that the torches should not be brought +too close to the entrance, they went there in a body and closely +inspected the ground. Thrusting the long native sword into a crevice +between two of the paving-slabs, the colonel rapidly levered one of them +up, and lifted it out of its place. Then he put the point of the weapon +upon the bare earth, and pressed firmly upon the handle, with the result +that the blade sank into it easily until the hilt stopped its farther +descent. A gentle tug released it, and, when it was held up to the +light, they saw that it was not even stained. + +"We're in luck!" cried the colonel. "The soil beneath is composed of +pure sand, and can be removed with the greatest ease. Look here!" + +Dropping upon his knees, he thrust his hands into the opening which he +had made and drew them out filled with shining particles. + +"That explains the reason for these slabs, and for the paved road +outside," he said; "for if they were not here, movement would have +become most difficult, and the slaves, as they trudged to and fro with +their bags of quartz or of gold-bearing sand, would have had a weary +time indeed. Let us get to work at once, for the sooner the task is +finished, the better." + +Placing their weapons upon the pavement close at hand, the party at once +began to tear up the square slabs of stone. They found that, when one +had been removed, the rest gave little trouble, and ere many minutes had +passed they had cleared a long and narrow track across the opening of +the mine. Then they began to shovel out handfuls of sand, and did not +desist from their labour until a deep trench had been dug. And now, at +Jim's suggestion, the slabs were relaid at the bottom, while a few were +used as a narrow coping on the summit of the bank which they had thrown +up in front of the trench. Through this four narrow embrasures were left +to accommodate the muzzles of the guns, and were cut so deeply that the +weapons could be fired whilst the heads of the defenders remained +completely under cover. + +Two hours later the arched opening became more visible, and soon the +rays of the sun were pouring down upon the land. + +"I vote for a meal," sang out the colonel cheerily. "We may as well have +it now, while we are undisturbed, for we may not have the opportunity +later, and besides, you remember the old tale that men fight better and +more bravely when they have had all their wants satisfied." + +Nothing loth, for their exertions during the night had sharpened their +appetites, the remainder of the party hastily agreed, and turned with +questioning eyes towards Ali Kumar. The shikari was by no means +disconcerted, and instantly crossing the entrance of the mine to where +the camels lay, he returned with one of the saddle-bags, in which was +stored the greater portion of the food which he and Jim had thoughtfully +brought from the zareba. + +The fugitives had barely done justice to the meal when a low cry from +Ali alarmed them, and, looking out through their embrasures, they caught +sight of a group of dusky figures standing at the mouth of the ravine. +That their eyes were fixed upon the old mine-workings was evident, and +soon there was little doubt that the sight had attracted their +attention. They remained close together, talking and waving their arms, +and then, to the consternation of the defenders, they were seen to be +searching for marks upon the ground. That success was likely to attend +their efforts was without question, and indeed but a little time had +elapsed before one of them gave vent to a shout, and called to his +comrades to join him. An instant later the party separated, scrambling +like so many monkeys up the steep slopes of the tiny valley, and, when +they arrived at the top, each man instantly began to wave his arms +aloft, and shout the news of the discovery to all who were within +hearing. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX + +A STRATEGIC RETREAT + + +There was no doubt that the hiding-place of the fugitives was now +discovered, and that they must prepare to defend their position and +their lives; for, knowing the character of the Mullah, they could not +hope to escape from attack. Sooner or later, and as quickly as they +could overcome their fears of the spot, the fierce followers would +advance into the ravine and pour their bullets into the entrance to the +mine. Indeed, in view of the fanatical hatred in which they held the +infidels, it was more than probable that they would gather together in a +body and throw themselves with the utmost ferocity upon the fugitives. +But we must leave the little party for a few moments and once more fly +to the coast and see how the preparations for invasion were progressing. + +The reader will recollect how a force had collected at Berbera, and, +following in the wake of Jim's expedition, had marched across the +lowlands and reached the highlands by the very pass in which the latter +had so severely defeated the tribesmen. The rendezvous of the British +troops had been Bohotle, which had already been strongly reinforced, and +filled with supplies calculated to last at least six months. As a +strategic base, this was the very best that the country offered in these +parts, for it was practically on the fringe of the Hoad, and guarded the +wells at which the last store of water could be obtained. From that +point onwards a march of at least six days must be contemplated, across +a waterless desert, before the invading force could reach the Mudug +pasture lands in which the Mullah had made his home. From the farther +fringe of the desert, two days at most would be occupied in marching +upon the Mullah's stronghold, and after that much depended upon +circumstances. If the enemy stood and faced the troops boldly, as he had +boasted he would, there was every hope that short work would be made of +his army, and that the same fate would befall him as had happened to the +Khalifa in the Soudan. On the other hand, he or his men might suddenly +become fearful of this small band marching against him, and might fly +into the interior. If that were to happen, much would depend upon +whether the force which had already set out from Obbia, and that which +had left the Abyssinian frontier, were able to cut off his retreat and +compel him to come to action. For the moment, no one could tell how the +affair would turn out, but the troops at Bohotle were in the finest +spirits, and confident of success. Making little of the privations +before them, therefore, they welcomed the notes of the bugle which +sounded the reveillé on the morning selected for the advance, and fell +into their ranks with faces which showed their enthusiasm. Had their +leader but known the precarious position of Jim's zareba, and the fact +that our hero himself, together with three friends, was at that moment +awaiting the attack of the Mullah's whole force, he would have pushed on +with even greater haste, for his men were fit and ready for any +exertions. But though he was aware of the marching of a small expedition +into the interior, and knew what its object was, he had received no +tidings of the fortune or misfortune which had befallen it, and +therefore, in accordance with the arrangements which he had so carefully +drawn out, he did not venture to begin his march across the Hoad before +the date which had been agreed upon. Now, however, the time for action +had arrived, and with a feeling of enthusiasm which was not less than +that displayed by his officers and men, he gave the order to march, and, +having seen the advance guard leave the camp, sat there upon his pony in +the glare of the morning sun, watching critically as each battalion and +each portion of the transport corps passed him. Then waving a farewell +to the unlucky ones who were to remain behind to garrison Bohotle, and +who gave him a ringing cheer in return, he set his beast into a canter, +and in due time took his post at the head of his men. + +The expedition which had been gathering at Obbia and elsewhere on the +Abyssinian frontier had also set out on the date agreed upon, and were +even then pushing forward as rapidly as possible in the hope of coming +to close quarters with the Mullah. + +With this knowledge, let us return to the fugitives in the mine. Seated +upon the edge of their trench, with their faces glued to the embrasures +which perforated the low bank of sand in front of them, our hero and his +comrades had kept their eyes intently fixed upon the Somali scouts, and +had seen, with a thrill of excitement, that these men had already +guessed their whereabouts. + +"They are signalling to the others," said Jim with an effort to keep his +voice steady. "I suppose we must soon expect to have a large force +attacking us." + +"That just depends upon how long it takes for the news to spread," +remarked the colonel, his calmness quite unruffled by the sudden +excitement. "Unless those fellows who are waving and shouting from the +top of the hill can be seen a long distance away, it seems to me that it +may be many hours before the others are informed of our discovery, and +consequently no serious attack will be made upon us for the present." + +"The deduction is a good one, but, unfortunately, the facts are not +precise," interposed John Margetson, in tones which showed that the turn +events had taken had not been without its effect upon him. "I am quite +an old resident in this country, you must remember, and I shall tell you +one of the many things which I have learnt. It is the power these +natives have of transmitting news to one another across long distances. +Those beggars whom you see up there, apparently waving their arms in a +reckless manner, are, nevertheless, fully alert and quite aware of what +they are doing. Just as we in the Navy use semaphores to convey our news +to distant vessels, so do these Somali fellows roughly send their +messages to one another by means of their arms. Look at that chap up +there! He is standing alone on the summit of the hill, so that his +figure is against the sky-line, while his comrades are taking care to +keep well away from him, so that those who are looking on at a distance +shall not be confused. You may take it from me that there is another +native, a mile or more away, upon a second hill, and still another +elsewhere. By their means the order to concentrate at this ravine will +flash across the country, and the swift ponies which these Somalis +possess will quickly bring them to the spot." + +"Then we must make up our minds for an early fight," said Jim calmly; +"and, so far as I can see, we are fully prepared, and have no need to do +more than sit where we are, awaiting developments. We've fed, and feel +contented. For my part, having so recently had a brush with the native +tribesmen, I feel confident that our chances are good, and that, so long +as our ammunition lasts, we can defy these people." + +"That's just the way to take it, my boy," sang out Colonel Hubbard +cheerily. "Recklessness in a soldier is, as a general rule, inexcusable, +for he should take good care to count the odds. But I freely admit that +the forlorn hope has on many occasions gained us a victory, though it is +not advisable. But there is nothing like going into an engagement with +full belief in yourself, for then you have every determination to be +successful. As to the power these beggars have of signalling, it is an +interesting piece of information, and one of which I was quite unaware. +But the news does not absolutely astound me, for I have met with a +similar thing elsewhere. For instance, look at the Kaffirs, who inhabit +a land in which we have been so recently fighting. They have some +extraordinary means of conveying tidings to one another. Indeed, the +result of large engagements, and even of small skirmishes, was known by +these people a hundred and more miles away long before our telegraphists +had been able to send it over the wires. But we must not occupy our +attention with these matters at the present moment, for there is no +doubt that we are in for a struggle. I therefore propose that we inspect +arms at once." + +Acting on this suggestion, all the available weapons were brought +forward and their merits discussed. Then the ammunition was carefully +counted out and put in a convenient spot. It was found that the party +owned two modern rifles which Jim and Ali Kumar had brought with them +from the zareba, and for which a large store of cartridges was +available. Then there was the muzzle-loading gun which John Margetson +had thoughtfully carried away from the store-hut, together with a +quantity of powder and a bag of slugs, while in his belt he still +retained the revolver which Jim had handed to him. As for the colonel, +his son had presented him with the second revolver, so that each one of +the party was fully armed, while there was one firearm over in case of +accidents. In addition, they possessed the long double-handled native +sword, in case of attack at close quarters. + +"It seems to me that we are excellently provided," remarked Jim, when +the inspection was completed. "If we are careful not to throw away a +shot, our ammunition should last for a considerable time. The bag of +slugs will be the first to require replenishing, and in that case I +should imagine a few chips from one of these stone slabs would answer +the purpose just as well. But--I say--look at those fellows!" + +The group of Somali warriors, who had been standing upon the hill-top +signalling to their friends, had become greatly enlarged, and within a +very short space of time some two hundred men were stationed there, +staring down into the ravine, and looking with suspicion at the entrance +to the mine. But as yet not one had dared to enter the haunted valley, +though they did not hesitate to crowd together at the opening, as if in +the act of doing so. + +An hour later their numbers had increased to quite double, while a +movement amongst them showed that some leader was expected. That it +should prove to be the Mullah himself was not wonderful, for he had +promised to help his followers to capture the runaways. His charger was +soon seen upon the sky-line, while a figure stood with the reins hooked +over his arm, listening to the words of his scouts. + +"Now something will happen," said the colonel calmly. "That rogue will +find some means by which to quiet his followers' fears, though I doubt +whether he will dare to lead them in person. See! He is haranguing them, +and to show that there is no danger to be apprehended, he is descending +into the valley alone. By Jove! With those rifles we could knock him +over to a certainty. But fair play's a jewel, and for myself, I confess +that I don't care to fire at a man unless I know that he is about to do +the same to me; it's too much like murder to sight a weapon for a native +clambering down the slope of a hill and pull the trigger on him. All the +same, the prejudice is a silly one, for were we to drop him in his +tracks, the chances are that his followers would decamp, and in that +case the expeditions which are about to march into the country would +find that they had little work to do. Look at the ruffian!" + +Clambering down the steep slope of the hill, it was not long before the +Mullah had gained the centre of the ravine, where he stood for some few +moments, observing the paved road which traversed it. Then he turned to +his followers, and called loudly to them to come and join him. + +"Slide down, and have no fear!" he shouted in reassuring tones. "The +story that this place is haunted is an old woman's tale, made only to +frighten the children. But you are brave men, and there are your +enemies, the infidel dogs, who have had the insolence to come hither. By +Allah! I swear to you that no harm shall befall you, and I call upon you +once more to join me, and then to rush with all your fury upon the +mine." + +For a short space of time it was clear that his followers hesitated, but +on the Mullah's repeating his assurances, they began to descend one by +one, and then came sliding and running down in a body. Very soon they +were collected together in the centre of the ravine, and at a shout from +their leader they advanced towards the mine. + +"Now, Jim," whispered the colonel, "we're in your hands, for you are the +senior officer at present." + +"Then hold your fire till I give the word," was the calm response, "and +then you can blaze into them for all you are worth." + +Standing on the stone pavement at the bottom of their trench, each of +the defenders carefully adjusted his weapon, Jim and Ali taking care to +throw open the catch of their magazines, while John Margetson placed the +spare revolver close at hand, so that, when his gun was discharged, he +would still have something to fall back upon. Then, in absolute silence, +and without allowing any portion of their figures to be observed, they +waited with fast-beating hearts for the attack of the enemy. It came +even sooner than they had expected, for, spurred on by the Mullah's +words of encouragement, and by their own fanatical hatred of the +infidel, the mass of Somali warriors came bounding towards the mine, +those on the outer edge crushing towards the centre in their desire to +take a part in the battle. As a result, they became closely jammed +together, and arrived at the arched entrance in this formation. + +"Fire!" cried Jim, when they were only a few yards away. + +Instantly the guns of the defenders rang out and poured a perfect hail +of missiles into the enemy. At such a close range it was impossible to +miss one's aim, and therefore the losses sustained by the Somalis were +very great. Indeed, so unexpected was the volley, and so disconcerted +were they at the fall of their comrades, that all at once stopped their +mad rush at the mine, and stood there aghast at the slaughter, and +hesitating how to act. The breathing-space thus afforded was taken full +advantage of by Jim and his friends, for, instantly reloading, they sent +a second volley into the attackers. Its effect was excellent, for, +finding that more of their fellow-warriors were falling, and that as yet +not one of them had caught sight of the enemy, the Somalis gave vent to +a howl of dismay, and retreated at the top of their speed. Nor did they +pause until they had clambered from the ravine to the top of the slope +outside. + +"That will make them think twice about the matter," said the colonel, +with a chuckle. "And just look at their leader! He took particular care +not to join in the attack, and was the very first to scramble away to a +safe distance. However, a humbug, such as he is, will soon stir up the +tribesmen again by reminding them that we are few in numbers, and that +the score against us is a heavy one. Then, no doubt, we can expect a +second attack, and, if I know their wily commander at all, he will adopt +different tactics." + +How true the prophecy of the colonel was destined to be was soon found +out, for, after retiring out of sight for a short period, the Somalis +again appeared on the surrounding heights. Then they dropped silently +into the ravine, and, lying down in the long grass at the foot of the +hills, began to pour a hot fire into the mine. Soon, indeed, the air was +alive with their slugs and bullets, which came whistling in through the +opening. But, thanks to the trench which John Margetson had suggested, +the defenders ran no danger of being hit, but sat down at the bottom, +placidly listening to the uproar. For half an hour the fusillade +continued without cessation, and, indeed, at the end of that time, +became even louder and fiercer. + +"It sounds as though they had been strongly reinforced," remarked Jim, +whose coolness had never for a moment deserted him. "I'll just take a +look through one of our peep-holes and see what is happening, for it +would never do to make the sudden discovery that they were rushing upon +us again." + +Accordingly, taking every precaution not to expose himself to the +bullets, he cautiously raised an eye to one of the embrasures, and +closely inspected the ravine. He found that what he had thought had just +occurred, for even then scores of men were climbing over the hill-tops, +to slide at once into the valley beneath. Down below a large force of +Somalis was gathered, and these, it was easy to perceive, were filled +with excitement, and eager for the attack. They were shouting to one +another, and brandishing their weapons. + +"We can expect a second rush in a few moments," said Jim, sinking into +the trench again; "there are scores of the enemy, and it seems to me +that we shall be wise if we at once take steps to arrange for a retreat. +I cannot think that our four weapons will be sufficient to keep them +out. No doubt we shall kill a number of them, but all are in such +desperate earnest that those who survive will come on, in spite of their +losses, and once they get to close quarters with us, we shall be done +for. I suggest, therefore, that a couple of us go and investigate those +passages, while the others keep watch here. Then, as soon as the advance +begins, a shout will bring us together again." + +"A good soldier should always arrange for an orderly retirement," +remarked the colonel thoughtfully, "for it is not always wise to burn +your boats behind you, or destroy your bridges. I must confess that in +this case we shall be wise to do as my son suggests, for it will help us +to fight the harder if we possess the knowledge that retreat is +possible. At the same time, I am quite sure that we are men enough to +stand to our guns to the very last, and, in spite of a means of +retirement, to stick to our position so long as it is tenable." + +"Hear, hear!" sang out John Margetson, who, as the danger increased, +seemed to become more cheerful. "Both of you have made most excellent +proposals, and, as they do not need seconding, I shall show my approval +by at once volunteering to form one of the exploring party." + +"Then Jim had better go with you, my friend. I will remain here with +Ali, and when you hear a shout, come back to us as fast as you can." + +The question having thus been settled, and it being evident that there +was no time for delay, the two who had been selected for the enterprise +left their weapons on the edge of the sandbank, and, crawling from the +trench, crept to the left, where they were quickly out of the range of +the bullets. Then they sprang to their feet and ran to the fire, which +still smouldered, and, snatching a couple of the largest brands, stepped +towards the many openings which ran from the entrance-hall into the +workings of the mine. + +"Which one?" asked John Margetson, holding his torch aloft. "All are of +exactly the same size and appearance, so that it is difficult to make a +choice." + +"Then I vote for the central arch," cried Jim. "Come along." + +Darting across the intervening space, which was swept by a cloud of +bullets, they plunged into the dark opening, and then, with firebrands +held well in front of them, advanced at as rapid a pace as possible. +They found themselves in a tunnel, which was of sufficient height to +allow them to stand easily. A glance on either side showed them that the +walls were composed of bare rock, or of sandstone, while the roof was +supported at short intervals by buttresses of stone on either hand, and +by a girder of the same material stretched from summit to summit. Like +the hall and the ravine outside, the floor was paved with square blocks, +but in parts these had caved in, and the recesses were filled with dark +pools of water. Elsewhere falls of the roof and of the sides had taken +place, and obstructed the passage, but in no place did it close it +completely. Indeed, in view of the fact that hundreds of years had +probably passed since the workings had been constructed, their condition +was marvellous, and reflected the greatest credit upon those who had +slaved at their construction. + +But Jim and his comrade had little time for observing all these points, +for they were conscious that their pressing needs would admit of no +delay. Avoiding, therefore, the depressions and crevices in the floor, +and clambering over the mounds formed by fallen rocks and _débris_ from +the roof above, they pushed on at a pace which brought them many a +bruise from projecting obstacles. But they never seemed to heed them, +and, scrambling along, had quickly traversed some two hundred yards of +the tunnel. At this point they came to a crossway, where a passage ran +to right and left. + +"I should think that our best plan will be to take the direct road," +said Jim, coming to a halt. "However, we will just see where these two +tunnels lead to. You take that on the right, John, while I go to the +left. If after walking some twenty yards you find nothing extraordinary, +return at once, and meet me here." + +Without discussing the question further, they separated at once. When +they met again in the space of a couple of minutes, each reported that +the crossway opened into a parallel tunnel a few yards away, and into +still another farther on. + +"Then it looks as though the openings from the entrance-hall ran on into +the hill, diverging slightly, and connected at this point by a +cross-cut. Evidently our path lies right ahead." + +"You've hit the right nail this time, without a doubt," answered John +Margetson. "Forward is the word." + +When they had advanced some two or three hundred yards farther, the +explorers suddenly came to a spot where the workings converged, and here +they found a chamber which was larger even than that at the entrance. +From it again there were many exits, into which they dared not venture. +However, they had already gone far enough to learn that, should the +enemy prove too strong for them, they had a way of retreat which would +enable them to elude pursuit for some time. + +"I doubt even whether these Somali beggars would dare to follow us as +far as this," said John Margetson; "and if they do, I think we can +guarantee that they shall be thoroughly scared. But I am firmly of +belief that by pushing on we should come to an exit on the other side of +this enormous hill, for the air here is perfectly pure and good, which +is wonderful, when you come to consider the age of these workings. It +looks, in fact, as though there was a perfect system of ventilation, a +precaution which the ancients were too wise to neglect. Hullo! That was +a shout." + +At that moment a loud cry reached their ears, the sound, indeed, seeming +to be collected together and enlarged by the solid walls of the mine. +There was no doubt that it came from the two defenders who were watching +the Mullah's followers, and at once Jim and his companion took to their +heels, and raced back at their fastest pace. Arrived at the +entrance-hall, they flung their brands into the fire and darted across +the floor to the trench, in which they at once took their places. + +"You have returned in the nick of time," remarked the colonel, in +unruffled tones, "for those fellows outside are on the point of +attacking. You can hear for yourself that the firing has ceased. But +tell me, what luck have you had?" + +"Splendid, father. We've explored the central tunnel, and find that it +runs on for a considerable distance before coming to a meeting-place in +the centre of the hill, from which a second series of workings emerge. +If we have to fly, there will be plenty of room in which to play +hide-and-seek, and always a chance of turning upon our followers and +punishing them." + +"Then we put the command in your hands as before, my boy, and leave it +to you to give the word to retire. But, remember, all of you, that +ammunition is valuable, and that you must not forget to carry every +cartridge away with you." + +His last words were interrupted by a perfect babel of sounds which came +from the ravine, and each of the defenders at once sprang to his +position, and, looking through the embrasure, saw that the enemy had +begun to advance. This time they had taken the precaution to observe +some order, and collecting together into a long, tongue-like band, came +rushing up the central road towards the entrance of the mine. As before, +Jim waited calmly until they were within easy range, and then gave the +word to fire. Immediately a volley flashed from the sandbank, and a +number of the natives fell. Then the defenders emptied their magazines +into the closely packed ranks, and set to work with all haste to load +again. For the second time they repeated the process, causing great loss +to the enemy. But, in spite of that fact, the latter still rushed +forward with marvellous pluck, and with loud shouts. Leaping over the +bodies of the fallen, shrieking with pain, and tumbling headlong to the +ground in their haste, they struggled fiercely to get at the infidels. +Arriving at the deep cutting which the stream had made through the +pathway, the foremost leapt it successfully; but those behind were not +able to see it till right upon its edge, and, pushed by those who +followed them, fell into the abyss with wild shrieks. Soon some thirty +of them had met with this fate, and the gulley was full to overflowing. +But their comrades never paused, never even hesitated, but, roused to +fury by the loss of their friends, and by the stinging hail of bullets +which still swept amongst them, came on with fierce determination, and +in such huge numbers that it quickly became clear that there was no +stopping them. + +"Give them a last volley!" shouted Jim, raising his voice above the din. +"Now, all together, and afterwards let us bolt." + +Waiting till all were prepared, the four defenders rapidly emptied their +magazines into the enemy, until the barrels of their weapons were so hot +that they blistered their fingers. Then snatching up the piles of +ammunition which they had placed close at hand, they scrambled from the +trench, and, running swiftly across the entrance-hall, dived into the +central tunnel, for all the world like rabbits taking to their burrows. + +"Halt!" cried Jim sharply, at this moment. "Without a torch we shall be +lost. Wait here till I get one." + +Returning, he ran to the fire, and quickly secured four flaming brands, +then he rejoined his comrades, noticing as he was about to enter the +workings that the cries of the attackers had suddenly ceased, and that +they had all come to a halt outside the mine, as if too fearful to enter +it. But scarcely had the fugitives traversed more than a hundred yards +of the tunnel, when loud shouts and cries again rent the air, and being +magnified by the enclosing walls, came echoing and reverberating into +the working. Indeed, the natives had at last overcome their +superstitious terrors, and, rendered desperate by the baffling tactics +of the infidels, had flowed into the entrance-hall till it was packed +with humanity. Then a second pause ensued, for the passages which led on +into the hill looked dark and forbidding. However, a leader was +forthcoming, who, imitating Jim's example, snatched at one of the fiery +brands, and, having peered into each one of the tunnels in succession, +finally waved to his comrades to divide and search all of them. + +Meanwhile the fugitives had sped on without a pause, and very soon +arrived at the large chamber, which seemed to be the heart of the +workings. And here they halted to listen for sounds of the pursuers. + +"It is perfectly clear," said the colonel, seating himself to regain his +breath, "that these fellows have overcome their fears, and are in hot +chase. It occurs to me at the same time that the movement we have made +was a most excellent one, for the very fact that there are so many +channels leading into the hill will cause the Somalis to divide up into +parties. Then in the darkness they will lose one another, and in that +way will fall easy victims to our rifles, if they happen to come up with +us. My advice is that we sit here for a little while, and then take +matters more easily, for we shall require all our powers later. Perhaps +we shall find an exit, and in that case we shall be obliged to travel +fast to the zareba." + +Accordingly the party crossed to the other side of the chamber, and +entered the tunnel which stood opposite to that from which they had just +emerged. Then lowering their torches, so that the flames could not be +easily observed, they sat down to await events. Presently they became +aware that some, at least, of the natives were close at hand, and +prepared to push on, or repel the pursuers, as circumstances should +dictate. But there was no need for interference on their part, for as +they peered into the depths of the chamber, the glowing end of a +firebrand suddenly appeared, the feeble light enabling them to perceive +that five men only accompanied the bearer. They were on the point of +levelling their rifles at these intruders when there was a shout from +one of the side tunnels, and before the onlookers could realize what was +about to happen, a second party of Somalis rushed into the open space, +and mistaking the first for the flying infidels, threw themselves with +spear and sword upon them. + +"I almost expected a catastrophe of that sort," whispered the colonel; +"and it is very probable that it may occur elsewhere, for our pursuers +are too angry to be cautious. I think we may safely leave them to +themselves and push on now deeper into the mine." + +Acting upon this advice, the party stole silently away into the +darkness, leaving the Somali warriors struggling desperately with one +another. A trudge of nearly half a mile brought them to a point which +seemed to be the farthest limit of the mine, for here galleries ran in +every direction, and a glance at the rough surfaces of the walls showed +that the workings had been deserted in a hurry, and not because gold was +no longer to be found. Indeed, had it been possible, the three +Englishmen would have gladly stayed to investigate the matter, for there +were numerous interesting relics scattered about. But to delay then +might have brought disaster to the party, and, therefore, they at once +began to search for an exit. + +"I feel sure we are not far from the open air," cried Jim, suddenly +coming to a stop in the centre of a wide space, from which the tiny +galleries cut into the hill. "Come here, and you will feel quite a +draught blowing upon your heads, and----By Jove! Look at my torch!" + +He held the brand above his head, and as he did so the dull red end +began to glow brightly, and then, fanned by an invisible stream of air +which played upon it, it burst into a brilliant flame, which effectually +lit up the surroundings. + +"A grand find, my boy!" shouted the colonel, for the first time showing +some trace of excitement. "By the aid of that flaring brand we shall +find our way to liberty. Push on, and when you see the light die down, +you will know at once that we are moving in the wrong direction." + +Jim needed no further encouragement, but, with his rifle grasped in one +hand, strode forward, keeping his eye fixed upon the torch. And all the +while he could feel the cold air blowing upon his face as it rushed into +the workings through the ventilating shaft. Soon he came to a large +square orifice, and entering it without hesitation, he went on till +almost stopped by the pressure of the atmosphere. Following him closely, +his companions were struck with wonder at the draught and watched in +amazement as their torches kindled even brighter and sent long flames to +the roof above. + +"It is almost beyond belief," murmured John Margetson, breaking in upon +the silence, "and I cannot realize how it is that the ventilation of the +mine is managed. In a coal-pit there would be an up-cast and a down-cast +shaft, with some arrangement at the former to cause the air to rush in +that direction. But here we have come across nothing of the sort." + +"It would take a week to discover the cause," answered the colonel, "but +I have been through similar mines, and have come to the conclusion that +the people who constructed them were most capable engineers. Hullo! +What's that?" + +As he spoke, the party came to an abrupt halt, and gave vent to cries of +delight, for away ahead of them was a square patch of light, the goal +for which they had been aiming. + + + + +CHAPTER XX + +BACK TO THE COAST + + +"The exit! A means by which we may make good our escape from the mine, +leaving the enemy utterly baffled!" shouted the colonel, as the square +of brilliant light suddenly came into view, permitting, for the second +time since his rescue from the Mullah's village, his usual composure to +give way to the excitement of the moment. "Phew! What a breeze! It is as +much as one can do to force a path towards the opening, for the draught +comes singing in like a magnified gale, and fairly makes one stagger." + +"Clever beggars, those old fellows who engineered the concern," gasped +John Margetson, turning his face from the stream of air, so as to +breathe more freely. "This is undoubtedly their ventilating shaft; and, +George! how fond they must have been of a breeze. The hottest day in the +tropics would be cool if spent in this tunnel, while in the winter----" + +"A case of freezing," laughed the colonel. "The gale fairly sweeps and +rushes in, and the atmosphere must reach to the farthest corner and nook +of the mine, and clear it thoroughly. It is marvellous." + +"It is fine, I admit," said Jim at this moment, joining in the +conversation curtly; "but talking will not help us to get away from +those fellows--will it, father?" + +"Quite right! The lad speaks the truth, and we deserve to be reproved," +was the smiling answer. "There is a time for everything, and at the +present moment we have to think of our lives, and of the comrades whom +we hope to join. But I will return here one of these days, when the +Mullah has had his licking; and then how I shall enjoy exploring every +inch of this place! But forward! What is the next move, Jim?" + +"Let us get to the opening and take a look out, father. Till then I +cannot say. We may find that the Somalis are already there, expecting +our arrival, and in that case we shall have to retire to the workings +again. If not, we must hold a council, and discuss what we must do to +get to the zareba. Of course, we might make for the coast alone; but, +then, that would be leaving my friend in the lurch, for he is waiting +for us patiently." + +"It would be the act of cowards," cried the colonel. "Our duty is to +save ourselves, and to join hands with this gallant young fellow who has +accompanied you into the country. Let us get ahead, my dear lad, for I +must admit that this tunnel, at first so cool and invigorating, is now +somewhat too cold for my liking. And then, the breeze comes in with such +a rush that it is difficult to breathe, and talking is no easy matter." + +"Then on we go," said Jim shortly, turning to the opening at once, from +which, like his companions, he had been glad to keep his face away. + +With torches held aloft, and spouting long streams of brilliant flame +from their glowing ends, the little party sped on up the incline which +led to the patch of daylight, their thoughts all the while bent upon the +possible chances of ultimate escape. All realized that they had perhaps +a thousand fanatical foes to deal with, and that many, many miles of +rolling country intervened between themselves and the zareba away in +the desert. Could they hope to make their way there without discovery? +Was it not more than likely that before their weary feet had carried +them more than a tenth of the distance, these fierce warriors would be +upon them? But there was little use in imagining such things, and as +nothing could be known for certain till the opening of the air-shaft was +reached, they all hastened forward at as fast a pace as possible, +gasping for air, with bodies leaning forward upon the column of wind +pouring into the mine, fighting their way through its very centre. + +"Hurrah!" cried Jim at length, as his hand came in contact with the +solid arch of masonry which marked the entrance. "The open sky again. +And now for a look round." + +"Be cautious, master," came Ali's voice at this moment. "You have told +me that these men who cry to Allah have scattered in search of the +runaways. It may well be that some are even now close at hand, and will +see you the instant your head appears. Be careful, therefore, I beg of +you, for we cannot hope for such good fortune a second time." + +"He needs no warning, this leader of ours," said John Margetson, halting +beside our hero. "Has he not already shown his cuteness? Leave him to +manage the matter alone, friend Ali." + +"The words are filled with truth, sahib, and I am sorry," answered the +native follower humbly. "I should know of his caution and wisdom even +better than you do, seeing that I have marched beside him for many a +day. But this danger has made me nervous. Never in my life before have I +been in such peril, not even when the tribe attacked us in the pass on +our way hither. Let my fears be my excuse, and forgive me. From this +moment I shall maintain silence." + +Jim very cautiously looked about him, pushing the blades of grass aside +to enable him to see clearly. As there were no trees or bushes to +obstruct the view, he was soon able to inform his comrades that not a +single one of the enemy was in sight. + +"They are all on the other side of the hill, rushing into the workings," +he said with a smile of relief; "and now it becomes a question as to +whether we should move in the direction of the desert, or whether we +should remain here till matters have calmed down. This is too serious a +decision for me to arrive at alone, and therefore I call all of you in +to help me." + +"Hum, a very difficult situation," said the colonel, pushing his way to +the front and carefully surveying the surrounding country. "I see hills +and valleys for a few miles, and then, as you have told me, a dead level +extends to the zareba. This is the most dangerous point in our escape, +for if we leave the mine, we throw comparative safety away. On the other +hand, we cannot hope to remain here for long. Our provisions will soon +become exhausted, and, moreover, once having overcome their fears, and +having dared to enter the workings, these Somali warriors will penetrate +to its farthest corners in search of their prisoners. Be sure of this: +if the news of an advancing English column has angered the Mullah, this +impudent and successful attempt to rescue prisoners from under his very +eyes will rouse him to fury, and he will turn aside from the invading +force in order to capture us. I confess that I hesitate. Here is a haven +for a time. Out there, sunny and sweet as the country looks, it promises +disaster." + +"He who hesitates is lost," whispered John Margetson in his ear. "Listen +to me, colonel; and you, too, Jim. To remain here is impossible. That +is how I read it, for in an hour we shall be discovered by the +searchers. Therefore, there can be no question. That is our way. +Forward, my friends." + +He pointed across the rolling expanse of grass, and would have emerged +from the shaft, had not Jim detained him. + +"Steady," he said quietly. "To hop out there into the open may be to +commit the greatest of errors. A glance at you would convince one of the +enemy that you are the escaping sailor; and then what a shout there +would be!" + +"Well? That would be the end of the matter." + +"Quite so," responded Jim coolly. "But look at me. Am I not like the +average Somali warrior?" + +"Jove! The lad has a way to help us," shouted the colonel. "Silence +while we listen to him. A Somali, my boy? Why, your disguise is +undoubtedly excellent." + +"Then I shall take advantage of the fact, father. Stay here, all of you, +while I slip out. If I am seen, I shall be just one of the Mullah's +followers, and all the while shall be on the look-out so as to see how +we can best escape. Ta, ta. Wait till I return." + +Before they could stretch out a friendly arm to detain him, Jim was +outside the shaft, and was running up the slope of the hill. Anxiously +did his comrades await his return, and more than once they were tempted +to throw caution to the winds, and, giving way to their impatience, to +rush into the open in search of their leader. But the calmness of the +colonel held them back. + +"Trust the lad," he said, his head held proudly in the air. "He has done +as well as any man, and has shown that he has pluck and plenty of +brains. Give him a full half-hour before we make any movement. Ah, what +are those sounds?" + +"The dogs in search of us," said Ali, placing his hand to his ear, and +facing down the shaft. "These walls carry the sound as does the tube +which they have in Aden. Have I not listened at one end to hear the +sound of a comrade's voice? Have little fear, masters, for those men +will hardly dare to follow us into this shaft." + +"Hush! Here is someone coming towards us!" exclaimed the colonel, in a +warning whisper at this moment. "I think it is Jim; but it may not be. +He is evidently hunting for the entrance." + +"It is the lad, sure enough," cried John Margetson, staring out of the +shaft. "Look at the condition of his linen clothing. No self-respecting +follower of Allah would dare to go abroad in such a dress. He is +travel-soiled, and there can be no mistake as to his identity. I shall +call to him." + +Thrusting his arm clear of the opening, he waved it, and called gently +to Jim. A second or two later Jim appeared at the entrance of the shaft, +his dusky features radiant with smiles. + +"Good news!" he cried eagerly. "Not one of the enemy on this side, so +far as I have been able to observe, but all are in the ravine beyond, +trying to screw up their courage to enter the mine as some of their +comrades have done." + +"Then they do not suspect that we are on the farther side," said the +colonel, in tones of relief. "Nevertheless, the question of escape is +still one of difficulty." + +"I think not, father," answered Jim quietly. "We have a clear field +before us, and scarcely forty miles to cover." + +"But, good gracious! that will take us a day and a half at least," cried +his parent. + +"On foot--yes," said Jim gaily. "But on horseback, say a day at the +most." + +"Horseback! What do you mean?" burst in those who were listening to him, +eagerly pressing about their young leader. + +"Listen," was the smiling rejoinder. "I said that the followers of the +Mullah were on the farther side of the hill, but I did not tell you that +they had taken their animals to the ravine. Obviously, in such a small +place, there would some overcrowding, for there is not too much room for +the warriors themselves." + +"Then where are they, my boy?" demanded the colonel. + +"Come with me," was Jim's quiet answer, "but be careful not to show +yourselves over the corner of the hill. The horses are grazing quietly +in a little nook, a small valley which cuts into this long hill, and +they are practically unwatched. That was a point about which I took a +deal of trouble, and I ascertained without a doubt that only one man was +stationed as a guard over the beasts. He, like his comrades, is all +eagerness to help in our capture, and as I watched him, he was for ever +staring into the ravine, and shouting words of encouragement to his +fellows. He is the only man we have to fear at the present moment." + +"Then he is the only one who shall taste one of our bullets," said John +Margetson brusquely. "This fellow must not be allowed to give the alarm, +and though I do not like the action, still it is imperative that we +should shoot him. Otherwise he will give the alarm, and we shall have +the whole host galloping after us." + +"Running, you mean," replied Jim, with an easy laugh. "You see, we want +more than a few ponies. A dozen are useless to us, for the remainder +would carry the enemy in the same direction, and a long chase is a hard +one, you know." + +"But you don't propose----" gasped the colonel, staring at his son in +bewilderment. + +"Oh, yes, I do, father! If we are to escape, we shall have to take the +bulk of the ponies for a few miles with us. A mile would not do, for +these natives can run very fast. But after, say five miles, all but a +very few would have fallen off, and the remainder we could easily +account for. If we ride away, and leave the animals to the enemy, we +shall be captives before the afternoon." + +For a minute all stared at their young leader in amazement at the daring +of his plan; then smacking his thigh, as if to give expression to his +thoughts, John Margetson broke the silence. + +"The Mullah will die of rage!" he gasped, while a smile of delight lit +up his sun-tanned features. "Never before has he been so treated, and +now to see his prisoners ride away, taking every horse he possesses, +well----" + +Evidently the thought was too much for the gallant mate, for he lapsed +into silence, and writhed, as if his feelings were too much for him. As +for the colonel, with the keenness of a trained soldier, he at once +grasped the importance of the proposed movement. + +"It is a capital plan," he said, with decision. "Every pony must come +with us, and this fellow who watches them must be shot without mercy. +Give me your rifle, Jim. I am too old a campaigner to have any qualms, +and in such a case as this the act is justified. Now, what next?" + +"Forward," said Jim quietly. "When we reach the top of the hill, Ali +will stop where he is, and we others shall turn to the right. Thirty +yards from Ali, John Margetson will come to a stop; another interval, +and father will do the same. All will wait till I am in position. I +shall wave my arm, and then we shall all move to the ponies. Select a +couple of the finest, and tie their halters together. Then mount, and +set the remainder in motion. They are well-trained beasts, and will give +us no difficulty." + +A glance was sufficient to show that his comrades comprehended his +words, and at once turning, Jim led the way to the top of the rise. + +"Ah!" an exclamation burst from all of the fugitives at the sight of +some two hundred horses grazing in a small valley below. + +"All the mounted men that the Mullah happens to have within call," +murmured John Margetson. "No doubt the remainder are at the attack of +the zareba. Now for the fellow who is looking after the horses." + +"He has gone to take a look at his comrades," said Jim. "Forward again. +Ali, you stay where you are." + +Turning to the right, the three Englishmen at once hurried forward, and +obedient to the orders of their young leader, John Margetson and the +colonel halted when they had gained the correct distance. Jim kept on +till he was at a point slightly beyond the horses. Waiting only to make +sure that the animals were now surrounded, he waved his hand to his +comrades and at once walked quietly towards two spirited-looking ponies, +which promised to be amongst the strongest and swiftest there. + +"Likely little beggars," he said to himself. "If they will allow me, I +will become their owner for the time being." + +A few paces brought him beside one of the animals, and with a bound he +was in the saddle. Then grasping the halter of the other, he made a turn +with it through the bridle of the pony he rode. Then he began to round +up that part of the troop between him and his comrades. + +"Look out!" came a shout in the colonel's voice; and turning swiftly, +Jim saw a figure bounding across the grass towards him. Snap, bang! went +a rifle, and a bullet discharged by the colonel whistled past the head +of the pursuing Somali warrior. Bang! A second had no better effect, and +ere a third could be attempted the man was upon our hero. Quick as +lightning Jim dived his hand into his waistcloth, only to discover that +his father had his revolver. He was apparently unarmed, while the Somali +bore a flashing spear, and a huge sword at his girdle. "Ah, the sword!" +thought Jim, and instantly recollected that he had thrust the weapon +into the belt tied about his left forearm. + +How it happened Jim never knew, but in the shortest space of time he was +riding forward, driving part of the troop before him, while behind, +huddled upon his face upon the grass, was the Somali warrior, a murmured +"Allah" on his dying lips. + +"A great stroke! Bravely and coolly done!" shouted the colonel, who had +looked on anxiously, expecting the worst to happen, and blaming himself +for his want of skill. "A running man is no easy object when one is +mounted upon a fresh pony such as his; but all's well. It was a stroke! +The lad has a head, and can look well to himself. I thought the spear +was through him, and almost shouted, but he ducked at the very instant, +and then--ah, I saw the blade go well home. But those fellows may have +heard the shots, and if so, we shall soon be followed." + +"Forward!" came Jim's voice at this moment; and instantly all began to +urge the troop of animals into a trot. Leaping from their saddles, they +picked stones from the earth and then pelted the beasts, shouting at +them till their trot broke into a gallop. + +"Now keep them to it, and if they try to stop, make a rush at them," +shrieked John Margetson, sitting his pony in an attitude which showed +clearly that he was no horseman. "Forward! To the zareba!" + +It was a time of wild excitement, and each of the fugitives entered into +the spirit of it thoroughly. Exhilarated by the quick movement over the +rolling hills and valleys, with the smell of the horses in their +nostrils, and the dust of four hundred heels in their eyes, they raced +over the grass, driving the frantic animals before them. A thunderous +sound filled the air as the animals galloped, but loud as it was it +failed to drown that shout which came from behind. + +"Allah! Allah! They have escaped us, and are riding away! Back! Leave +the mine, and run! Money and a high place will be given to those who +come up with the infidel!" + +It was the Mullah who had heard the shots aimed at the sentry, and had +climbed to the top of the hill to ascertain the cause. + +"Our friend, the Mullah, my late master," shouted the colonel, looking +grimly over his shoulder. "Let them run, for to those who happen to come +in touch with us we will give more than the Mullah can promise. Death to +them, my friends! Forward, for liberty and comrades are there." + +Waving his weapon in the air, he looked at each of his comrades in turn, +and smiled at them encouragingly. Then, with a shout at the animals +directly in front of him, he sent them ahead at an even greater pace. + +An hour later, when the little band of fugitives turned in their +saddles, and brought the horses to a standstill, not one of the Mullah's +followers was in sight, all having fallen out from the chase. + +"We'll give the poor beasts a breather now," said Jim, dropping to the +ground and going to his father's side. "We have put a good ten miles +between us and the enemy, and I fancy we can say 'good-bye' to them." + +"But there must be no delaying," burst in John Margetson. "Though we +have prevented immediate pursuit, there will be other horses in the +village, and by now these are tearing in this direction. I advise that +when we have waited for some ten minutes we select the best of these +animals, and then press them forward. They are fine and wiry beasts, and +will make little of the forty miles if ridden fairly. We will loosen the +girths, and throw away all but the saddle and bridle, so as to relieve +them of any unnecessary weight. Then, by changing from animal to animal, +say every half-hour, we shall be able to reach the zareba without more +than an occasional halt." + +Acting upon his words, the little band at once set about discarding +those of the ponies which seemed to be in bad condition. Twenty of the +finest were kept, and having been relieved of all forage-bags and other +impediments, were driven ahead of the others. + +"The tracks will be plain to the enemy," said Jim, looking at the wide +trail of trampled grass which the troop had left behind it; "so it will +be useless to hide these remaining animals by driving them into a +ravine. After all, till someone can escort them back, or the Mullah's +men can run as far as this, the horses will be of no service to them. +Are we all ready? Then on we go." + +Leaving the bulk of the horses panting upon the road, they set off +again, and did not draw rein save to change from one animal to another, +or to give the beasts a few moments' rest. By evening they were +cantering over the sandy stretch of desert, and ere long they were in +sight of the oasis where Tom and the remainder of the expedition had +been quartered. + +"Now what shall we find?" said Jim, coming to a halt, and shading his +eyes. "The falling sun makes it difficult to see, but everything seems +quiet over there, and I can catch sight of none of the enemy." + +"An ominous sign," whispered John Margetson. "What if these fanatics +have butchered every one of those who accompanied you from the coast?" + +"Then we must act alone and for ourselves," said the colonel. + +"There will be no need, my masters," came a voice at their elbows at +this moment. "Your servant, Ali Kumar, is used to these desert sunsets, +and can see where others are blinded by the glare. A flag flies from the +summit of one of those trees, and men are coming out to greet us. They +are friends. Yes, our comrades are safe and well." + +"Then forward to meet them," cried Jim. "I can place full reliance on +what Ali says." + +Riding on again, it was not long before the fugitives met Tom and the +native followers. Shouts and cries of welcome greeted them, and they +were at once escorted back to the zareba. + +"And now tell us the news," said Jim quickly. "We have little time to +rest, and if the enemy are not near at hand, we shall push ahead at +once." + +"Then you have nothing to fear," answered Tom, with assurance. "The +Mullah's followers have left us, and I have just been able to ascertain +that they had had news of the approach of the English forces, and had +been withdrawn to repel them. Meanwhile, I am glad to say that we have +given an excellent account of ourselves. Thanks to the preparations +made, when the enemy advanced we beat them back with ease. Time and +again they rushed to the attack, but the barbed wire kept them at a +distance, and our rifles mowed them down. How many we accounted for I +cannot say, but large numbers were killed. In fact, they soon began to +lose heart, and I fancy they were glad when the order suddenly reached +them that they were to withdraw. And what of you?" + +"That you shall hear later," said Jim. "The order now is to retire. +Strike camp at once. Load the beasts, and prepare to march in an hour at +most." + +So rapidly were the orders carried out, and so eagerly did the natives +fly to obey them, that within the time mentioned the whole of the +expedition was marching north, _en route_ to the coast. Camels staggered +along with tanks of sweet water upon their backs; others carried +fresh-cut grass; while the remainder were laden with ammunition and food +for the men. Ten days later all arrived at Berbera, where they attracted +a great deal of attention. Having rewarded the followers with gifts of +camels, and having taken farewell of Tom and of Ali Kumar, Jim, his +father, and John Margetson took ship for England, where they arrived in +due time. + +"Back, and alive!" gasped Mr. George Hubbard, when the colonel and Jim +put in an appearance at his house. "It is astounding! I had expected to +hear nothing more of you, and your arrival lifts a weight from my heart. +How could it be otherwise when the news just comes to hand that a +portion of the British expedition was hemmed in a few days ago by the +Mullah, and, falling short of ammunition, suffered very heavy losses? +However, though this reverse has put a stop to the campaign for a +moment, it is certain to be renewed again, and then this Mullah will be +crushed. Indeed, the cables have told us that, since the disaster to +our own troops, the Abyssinians have come in contact with this host of +Somali plunderers and have inflicted severe losses upon them. But sit +down and let me have the yarn. Dear, dear! I declare that Jim is as +brown as a berry, and looks quite a man." + +That the colonel was of the same opinion was evident, for very few days +had passed ere he paid a visit to those in authority, and returned with +smiling face and a big blue official envelope. + +"Open it," he said, handing it to Jim. "It is your commission in my old +regiment, given you for the information which you were able to gather in +Somaliland. In two months you and I will be on our way to India, there +to join our brother officers." + +To say that our hero was delighted is to express the matter mildly. He +was almost more excited than he had been when planning his father's +rescue. From that moment all was bustle, for his uniform and many other +things had to be obtained. In due time, however, the two set sail for +India, and entered the Suez Canal. At Aden they left the ship for a few +hours to find Tom and have a chat with him. As for John Margetson, he +soon settled down to the routine of life in charge of a ship. Neither he +nor the colonel, however, will ever forget those days when they were in +the grip of the Mullah. + + +THE END + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's In the grip of the Mullah, by F. S. Brereton + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 42874 *** |